WO2024097332A1 - Conditional validity area - Google Patents

Conditional validity area Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024097332A1
WO2024097332A1 PCT/US2023/036667 US2023036667W WO2024097332A1 WO 2024097332 A1 WO2024097332 A1 WO 2024097332A1 US 2023036667 W US2023036667 W US 2023036667W WO 2024097332 A1 WO2024097332 A1 WO 2024097332A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
cell
rrc
validity
wireless device
base station
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2023/036667
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Oanyong LEE
Hyoungsuk Jeon
Esmael Hejazi Dinan
Taehun Kim
Kyungmin Park
Jongwoo HONG
Original Assignee
Ofinno, Llc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Ofinno, Llc filed Critical Ofinno, Llc
Publication of WO2024097332A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024097332A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/20Selecting an access point
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/08Testing, supervising or monitoring using real traffic
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/16Discovering, processing access restriction or access information
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/20Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/27Transitions between radio resource control [RRC] states
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/14Relay systems
    • H04B7/15Active relay systems
    • H04B7/185Space-based or airborne stations; Stations for satellite systems
    • H04B7/1851Systems using a satellite or space-based relay
    • H04B7/18513Transmission in a satellite or space-based system
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/06Reselecting a communication resource in the serving access point
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/30Connection release
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W84/00Network topologies
    • H04W84/02Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]
    • H04W84/04Large scale networks; Deep hierarchical networks
    • H04W84/06Airborne or Satellite Networks

Definitions

  • FIG. 1 A and FIG. 1 B illustrate example mobile communication networks in which embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented.
  • FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B respectively illustrate a New Radio (NR) user plane and control plane protocol stack.
  • NR New Radio
  • FIG. 3 illustrates an example of services provided between protocol layers of the NR user plane protocol stack of FIG. 2A.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack of FIG. 2A.
  • FIG. 4B illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU.
  • FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B respectively illustrate a mapping between logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels for the downlink and uplink.
  • FIG. 6 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of a UE.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates an example configuration of an NR frame into which OFDM symbols are grouped.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates an example configuration of a slot in the time and frequency domain for an NR carrier.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates an example of bandwidth adaptation using three configured BWPs for an NR carrier.
  • FIG. 10A illustrates three carrier aggregation configurations with two component carriers.
  • FIG. 10B illustrates an example of how aggregated cells may be configured into one or more PUCCH groups.
  • FIG. 11A illustrates an example of an SS/PBCH block structure and location.
  • FIG. 11B illustrates an example of CSI-RSs that are mapped in the time and frequency domains.
  • FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B respectively illustrate examples of three downlink and uplink beam management procedures.
  • FIG. 13A, FIG. 13B, and FIG. 13C respectively illustrate a four-step contention-based random access procedure, a two-step contention-free random access procedure, and another two-step random access procedure.
  • FIG. 14A illustrates an example of CORESET configurations for a bandwidth part.
  • FIG. 14B illustrates an example of a COE-to-REG mapping for DOI transmission on a CORESET and PDCCH processing.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates an example of a wireless device in communication with a base station.
  • FIG. 16A, FIG. 16B, FIG. 160, and FIG. 16D illustrate example structures for uplink and downlink transmission.
  • FIG. 17 A and FIG. 17B illustrate an example of NTN architectures.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates examples of deployments of various platform types.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates examples of propagation delay corresponding to satellite types of different altitudes and different elevation angle (degrees).
  • FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B illustrate examples of service link with maximum propagation delay of the cell/beam.
  • FIG. 21A and FIG. 21 B illustrate examples of received signal strength when UE is in terrestrial network and NTN.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates an example of an NTN.
  • FIG. 23 illustrates an example of idle/inactive measurement information report.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates an example of idle/inactive measurement information report.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates an example of idle/inactive measurement information report.
  • FIG. 26 illustrates an example scenario that one or more cells are updated (e.g., selected and/or determined) after or in response to performing feeder link switch.
  • FIG. 27 illustrates an example scenario that one or more cells are updated (e.g., selected and/or determined) after or in response to performing feeder link switch.
  • FIG. 28 illustrates an example of updating (e.g., selecting and/or determining) validity cells that are associated with validity time condition or validity location condition.
  • FIG. 29 illustrates an example of updating (e.g., selecting and/or determining) validity cells that are associated with validity time condition.
  • FIG. 30 illustrates an example of updating (e.g., selecting and/or determining) validity cells that are associated with validity time condition.
  • FIG. 31 illustrates an example of updating (e.g., selecting and/or determining) validity cells that are associated with validity time condition.
  • FIG. 32 illustrates an example flow diagram of validity cell determination in the disclosure.
  • FIG. 33 illustrates an example flow diagram of validity cell determination in the disclosure.
  • Embodiments may be configured to operate as needed.
  • the disclosed mechanism may be performed when certain criteria are met, for example, in a wireless device, a base station, a radio environment, a network, a combination of the above, and/or the like.
  • Example criteria may be based, at least in part, on for example, wireless device or network node configurations, traffic load, initial system set up, packet sizes, traffic characteristics, a combination of the above, and/or the like. When the one or more criteria are met, various example embodiments may be applied. Therefore, it may be possible to implement example embodiments that selectively implement disclosed protocols.
  • a base station may communicate with a mix of wireless devices. Wireless devices and/or base stations may support multiple technologies, and/or multiple releases of the same technology.
  • Wireless devices may have some specific capability(ies) depending on wireless device category and/or capability(ies).
  • this disclosure may refer to a subset of the total wireless devices in a coverage area.
  • This disclosure may refer to, for example, a plurality of wireless devices of a given LTE or 5G release with a given capability and in a given sector of the base station.
  • the plurality of wireless devices in this disclosure may refer to a selected plurality of wireless devices, and/or a subset of total wireless devices in a coverage area which perform according to disclosed methods, and/or the like.
  • There may be a plurality of base stations or a plurality of wireless devices in a coverage area that may not comply with the disclosed methods, for example, those wireless devices or base stations may perform based on older releases of LTE or 5G technology.
  • a and B are sets and every element of A is an element of B, A is called a subset of B.
  • A is called a subset of B.
  • possible subsets of B ⁇ celH , cell2 ⁇ are: ⁇ celH ⁇ , ⁇ cell2 ⁇ , and ⁇ celH , cell2 ⁇ .
  • the phrase “based on” is indicative that the phrase following the term “based on” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.
  • phrases “in response to” is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “in response to” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.
  • the phrase “depending on” is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “depending on” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.
  • the term configured may relate to the capacity of a device whether the device is in an operational or non- operational state. Configured may refer to specific settings in a device that effect the operational characteristics of the device whether the device is in an operational or non-operational state. In other words, the hardware, software, firmware, registers, memory values, and/or the like may be “configured” within a device, whether the device is in an operational or nonoperational state, to provide the device with specific characteristics. Terms such as “a control message to cause in a device” may mean that a control message has parameters that may be used to configure specific characteristics or may be used to implement certain actions in the device, whether the device is in an operational or non-operational state.
  • parameters may comprise one or more information objects, and an information object may comprise one or more other objects.
  • an information object may comprise one or more other objects.
  • parameter (IE) N comprises parameter (IE) M
  • parameter (IE) M comprises parameter (IE) K
  • parameter (IE) K comprises parameter (information element) J.
  • N comprises K
  • N comprises J.
  • one or more messages comprise a plurality of parameters
  • modules may be implemented as modules.
  • a module is defined here as an element that performs a defined function and has a defined interface to other elements.
  • the modules described in this disclosure may be implemented in hardware, software in combination with hardware, firmware, wetware (e.g. hardware with a biological element) or a combination thereof, which may be behaviorally equivalent.
  • modules may be implemented as a software routine written in a computer language configured to be executed by a hardware machine (such as C, C++, Fortran, Java, Basic, MATLAB or the like) or a modeling/simulation program such as Simulink, Stateflow, GNU Script, or LabVI EWMathScript.
  • modules may be possible to implement modules using physical hardware that incorporates discrete or programmable analog, digital and/or quantum hardware.
  • programmable hardware comprise: computers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, applicationspecific integrated circuits (ASICs); field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs); and complex programmable logic devices (CPLDs).
  • Computers, microcontrollers and microprocessors are programmed using languages such as assembly, C, C++ or the like.
  • FPGAs, ASICs and CPLDs are often programmed using hardware description languages (HDL) such as VHSIC hardware description language (VHDL) or Verilog that configure connections between internal hardware modules with lesser functionality on a programmable device.
  • HDL hardware description languages
  • VHDL VHSIC hardware description language
  • Verilog Verilog
  • FIG. 1A illustrates an example of a mobile communication network 100 in which embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented.
  • the mobile communication network 100 may be, for example, a public land mobile network (PLMN) run by a network operator.
  • PLMN public land mobile network
  • the mobile communication network 100 includes a core network (CN) 102, a radio access network (RAN) 104, and a wireless device 106.
  • CN core network
  • RAN radio access network
  • wireless device 106 wireless device
  • the CN 102 may provide the wireless device 106 with an interface to one or more data networks (DNs), such as public DNs (e.g., the Internet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs.
  • DNs data networks
  • the CN 102 may set up end-to-end connections between the wireless device 106 and the one or more DNs, authenticate the wireless device 106, and provide charging functionality.
  • the RAN 104 may connect the CN 102 to the wireless device 106 through radio communications over an air interface. As part of the radio communications, the RAN 104 may provide scheduling, radio resource management, and retransmission protocols.
  • the communication direction from the RAN 104 to the wireless device 106 over the air interface is known as the downlink and the communication direction from the wireless device 106 to the RAN 104 over the air interface is known as the uplink.
  • Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplink transmissions using frequency division duplexing (FDD), time-division duplexing (TDD), and/or some combination of the two duplexing techniques.
  • FDD frequency division duplexing
  • TDD time-division duplexing
  • wireless device may be used throughout this disclosure to refer to and encompass any mobile device or fixed (non-mobile) device for which wireless communication is needed or usable.
  • a wireless device may be a telephone, smart phone, tablet, computer, laptop, sensor, meter, wearable device, Internet of Things (loT) device, vehicle road side unit (RSU), relay node, automobile, and/or any combination thereof.
  • the term wireless device encompasses other terminology, including user equipment (UE), user terminal (UT), access terminal (AT), mobile station, handset, wireless transmit and receive unit (WTRU), and/or wireless communication device.
  • the RAN 104 may include one or more base stations (not shown).
  • the term base station may be used throughout this disclosure to refer to and encompass a Node B (associated with UMTS and/or 3G standards), an Evolved Node B (eNB, associated with E-UTRA and/or 4G standards), a remote radio head (RRH), a baseband processing unit coupled to one or more RRHs, a repeater node or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a donor node, a Next Generation Evolved Node B (ng-eNB), a Generation Node B (gNB, associated with NR and/or 5G standards), an access point (AP, associated with, for example, WiFi or any other suitable wireless communication standard), and/or any combination thereof.
  • a base station may comprise at least one g N B Central Unit (gNB-CU) and at least one a g N B Distributed Unit (gNB-DU).
  • a base station included in the RAN 104 may include one or more sets of antennas for communicating with the wireless device 106 over the air interface.
  • one or more of the base stations may include three sets of antennas to respectively control three cells (or sectors).
  • the size of a cell may be determined by a range at which a receiver (e.g., a base station receiver) can successfully receive the transmissions from a transmitter (e.g., a wireless device transmitter) operating in the cell.
  • the cells of the base stations may provide radio coverage to the wireless device 106 over a wide geographic area to support wireless device mobility.
  • one or more of the base stations in the RAN 104 may be implemented as a sectored site with more or less than three sectors.
  • One or more of the base stations in the RAN 104 may be implemented as an access point, as a baseband processing unit coupled to several remote radio heads (RRHs), and/or as a repeater or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a donor node.
  • RRHs remote radio heads
  • a baseband processing unit coupled to RRHs may be part of a centralized or cloud RAN architecture, where the baseband processing unit may be either centralized in a pool of baseband processing units or virtualized.
  • a repeater node may amplify and rebroadcast a radio signal received from a donor node.
  • a relay node may perform the same/similar functions as a repeater node but may decode the radio signal received from the donor node to remove noise before amplifying and rebroadcasting the radio signal.
  • the RAN 104 may be deployed as a homogenous network of macrocell base stations that have similar antenna patterns and similar high-level transmit powers.
  • the RAN 104 may be deployed as a heterogeneous network.
  • small cell base stations may be used to provide small coverage areas, for example, coverage areas that overlap with the comparatively larger coverage areas provided by macrocell base stations.
  • the small coverage areas may be provided in areas with high data traffic (or so-called “hotspots”) or in areas with weak macrocell coverage.
  • Examples of small cell base stations include, in order of decreasing coverage area, microcell base stations, picocell base stations, and femtocell base stations or home base stations.
  • 3GPP The Third-Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) was formed in 1998 to provide global standardization of specifications for mobile communication networks similar to the mobile communication network 100 in FIG. 1A.
  • 3GPP has produced specifications for three generations of mobile networks: a third generation (3G) network known as Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), a fourth generation (4G) network known as Long-Term Evolution (LTE), and a fifth generation (5G) network known as 5G System (5GS).
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • 4G fourth generation
  • LTE Long-Term Evolution
  • 5G 5G System
  • Embodiments of the present disclosure are described with reference to the RAN of a 3GPP 5G network, referred to as next-generation RAN (NG- RAN).
  • NG- RAN next-generation RAN
  • Embodiments may be applicable to RANs of other mobile communication networks, such as the RAN 104 in FIG.
  • FIG. 1 A illustrates another example mobile communication network 150 in which embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented.
  • Mobile communication network 150 may be, for example, a PLMN run by a network operator.
  • mobile communication network 150 includes a 5G core network (5G-CN) 152, an NG-RAN 154, and UEs 156A and 156B (collectively UEs 156). These components may be implemented and operate in the same or similar manner as corresponding components described with respect to FIG. 1A.
  • the 5G-CN 152 provides the UEs 156 with an interface to one or more DNs, such as public DNs (e.g., the Internet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs.
  • the 5G-CN 152 may set up end- to-end connections between the UEs 156 and the one or more DNs, authenticate the UEs 156, and provide charging functionality.
  • the basis of the 5G-CN 152 may be a service-based architecture. This means that the architecture of the nodes making up the 5G-CN 152 may be defined as network functions that offer services via interfaces to other network functions.
  • the network functions of the 5G-CN 152 may be implemented in several ways, including as network elements on dedicated or shared hardware, as software instances running on dedicated or shared hardware, or as virtualized functions instantiated on a platform (e.g., a cloud-based platform).
  • the 5G-CN 152 includes an Access and Mobility Management Function (AMF) 158A and a User Plane Function (UPF) 158B, which are shown as one component AMF/UPF 158 in FIG. 1 B for ease of illustration.
  • the UPF 158B may serve as a gateway between the NG-RAN 154 and the one or more DNs.
  • the UPF 158B may perform functions such as packet routing and forwarding, packet inspection and user plane policy rule enforcement, traffic usage reporting, uplink classification to support routing of traffic flows to the one or more DNs, quality of service (QoS) handling for the user plane (e.g., packet filtering, gating, uplink/downlink rate enforcement, and uplink traffic verification), downlink packet buffering, and downlink data notification triggering.
  • QoS quality of service
  • the UPF 158B may serve as an anchor point for intra-/inter-Radio Access Technology (RAT) mobility, an external protocol (or packet) data unit (PDU) session point of interconnect to the one or more DNs, and/or a branching point to support a multi-homed PDU session.
  • the UEs 156 may be configured to receive services through a PDU session, which is a logical connection between a UE and a DN.
  • the AMF 158A may perform functions such as Non-Access Stratum (NAS) signaling termination, NAS signaling security, Access Stratum (AS) security control, inter-CN node signaling for mobility between 3GPP access networks, idle mode UE reachability (e.g., control and execution of paging retransmission), registration area management, intra-system and inter-system mobility support, access authentication, access authorization including checking of roaming rights, mobility management control (subscription and policies), network slicing support, and/or session management function (SMF) selection.
  • NAS may refer to the functionality operating between a CN and a UE
  • AS may refer to the functionality operating between the UE and a RAN.
  • the 5G-CN 152 may include one or more additional network functions that are not shown in FIG. 1B for the sake of clarity.
  • the 5G-CN 152 may include one or more of a Session Management Function (SMF), an NR Repository Function (NRF), a Policy Control Function (PCF), a Network Exposure Function (NEF), a Unified Data Management (UDM), an Application Function (AF), and/or an Authentication Server Function (AUSF).
  • SMF Session Management Function
  • NRF Policy Control Function
  • NEF Network Exposure Function
  • UDM Unified Data Management
  • AF Application Function
  • AUSF Authentication Server Function
  • the NG-RAN 154 may connect the 5G-CN 152 to the UEs 156 through radio communications over the air interface.
  • the NG-RAN 154 may include one or more gNBs, illustrated as gNB 160A and gNB 160B (collectively gNBs 160) and/or one or more ng-eNBs, illustrated as ng-eNB 162A and ng-eNB 162B (collectively ng-eNBs 162).
  • the gNBs 160 and ng-eNBs 162 may be more generically referred to as base stations.
  • the gNBs 160 and ng-eNBs 162 may include one or more sets of antennas for communicating with the UEs 156 over an air interface.
  • one or more of the gNBs 160 and/or one or more of the ng-eNBs 162 may include three sets of antennas to respectively control three cells (or sectors). Together, the cells of the gNBs 160 and the ng-eNBs 162 may provide radio coverage to the UEs 156 over a wide geographic area to support UE mobility.
  • the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to the 5G-CN 152 by means of an NG interface and to other base stations by an Xn interface.
  • the NG and Xn interfaces may be established using direct physical connections and/or indirect connections over an underlying transport network, such as an internet protocol (IP) transport network.
  • IP internet protocol
  • the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to the UEs 156 by means of a Uu interface.
  • gNB 160A may be connected to the UE 156A by means of a Uu interface.
  • the NG, Xn, and Uu interfaces are associated with a protocol stack.
  • the protocol stacks associated with the interfaces may be used by the network elements in FIG. 1 B to exchange data and signaling messages and may include two planes: a user plane and a control plane.
  • the user plane may handle data of interest to a user.
  • the control plane may handle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.
  • the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to one or more AMF/UPF functions of the 5G-CN 152, such as the AMF/UPF 158, by means of one or more NG interfaces.
  • the gNB 160A may be connected to the UPF 158B of the AMF/UPF 158 by means of an NG-User plane (NG-U) interface.
  • the NG-U interface may provide delivery (e.g., non-guaranteed delivery) of user plane PDUs between the gNB 160A and the UPF 158B.
  • the gNB 160A may be connected to the AMF 158A by means of an NG-Control plane (NG-C) interface.
  • the NG-C interface may provide, for example, NG interface management, UE context management, UE mobility management, transport of NAS messages, paging, PDU session management, and configuration transfer and/or warning message transmission.
  • the gNBs 160 may provide NR user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UEs 156 over the Uu interface.
  • the gNB 160A may provide NR user plane and control plane protocol terminations toward the UE 156A over a Uu interface associated with a first protocol stack.
  • the ng-eNBs 162 may provide Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UEs 156 over a Uu interface, where E-UTRA refers to the 3GPP 4G radio-access technology.
  • E-UTRA refers to the 3GPP 4G radio-access technology.
  • the ng-eNB 162B may provide E-UTRA user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UE 156B over a Uu interface associated with a second protocol stack.
  • the 5G-CN 152 was described as being configured to handle NR and 4G radio accesses. It will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art that it may be possible for NR to connect to a 4G core network in a mode known as “non-standalone operation.” In non-standalone operation, a 4G core network is used to provide (or at least support) control-plane functionality (e.g., initial access, mobility, and paging). Although only oneAMF/UPF 158 is shown in FIG. 1 B, one g N B or ng-eNB may be connected to multiple AMF/UPF nodes to provide redundancy and/or to load share across the multiple AMF/UPF nodes.
  • an interface (e.g., Uu, Xn, and NG interfaces) between the network elements in FIG. 1 B may be associated with a protocol stack that the network elements use to exchange data and signaling messages.
  • a protocol stack may include two planes: a user plane and a control plane. The user plane may handle data of interest to a user, and the control plane may handle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.
  • FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B respectively illustrate examples of NR user plane and NR control plane protocol stacks for the Uu interface that lies between a UE 210 and a gNB 220.
  • the protocol stacks illustrated in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B may be the same or similar to those used for the Uu interface between, for example, the UE 156A and the gNB 160A shown in FIG. 1B.
  • FIG. 2A illustrates a NR user plane protocol stack comprising five layers implemented in the UE 210 and the gNB 220.
  • PHYs physical layers
  • PHYs 211 and 221 may provide transport services to the higher layers of the protocol stack and may correspond to layer 1 of the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model.
  • the next four protocols above PHYs 211 and 221 comprise media access control layers (MAGs) 212 and 222, radio link control layers (RLCs) 213 and 223, packet data convergence protocol layers (PDOPs) 214 and 224, and service data application protocol layers (SDAPs) 215 and 225. Together, these four protocols may make up layer 2, or the data link layer, of the OSI model.
  • MAGs media access control layers
  • RLCs radio link control layers
  • PDOPs packet data convergence protocol layers
  • SDAPs service data application protocol layers
  • FIG. 3 illustrates an example of services provided between protocol layers of the NR user plane protocol stack.
  • the SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform QoS flow handling.
  • the UE 210 may receive services through a PDU session, which may be a logical connection between the UE 210 and a DN.
  • the PDU session may have one or more QoS flows.
  • a UPF of a CN e.g., the UPF 158B
  • the SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform mapping/de-mapping between the one or more QoS flows and one or more data radio bearers.
  • the mapping/de-mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers may be determined by the SDAP 225 at the gNB 220.
  • the SDAP 215 at the UE 210 may be informed of the mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers through reflective mapping or control signaling received from the gNB 220.
  • the SDAP 225 at the gNB 220 may mark the downlink packets with a QoS flow indicator (QFI), which may be observed by the SDAP 215 at the UE 210 to determine the mapping/de-mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers.
  • QFI QoS flow indicator
  • the PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform header compression/decompression to reduce the amount of data that needs to be transmitted over the air interface, ciphering/deciphering to prevent unauthorized decoding of data transmitted over the air interface, and integrity protection (to ensure control messages originate from intended sources.
  • the PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform retransmissions of undelivered packets, in-sequence delivery and reordering of packets, and removal of packets received in duplicate due to, for example, an intra-gNB handover.
  • the PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform packet duplication to improve the likelihood of the packet being received and, at the receiver, remove any duplicate packets. Packet duplication may be useful for services that require high reliability.
  • PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform mapping/de-mapping between a split radio bearer and RLC channels in a dual connectivity scenario.
  • Dual connectivity is a technique that allows a UE to connect to two cells or, more generally, two cell groups: a master cell group (MCG) and a secondary cell group (SCG).
  • MCG master cell group
  • SCG secondary cell group
  • a split bearer is when a single radio bearer, such as one of the radio bearers provided by the PDCPs 214 and 224 as a service to the SDAPs 215 and 225, is handled by cell groups in dual connectivity.
  • the PDCPs 214 and 224 may map/de-map the split radio bearer between RLC channels belonging to cell groups.
  • the RLCs 213 and 223 may perform segmentation, retransmission through Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ), and removal of duplicate data units received from MACs 212 and 222, respectively.
  • the RLCs 213 and 223 may support three transmission modes: transparent mode (TM); unacknowledged mode (UM); and acknowledged mode (AM). Based on the transmission mode an RLC is operating, the RLC may perform one or more of the noted functions.
  • the RLC configuration may be per logical channel with no dependency on numerologies and/or Transmission Time Interval (TTI) durations. As shown in FIG. 3, the RLCs 213 and 223 may provide RLC channels as a service to PDCPs 214 and 224, respectively.
  • TTI Transmission Time Interval
  • the MACs 212 and 222 may perform multiplexing/demultiplexing of logical channels and/or mapping between logical channels and transport channels.
  • the multiplexing/demultiplexing may include multiplexing/demultiplexing of data units, belonging to the one or more logical channels, into/from Transport Blocks (TBs) delivered to/from the PHYs
  • the MAC 222 may be configured to perform scheduling, scheduling information reporting, and priority handling between UEs by means of dynamic scheduling. Scheduling may be performed in the g N B 220 (at the MAC 222) for downlink and uplink.
  • the MACs 212 and 222 may be configured to perform error correction through Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) (e.g., one HARQ entity per carrier in case of Carrier Aggregation (CA)), priority handling between logical channels of the UE 210 by means of logical channel prioritization, and/or padding.
  • HARQ Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request
  • CA Carrier Aggregation
  • mapping restrictions in a logical channel prioritization may control which numerology and/or transmission timing a logical channel may use.
  • the MACs 212 and 222 may provide logical channels as a service to the RLCs 213 and 223.
  • the PHYs 211 and 221 may perform mapping of transport channels to physical channels and digital and analog signal processing functions for sending and receiving information over the air interface. These digital and analog signal processing functions may include, for example, coding/decoding and modulation/demodulation.
  • the PHYs 211 and 221 may perform multi-antenna mapping. As shown in FIG. 3, the PHYs 211 and 221 may provide one or more transport channels as a service to the MACs 212 and 222.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates a downlink data flow of three IP packets (n, n+1, and m) through the NR user plane protocol stack to generate two TBs at the gNB 220.
  • An uplink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack may be similar to the downlink data flow depicted in FIG. 4A.
  • the downlink data flow of FIG. 4A begins when SDAP 225 receives the three IP packets from one or more QoS flows and maps the three packets to radio bearers.
  • the SDAP 225 maps IP packets n and n+1 to a first radio bearer 402 and maps IP packet m to a second radio bearer 404.
  • An SDAP header (labeled with an “H” in FIG. 4A) is added to an IP packet.
  • the data unit from/to a higher protocol layer is referred to as a service data unit (SDU) of the lower protocol layer and the data unit to/from a lower protocol layer is referred to as a protocol data unit (PDU) of the higher protocol layer.
  • SDU service data unit
  • PDU protocol data unit
  • the data unit from the SDAP 225 is an SDU of lower protocol layer PDCP 224 and is a PDU of the SDAP 225.
  • the remaining protocol layers in FIG. 4A may perform their associated functionality (e.g. , with respect to FIG. 3), add corresponding headers, and forward their respective outputs to the next lower layer.
  • the PDCP 224 may perform IP-header compression and ciphering and forward its output to the RLC 223.
  • the RLC 223 may optionally perform segmentation (e.g., as shown for IP packet m in FIG. 4A) and forward its output to the MAC 222.
  • the MAC 222 may multiplex a number of RLC PDUs and may attach a MAC subheader to an RLC PDU to form a transport block.
  • the MAC subheaders may be distributed across the MAC PDU, as illustrated in FIG. 4A.
  • the MAC subheaders may be entirely located at the beginning of the MAC PDU.
  • the NR MAC PDU structure may reduce processing time and associated latency because the MAC PDU subheaders may be computed before the full MAC PDU is assembled.
  • FIG. 4B illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU.
  • the MAC subheader includes: an SDU length field for indicating the length (e.g., in bytes) of the MAC SDU to which the MAC subheader corresponds; a logical channel identifier (LCID) field for identifying the logical channel from which the MAC SDU originated to aid in the demultiplexing process; a flag (F) for indicating the size of the SDU length field; and a reserved bit (R) field for future use.
  • SDU length field for indicating the length (e.g., in bytes) of the MAC SDU to which the MAC subheader corresponds
  • LCID logical channel identifier
  • F flag
  • R reserved bit
  • FIG. 4B further illustrates MAC control elements (CEs) inserted into the MAC PDU by a MAC, such as MAC 223 or MAC 222.
  • a MAC such as MAC 223 or MAC 222.
  • FIG. 4B illustrates two MAC CEs inserted into the MAC PDU.
  • MAC CEs may be inserted at the beginning of a MAC PDU for downlink transmissions (as shown in FIG. 4B) and at the end of a MAC PDU for uplink transmissions.
  • MAC CEs may be used for in-band control signaling.
  • Example MAC CEs include: scheduling-related MAC CEs, such as buffer status reports and power headroom reports; activation/deactivation MAC CEs, such as those for activation/deactivation of PDCP duplication detection, channel state information (CSI) reporting, sounding reference signal (SRS) transmission, and prior configured components; discontinuous reception (DRX) related MAC CEs; timing advance MAC CEs; and random access related MAC CEs.
  • a MAC CE may be preceded by a MAC subheader with a similar format as described for MAC SDUs and may be identified with a reserved value in the LCID field that indicates the type of control information included in the MAC CE.
  • logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels are first described as well as a mapping between the channel types.
  • One or more of the channels may be used to carry out functions associated with the NR control plane protocol stack described later below.
  • FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B illustrate, for downlink and uplink respectively, a mapping between logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels.
  • Information is passed through channels between the RLC, the MAC, and the PHY of the NR protocol stack.
  • a logical channel may be used between the RLC and the MAC and may be classified as a control channel that carries control and configuration information in the NR control plane or as a traffic channel that carries data in the NR user plane.
  • a logical channel may be classified as a dedicated logical channel that is dedicated to a specific UE or as a common logical channel that may be used by more than one UE.
  • a logical channel may also be defined by the type of information it carries.
  • the set of logical channels defined by NR include, for example:
  • PCCH paging control channel
  • BCCH broadcast control channel
  • MIB master information block
  • SIBs system information blocks
  • CCCH common control channel
  • DCCH dedicated control channel
  • DTCH dedicated traffic channel
  • T ransport channels are used between the MAC and PHY layers and may be defined by how the information they carry is transmitted over the air interface.
  • the set of transport channels defined by NR include, for example: -- a paging channel (PCH) for carrying paging messages that originated from the PCCH;
  • PCH paging channel
  • BCH broadcast channel
  • DL-SCH downlink shared channel
  • UL-SCH uplink shared channel
  • RACH random access channel
  • the PHY may use physical channels to pass information between processing levels of the PHY.
  • a physical channel may have an associated set of time-frequency resources for carrying the information of one or more transport channels.
  • the PHY may generate control information to support the low-level operation of the PHY and provide the control information to the lower levels of the PHY via physical control channels, known as L1/L2 control channels.
  • the set of physical channels and physical control channels defined by NR include, for example:
  • PBCH physical broadcast channel
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • DOI downlink control information
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • UCI uplink control information
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • PCI which may include HARQ acknowledgments, channel quality indicators (CQI), pre-coding matrix indicators (PMI), rank indicators (Rl), and scheduling requests (SR); and -- a physical random access channel (PRACH) for random access.
  • CQI channel quality indicators
  • PMI pre-coding matrix indicators
  • Rl rank indicators
  • PRACH physical random access channel
  • the physical layer Similar to the physical control channels, the physical layer generates physical signals to support the low-level operation of the physical layer.
  • the physical layer signals defined by NR include: primary synchronization signals (PSS), secondary synchronization signals (SSS), channel state information reference signals (CSI-RS), demodulation reference signals (DMRS), sounding reference signals (SRS), and phase-tracking reference signals (PT-RS). These physical layer signals will be described in greater detail below.
  • FIG. 2B illustrates an example NR control plane protocol stack.
  • the NR control plane protocol stack may use the same/similar first four protocol layers as the example NR user plane protocol stack. These four protocol layers include the PHYs 211 and 221 , the MAGs 212 and 222, the RLCs 213 and 223, and the PDCPs 214 and 224.
  • the NR control plane stack has radio resource controls (RRCs) 216 and 226 and NAS protocols 217 and 237 at the top of the NR control plane protocol stack.
  • RRCs radio resource controls
  • the NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 (e.g., the AMF 158A) or, more generally, between the UE 210 and the CN.
  • the NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 via signaling messages, referred to as NAS messages. There is no direct path between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 through which the NAS messages can be transported.
  • the NAS messages may be transported using the AS of the Uu and NG interfaces.
  • NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality such as authentication, security, connection setup, mobility management, and session management.
  • the RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the gNB 220 or, more generally, between the UE 210 and the RAN.
  • the RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the gNB 220 via signaling messages, referred to as RRC messages.
  • RRC messages may be transmitted between the UE 210 and the RAN using signaling radio bearers and the same/similar PDCP, RLC, MAC, and PHY protocol layers.
  • the MAC may multiplex control-plane and user-plane data into the same transport block (TB).
  • the RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality such as: broadcast of system information related to AS and NAS; paging initiated by the CN or the RAN; establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection between the UE 210 and the RAN; security functions including key management; establishment, configuration, maintenance and release of signaling radio bearers and data radio bearers; mobility functions; QoS management functions; the UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting; detection of and recovery from radio link failure (RLF); and/or NAS message transfer.
  • RRCs 216 and 226 may establish an RRC context, which may involve configuring parameters for communication between the UE 210 and the RAN.
  • FIG. 6 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of a UE.
  • the UE may be the same or similar to the wireless device 106 depicted in FIG. 1A, the UE 210 depicted in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any other wireless device described in the present disclosure.
  • a UE may be in at least one of three RRC states: RRC connected 602 (e.g., RRC_CONNECTED), RRC idle 604 (e.g., RRC_I DLE), and RRC inactive 606 (e.g., RRCJNACTIVE).
  • RRC connected 602 e.g., RRC_CONNECTED
  • RRC idle 604 e.g., RRC_I DLE
  • RRC inactive 606 e.g., RRCJNACTIVE
  • the UE has an established RRC context and may have at least one RRC connection with a base station.
  • the base station may be similar to one of the one or more base stations included in the RAN 104 depicted in FIG. 1A, one of the gNBs 160 or ng-eNBs 162 depicted in FIG. 1 B, the gNB 220 depicted in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any other base station described in the present disclosure.
  • the base station with which the UE is connected may have the RRC context for the UE.
  • the RRC context referred to as the UE context, may comprise parameters for communication between the UE and the base station.
  • These parameters may include, for example: one or more AS contexts; one or more radio link configuration parameters; bearer configuration information (e.g., relating to a data radio bearer, signaling radio bearer, logical channel, QoS flow, and/or PDU session); security information; and/or PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, and/or SDAP layer configuration information.
  • bearer configuration information e.g., relating to a data radio bearer, signaling radio bearer, logical channel, QoS flow, and/or PDU session
  • security information e.g., relating to a data radio bearer, signaling radio bearer, logical channel, QoS flow, and/or PDU session
  • PHY e.g., MAC, RLC, PDCP, and/or SDAP layer configuration information
  • the RAN e.g., the RAN 104 or the NG-RAN 154
  • the UE may measure the signal levels (e.g., reference signal levels) from a serving cell
  • the UE’s serving base station may request a handover to a cell of one of the neighboring base stations based on the reported measurements.
  • the RRC state may transition from RRC connected 602 to RRC idle 604 through a connection release procedure 608 or to RRC inactive 606 through a connection inactivation procedure 610.
  • RRC idle 604 an RRC context may not be established for the UE.
  • the UE may not have an RRC connection with the base station.
  • the UE While in RRC idle 604, the UE may be in a sleep state for the majority of the time (e.g., to conserve battery power).
  • the UE may wake up periodically (e.g., once in every discontinuous reception cycle) to monitor for paging messages from the RAN.
  • Mobility of the UE may be managed by the UE through a procedure known as cell reselection.
  • the RRC state may transition from RRC idle 604 to RRC connected 602 through a connection establishment procedure 612, which may involve a random access procedure as discussed in greater detail below.
  • RRC inactive 606 the RRC context previously established is maintained in the UE and the base station. This allows for a fast transition to RRC connected 602 with reduced signaling overhead as compared to the transition from RRC idle 604 to RRC connected 602.
  • the UE While in RRC inactive 606, the UE may be in a sleep state and mobility of the UE may be managed by the UE through cell reselection.
  • the RRC state may transition from RRC inactive 606 to RRC connected 602 through a connection resume procedure 614 or to RRC idle 604 though a connection release procedure 616 that may be the same as or similar to connection release procedure 608.
  • An RRC state may be associated with a mobility management mechanism.
  • RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 mobility is managed by the UE through cell reselection.
  • the purpose of mobility management in RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 is to allow the network to be able to notify the UE of an event via a paging message without having to broadcast the paging message over the entire mobile communications network.
  • the mobility management mechanism used in RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 may allow the network to track the UE on a cell-group level so that the paging message may be broadcast over the cells of the cell group that the UE currently resides within instead of the entire mobile communication network.
  • the mobility management mechanisms for RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 track the UE on a cell-group level.
  • RAN area identifier RAI
  • TAI tracking area identifier
  • T racking areas may be used to track the UE at the CN level.
  • the CN e.g., the CN 102 or the 5G-CN 152 may provide the UE with a list of TAIs associated with a UE registration area. If the UE moves, through cell reselection, to a cell associated with a TAI not included in the list of TAIs associated with the UE registration area, the UE may perform a registration update with the CN to allow the CN to update the UE’s location and provide the UE with a new the UE registration area.
  • RAN areas may be used to track the UE at the RAN level.
  • the UE may be assigned a RAN notification area.
  • a RAN notification area may comprise one or more cell identities, a list of RAIs, or a list of TAIs.
  • a base station may belong to one or more RAN notification areas.
  • a cell may belong to one or more RAN notification areas. If the UE moves, through cell reselection, to a cell not included in the RAN notification area assigned to the UE, the UE may perform a notification area update with the RAN to update the UE’s RAN notification area.
  • a base station storing an RRC context for a UE or a last serving base station of the UE may be referred to as an anchor base station.
  • An anchor base station may maintain an RRC context for the UE at least during a period of time that the UE stays in a RAN notification area of the anchor base station and/or during a period of time that the UE stays in RRC inactive 606.
  • a gNB such as gNBs 160 in FIG. 1 B, may be split in two parts: a central unit (gNB-CU), and one or more distributed units (gNB-DU).
  • a gNB-CU may be coupled to one or more gNB-DUs using an F1 interface.
  • the gNB-CU may comprise the RRC, the PDCP, and the SDAP.
  • a gNB-DU may comprise the RLC, the MAC, and the PHY.
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency divisional multiplexing
  • M-QAM M-quadrature amplitude modulation
  • M-PSK M-phase shift keying
  • the F parallel symbol streams may be treated as though they are in the frequency domain and used as inputs to an Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (I FFT) block that transforms them into the time domain.
  • I FFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
  • the IFFT block may take in F source symbols at a time, one from each of the F parallel symbol streams, and use each source symbol to modulate the amplitude and phase of one of F sinusoidal basis functions that correspond to the F orthogonal subcarriers.
  • the output of the IFFT block may be F time-domain samples that represent the summation of the F orthogonal subcarriers.
  • the F time-domain samples may form a single OFDM symbol.
  • an OFDM symbol provided by the IFFT block may be transmitted over the air interface on a carrier frequency.
  • the F parallel symbol streams may be mixed using an FFT block before being processed by the IFFT block. This operation produces Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)-precoded OFDM symbols and may be used by UEs in the uplink to reduce the peak to average power ratio (PAPR).
  • DFT Discrete Fourier Transform
  • PAPR peak to average power ratio
  • Inverse processing may be performed on the OFDM symbol at a receiver using an FFT block to recover the data mapped to the source symbols.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates an example configuration of an NR frame into which OFDM symbols are grouped.
  • An NR frame may be identified by a system frame number (SFN).
  • the SFN may repeat with a period of 1024 frames.
  • one NR frame may be 10 milliseconds (ms) in duration and may include 10 subframes that are 1 ms in duration.
  • a subframe may be divided into slots that include, for example, 14 OFDM symbols per slot.
  • the duration of a slot may depend on the numerology used for the OFDM symbols of the slot.
  • a flexible numerology is supported to accommodate different cell deployments (e.g., cells with carrier frequencies below 1 GHz up to cells with carrier frequencies in the mm-wave range).
  • a numerology may be defined in terms of subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix duration.
  • subcarrier spacings may be scaled up by powers of two from a baseline subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz
  • cyclic prefix durations may be scaled down by powers of two from a baseline cyclic prefix duration of 4.7 ps.
  • NR defines numerologies with the following subcarrier spacing/cyclic prefix duration combinations: 15 kHz/4.7 ps; 30 kHz/2.3 ps; 60 kHz/1.2 ps; 120 kHz/0.59 ps; and 240 kHz/0.29 ps.
  • a slot may have a fixed number of OFDM symbols (e.g., 14 OFDM symbols).
  • a numerology with a higher subcarrier spacing has a shorter slot duration and, correspondingly, more slots per subframe.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates this numerology-dependent slot duration and slots-per-subframe transmission structure (the numerology with a subcarrier spacing of 240 kHz is not shown in FIG. 7 for ease of illustration).
  • a subframe in NR may be used as a numerologyindependent time reference, while a slot may be used as the unit upon which uplink and downlink transmissions are scheduled.
  • scheduling in NR may be decoupled from the slot duration and start at any OFDM symbol and last for as many symbols as needed for a transmission. These partial slot transmissions may be referred to as mini-slot or subslot transmissions.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates an example configuration of a slot in the time and frequency domain for an NR carrier.
  • the slot includes resource elements (REs) and resource blocks (RBs).
  • An RE is the smallest physical resource in NR.
  • An RE spans one OFDM symbol in the time domain by one subcarrier in the frequency domain as shown in FIG. 8.
  • An RB spans twelve consecutive REs in the frequency domain as shown in FIG. 8.
  • Such a limitation may limit the NR carrier to 50, 100, 200, and 400 MHz for subcarrier spacings of 15, 30, 60, and 120 kHz, respectively, where the 400 MHz bandwidth may be set based on a 400 MHz per carrier bandwidth limit.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates a single numerology being used across the entire bandwidth of the NR carrier.
  • multiple numerologies may be supported on the same carrier.
  • NR may support wide carrier bandwidths (e.g., up to 400 MHz for a subcarrier spacing of 120 kHz). Not all UEs may be able to receive the full carrier bandwidth (e.g., due to hardware limitations). Also, receiving the full carrier bandwidth may be prohibitive in terms of UE power consumption. In an example, to reduce power consumption and/or for other purposes, a UE may adapt the size of the UE’s receive bandwidth based on the amount of traffic the UE is scheduled to receive. This is referred to as bandwidth adaptation.
  • NR defines bandwidth parts (BWPs) to support UEs not capable of receiving the full carrier bandwidth and to support bandwidth adaptation.
  • BWP may be defined by a subset of contiguous RBs on a carrier.
  • a UE may be configured (e.g., via RRC layer) with one or more downlink BWPs and one or more uplink BWPs per serving cell (e.g., up to four downlink BWPs and up to four uplink BWPs per serving cell).
  • one or more of the configured BWPs for a serving cell may be active. These one or more BWPs may be referred to as active BWPs of the serving cell.
  • the serving cell When a serving cell is configured with a secondary uplink carrier, the serving cell may have one or more first active BWPs in the uplink carrier and one or more second active BWPs in the secondary uplink carrier.
  • a downlink BWP from a set of configured downlink BWPs may be linked with an uplink BWP from a set of configured uplink BWPs if a downlink BWP index of the downlink BWP and an uplink BWP index of the uplink BWP are the same.
  • a UE may expect that a center frequency for a downlink BWP is the same as a center frequency for an uplink BWP.
  • a base station may configure a UE with one or more control resource sets (CORESETs) for at least one search space.
  • CORESETs control resource sets
  • a search space is a set of locations in the time and frequency domains where the UE may find control information.
  • the search space may be a UE-specific search space or a common search space (potentially usable by a plurality of UEs).
  • a base station may configure a UE with a common search space, on a POell or on a primary secondary cell (PSOell), in an active downlink BWP.
  • a BS may configure a UE with one or more resource sets for one or more PUCOH transmissions.
  • a UE may receive downlink receptions (e.g., PDCOH or PDSCH) in a downlink BWP according to a configured numerology (e.g., subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix duration) for the downlink BWP.
  • the UE may transmit uplink transmissions (e.g., PUCOH or PUSCH) in an uplink BWP according to a configured numerology (e.g., subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix length for the uplink BWP).
  • One or more BWP indicator fields may be provided in Downlink Control Information (DCI).
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • a value of a BWP indicator field may indicate which BWP in a set of configured BWPs is an active downlink BWP for one or more downlink receptions.
  • the value of the one or more BWP indicator fields may indicate an active uplink BWP for one or more uplink transmissions.
  • a base station may sem i-statically configure a UE with a default downlink BWP within a set of configured downlink BWPs associated with a PCell. If the base station does not provide the default downlink BWP to the UE, the default downlink BWP may be an initial active downlink BWP. The UE may determine which BWP is the initial active downlink BWP based on a CORESET configuration obtained using the PBCH.
  • a base station may configure a UE with a BWP inactivity timer value for a PCell.
  • the UE may start or restart a BWP inactivity timer at any appropriate time.
  • the UE may start or restart the BWP inactivity timer (a) when the UE detects a DOI indicating an active downlink BWP other than a default downlink BWP for a paired spectra operation; or (b) when a UE detects a DOI indicating an active downlink BWP or active uplink BWP other than a default downlink BWP or uplink BWP for an unpaired spectra operation.
  • the UE may run the BWP inactivity timer toward expiration (for example, increment from zero to the BWP inactivity timer value, or decrement from the BWP inactivity timer value to zero).
  • the UE may switch from the active downlink BWP to the default downlink BWP.
  • a base station may semi-statically configure a UE with one or more BWPs.
  • a UE may switch an active BWP from a first BWP to a second BWP in response to receiving a DOI indicating the second BWP as an active BWP and/or in response to an expiry of the BWP inactivity timer (e.g., if the second BWP is the default BWP).
  • Downlink and uplink BWP switching (where BWP switching refers to switching from a currently active BWP to a not currently active BWP) may be performed independently in paired spectra. In unpaired spectra, downlink and uplink BWP switching may be performed simultaneously. Switching between configured BWPs may occur based on RRC signaling, DOI, expiration of a BWP inactivity timer, and/or an initiation of random access.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates an example of bandwidth adaptation using three configured BWPs for an NR carrier.
  • a UE configured with the three BWPs may switch from one BWP to another BWP at a switching point.
  • the BWPs include: a BWP 902 with a bandwidth of 40 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; a BWP 904 with a bandwidth of 10 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; and a BWP 906 with a bandwidth of 20 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz.
  • the BWP 902 may be an initial active BWP
  • the BWP 904 may be a default BWP.
  • the UE may switch between BWPs at switching points.
  • the UE may switch from the BWP 902 to the BWP 904 at a switching point 908.
  • the switching at the switching point 908 may occur for any suitable reason, for example, in response to an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer (indicating switching to the default BWP) and/or in response to receiving a DCI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP.
  • the UE may switch at a switching point 910 from active BWP 904 to BWP 906 in response receiving a DCI indicating BWP 906 as the active BWP.
  • the UE may switch at a switching point 912 from active BWP 906 to BWP 904 in response to an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer and/or in response receiving a DCI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP.
  • the UE may switch at a switching point 914 from active BWP 904 to BWP 902 in response receiving a DCI indicating BWP 902 as the active BWP.
  • UE procedures for switching BWPs on a secondary cell may be the same/similar as those on a primary cell. For example, the UE may use the timer value and the default downlink BWP for the secondary cell in the same/similar manner as the UE would use these values for a primary cell.
  • CCs component carriers
  • the CCs may have three configurations in the frequency domain.
  • FIG. 10A illustrates the three GA configurations with two CCs.
  • the two CCs are aggregated in the same frequency band (frequency band A) and are located directly adjacent to each other within the frequency band.
  • the two CCs are aggregated in the same frequency band (frequency band A) and are separated in the frequency band by a gap.
  • the two CCs are located in frequency bands (frequency band A and frequency band B).
  • up to 32 CCs may be aggregated.
  • the aggregated CCs may have the same or different bandwidths, subcarrier spacing, and/or duplexing schemes (TDD or FDD).
  • a serving cell for a UE using CA may have a downlink CC.
  • one or more uplink CCs may be optionally configured for a serving cell.
  • the ability to aggregate more downlink carriers than uplink carriers may be useful, for example, when the UE has more data traffic in the downlink than in the uplink.
  • one of the aggregated cells for a UE may be referred to as a primary cell (PCell).
  • the PCell may be the serving cell that the UE initially connects to at RRC connection establishment, reestablishment, and/or handover.
  • the PCell may provide the UE with NAS mobility information and the security input.
  • UEs may have different PCells.
  • the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the downlink primary CC (DL PCC).
  • the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the uplink primary CC (UL PCC).
  • SCells secondary cells
  • the SCells may be configured after the PCell is configured for the UE.
  • an SCell may be configured through an RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure.
  • the carrier corresponding to an SCell may be referred to as a downlink secondary CC (DL SCC).
  • DL SCC downlink secondary CC
  • UL SCC uplink secondary CC
  • Configured SCells for a UE may be activated and deactivated based on, for example, traffic and channel conditions. Deactivation of an SCell may mean that PDCCH and PDSCH reception on the SCell is stopped and PUSCH, SRS, and CQI transmissions on the SCell are stopped. Configured SCells may be activated and deactivated using a MAC CE with respect to FIG. 4B. For example, a MAC CE may use a bitmap (e.g., one bit per SCell) to indicate which SCells (e.g., in a subset of configured SCells) for the UE are activated or deactivated.
  • a bitmap e.g., one bit per SCell
  • Configured SCells may be deactivated in response to an expiration of an SCell deactivation timer (e.g., one SCell deactivation timer per SCell).
  • Downlink control information such as scheduling assignments and scheduling grants, for a cell may be transmitted on the cell corresponding to the assignments and grants, which is known as self-scheduling.
  • the DCI for the cell may be transmitted on another cell, which is known as cross-carrier scheduling.
  • Uplink control information e.g., HARQ acknowledgments and channel state feedback, such as CQI, PMI, and/or Rl
  • the PUCCH of the PCell may become overloaded.
  • Cells may be divided into multiple PUCCH groups.
  • FIG. 10B illustrates an example of how aggregated cells may be configured into one or more PUCCH groups.
  • a PUCCH group 1010 and a PUCCH group 1050 may include one or more downlink CCs, respectively.
  • the PUCCH group 1010 includes three downlink CCs: a PCell 1011, an SCell 1012, and an SCell 1013.
  • the PUCCH group 1050 includes three downlink CCs in the present example: a PCell 1051, an SCell 1052, and an SCell 1053.
  • One or more uplink CCs may be configured as a PCell 1021, an SCell 1022, and an SCell 1023.
  • One or more other uplink CCs may be configured as a primary SCell (PSCell) 1061, an SCell 1062, and an SCell 1063.
  • Uplink control information (UCI) related to the downlink CCs of the PUCCH group 1010 shown as UC1 1031, UC1 1032, and UC1 1033, may be transmitted in the uplink of the PCell 1021.
  • Uplink control information (UCI) related to the downlink CCs of the PUCCH group 1050, shown as UC1 1071, UC1 1072, and UC1 1073, may be transmitted in the uplink of the PSCell 1061.
  • a cell comprising a downlink carrier and optionally an uplink carrier, may be assigned with a physical cell ID and a cell index.
  • the physical cell ID or the cell index may identify a downlink carrier and/or an uplink carrier of the cell, for example, depending on the context in which the physical cell ID is used.
  • a physical cell ID may be determined using a synchronization signal transmitted on a downlink component carrier.
  • a cell index may be determined using RRC messages.
  • a physical cell ID may be referred to as a carrier ID
  • a cell index may be referred to as a carrier index.
  • the disclosure when the disclosure refers to a first physical cell ID for a first downlink carrier, the disclosure may mean the first physical cell ID is for a cell comprising the first downlink carrier.
  • the same/similar concept may apply to, for example, a carrier activation.
  • the disclosure indicates that a first carrier is activated, the specification may mean that a cell comprising the first carrier is activated.
  • a multi-carrier nature of a PHY may be exposed to a MAC.
  • a HARQ entity may operate on a serving cell.
  • a transport block may be generated per assignment/grant per serving cell.
  • a transport block and potential HARQ retransmissions of the transport block may be mapped to a serving cell.
  • a base station may transmit (e.g., unicast, multicast, and/or broadcast) one or more Reference Signals (RSs) to a UE (e.g., PSS, SSS, CSI-RS, DMRS, and/or PT-RS, as shown in FIG. 5A).
  • RSs Reference Signals
  • the UE may transmit one or more RSs to the base station (e.g., DMRS, PT-RS, and/or SRS, as shown in FIG. 5B).
  • the PSS and the SSS may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE to synchronize the UE to the base station.
  • the PSS and the SSS may be provided in a synchronization signal (SS) I physical broadcast channel (PBOH) block that includes the PSS, the SSS, and the PBOH.
  • the base station may periodically transmit a burst of SS/PBOH blocks.
  • FIG. 11A illustrates an example of an SS/PBCH block's structure and location.
  • a burst of SS/PBCH blocks may include one or more SS/PBOH blocks (e.g., 4 SS/PBOH blocks, as shown in FIG. 11A). Bursts may be transmitted periodically (e.g., every 2 frames or 20 ms).
  • a burst may be restricted to a half-frame (e.g., a first half-frame having a duration of 5 ms).
  • FIG. 11A is an example, and that these parameters (number of SS/PBOH blocks per burst, periodicity of bursts, position of burst within the frame) may be configured based on, for example: a carrier frequency of a cell in which the SS/PBOH block is transmitted; a numerology or subcarrier spacing of the cell; a configuration by the network (e.g., using RRC signaling); or any other suitable factor.
  • the UE may assume a subcarrier spacing for the SS/PBOH block based on the carrier frequency being monitored, unless the radio network configured the UE to assume a different subcarrier spacing.
  • the SS/PBOH block may span one or more OFDM symbols in the time domain (e.g., 4 OFDM symbols, as shown in the example of FIG. 11A) and may span one or more subcarriers in the frequency domain (e.g., 240 contiguous subcarriers).
  • the PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH may have a common center frequency.
  • the PSS may be transmitted first and may span, for example, 1 OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers.
  • the SSS may be transmitted after the PSS (e.g., two symbols later) and may span 1 OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers.
  • the PBCH may be transmitted after the PSS (e.g., across the next 3 OFDM symbols) and may span 240 subcarriers.
  • the location of the SS/PBCH block in the time and frequency domains may not be known to the UE (e.g., if the UE is searching for the cell).
  • the UE may monitor a carrier for the PSS. For example, the UE may monitor a frequency location within the carrier. If the PSS is not found after a certain duration (e.g., 20 ms), the UE may search for the PSS at a different frequency location within the carrier, as indicated by a synchronization raster. If the PSS is found at a location in the time and frequency domains, the UE may determine, based on a known structure of the SS/PBCH block, the locations of the SSS and the PBCH, respectively.
  • the SS/PBCH block may be a celldefining SS block (CD-SSB).
  • a primary cell may be associated with a CD-SSB.
  • the CD-SSB may be located on a synchronization raster.
  • a cell selection/search and/or reselection may be based on the CD- SSB.
  • the SS/PBCH block may be used by the UE to determine one or more parameters of the cell. For example, the UE may determine a physical cell identifier (PCI) of the cell based on the sequences of the PSS and the SSS, respectively. The UE may determine a location of a frame boundary of the cell based on the location of the SS/PBCH block. For example, the SS/PBCH block may indicate that it has been transmitted in accordance with a transmission pattern, wherein a SS/PBCH block in the transmission pattern is a known distance from the frame boundary.
  • PCI physical cell identifier
  • the PBCH may use a QPSK modulation and may use forward error correction (FEC).
  • FEC forward error correction
  • the FEC may use polar coding.
  • One or more symbols spanned by the PBCH may carry one or more DMRSs for demodulation of the PBCH.
  • the PBCH may include an indication of a current system frame number (SFN) of the cell and/or a SS/PBCH block timing index. These parameters may facilitate time synchronization of the UE to the base station.
  • the PBCH may include a master information block (MIB) used to provide the UE with one or more parameters. The MIB may be used by the UE to locate remaining minimum system information (RMSI) associated with the cell.
  • MIB master information block
  • the RMSI may include a System Information Block Type 1 (SIB1 ).
  • SIB1 may contain information needed by the UE to access the cell.
  • the UE may use one or more parameters of the MIB to monitor PDCOH, which may be used to schedule PDSCH.
  • the PDSCH may include the SIB1.
  • the SIB1 may be decoded using parameters provided in the MIB.
  • the PBOH may indicate an absence of SIB1. Based on the PBOH indicating the absence of SIB1 , the UE may be pointed to a frequency.
  • the UE may search for an SS/PBCH block at the frequency to which the UE is pointed.
  • the UE may assume that one or more SS/PBOH blocks transmitted with a same SS/PBOH block index are quasi co-located (QCLed) (e.g. , having the same/similar Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average gain, average delay, and/or spatial Rx parameters).
  • QCL quasi co-located
  • SS/PBOH blocks may be transmitted in spatial directions (e.g., using different beams that span a coverage area of the cell).
  • a first SS/PBOH block may be transmitted in a first spatial direction using a first beam
  • a second SS/PBOH block may be transmitted in a second spatial direction using a second beam.
  • a base station may transmit a plurality of SS/PBOH blocks.
  • a first PCI of a first SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks may be different from a second PCI of a second SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks.
  • the PCIs of SS/PBCH blocks transmitted in different frequency locations may be different or the same.
  • the CSI-RS may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE to acquire channel state information (CSI).
  • the base station may configure the UE with one or more CSI-RSs for channel estimation or any other suitable purpose.
  • the base station may configure a UE with one or more of the same/similar CSI-RSs.
  • the UE may measure the one or more CSI-RSs.
  • the UE may estimate a downlink channel state and/or generate a CSI report based on the measuring of the one or more downlink CSI-RSs.
  • the UE may provide the CSI report to the base station.
  • the base station may use feedback provided by the UE (e.g., the estimated downlink channel state) to perform link adaptation.
  • the base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more CSI-RS resource sets.
  • a CSI-RS resource may be associated with a location in the time and frequency domains and a periodicity.
  • the base station may selectively activate and/or deactivate a CSI-RS resource.
  • the base station may indicate to the UE that a CSI-RS resource in the CSI-RS resource set is activated and/or deactivated.
  • the base station may configure the UE to report CSI measurements.
  • the base station may configure the UE to provide CSI reports periodically, aperiodically, or semi-persistently.
  • periodic CSI reporting the UE may be configured with a timing and/or periodicity of a plurality of CSI reports.
  • the base station may request a CSI report.
  • the base station may command the UE to measure a configured CSI-RS resource and provide a CSI report relating to the measurements.
  • the base station may configure the UE to transmit periodically, and selectively activate or deactivate the periodic reporting.
  • the base station may configure the UE with a CSI-RS resource set and CSI reports using RRC signaling.
  • the CSI-RS configuration may comprise one or more parameters indicating, for example, up to 32 antenna ports.
  • the UE may be configured to employ the same OFDM symbols for a downlink CSI-RS and a control resource set (CORESET) when the downlink CSI-RS and CORESET are spatially GCLed and resource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of the physical resource blocks (PRBs) configured for the CORESET.
  • CORESET control resource set
  • the UE may be configured to employ the same OFDM symbols for downlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocks when the downlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocks are spatially QCLed and resource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of PRBs configured for the SS/PBCH blocks.
  • Downlink DMRSs may be transmitted by a base station and used by a UE for channel estimation.
  • the downlink DMRS may be used for coherent demodulation of one or more downlink physical channels (e.g., PDSCH).
  • An NR network may support one or more variable and/or configurable DMRS patterns for data demodulation.
  • At least one downlink DMRS configuration may support a front-loaded DMRS pattern.
  • a front-loaded DMRS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., one or two adjacent OFDM symbols).
  • a base station may semi- statically configure the UE with a number (e.g. a maximum number) of front-loaded DMRS symbols for PDSCH.
  • a DMRS configuration may support one or more DMRS ports. For example, for single user-MIMO, a DMRS configuration may support up to eight orthogonal downlink DMRS ports per UE. For multiuser-MI MO, a DMRS configuration may support up to 4 orthogonal downlink DMRS ports per UE.
  • a radio network may support (e.g., at least for CP-OFDM) a common DMRS structure for downlink and uplink, wherein a DMRS location, a DMRS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence may be the same or different.
  • the base station may transmit a downlink DMRS and a corresponding PDSCH using the same precoding matrix.
  • the UE may use the one or more downlink DMRSs for coherent demodulation/channel estimation of the PDSCH.
  • a transmitter may use a precoder matrices for a part of a transmission bandwidth.
  • the transmitter may use a first precoder matrix for a first bandwidth and a second precoder matrix for a second bandwidth.
  • the first precoder matrix and the second precoder matrix may be different based on the first bandwidth being different from the second bandwidth.
  • the UE may assume that a same precoding matrix is used across a set of PRBs.
  • the set of PRBs may be denoted as a precoding resource block group (PRG).
  • PRG precoding resource block group
  • a PDSCH may comprise one or more layers.
  • the UE may assume that at least one symbol with DMRS is present on a layer of the one or more layers of the PDSCH.
  • a higher layer may configure up to 3 DMRSs for the PDSCH.
  • Downlink PT-RS may be transmitted by a base station and used by a UE for phase-noise compensation. Whether a downlink PT-RS is present or not may depend on an RRC configuration. The presence and/or pattern of the downlink PT-RS may be configured on a UE-specific basis using a combination of RRC signaling and/or an association with one or more parameters employed for other purposes (e.g., modulation and coding scheme (MCS)), which may be indicated by DCI. When configured, a dynamic presence of a downlink PT-RS may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MCS.
  • An NR network may support a plurality of PT-RS densities defined in the time and/or frequency domains.
  • a frequency domain density may be associated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth.
  • the UE may assume a same precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port.
  • a number of PT-RS ports may be fewer than a number of DMRS ports in a scheduled resource.
  • Downlink PT-RS may be confined in the scheduled time/frequency duration for the UE.
  • Downlink PT-RS may be transmitted on symbols to facilitate phase tracking at the receiver.
  • the UE may transmit an uplink DMRS to a base station for channel estimation.
  • the base station may use the uplink DMRS for coherent demodulation of one or more uplink physical channels.
  • the UE may transmit an uplink DMRS with a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH.
  • the uplink DM-RS may span a range of frequencies that is similar to a range of frequencies associated with the corresponding physical channel.
  • the base station may configure the UE with one or more uplink DMRS configurations. At least one DMRS configuration may support a front- loaded DMRS pattern.
  • the front-loaded DMRS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., one or two adjacent OFDM symbols).
  • One or more uplink DMRSs may be configured to transmit at one or more symbols of a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH.
  • the base station may semi-statically configure the UE with a number (e.g. maximum number) of front-loaded DMRS symbols for the PUSCH and/or the PUCCH, which the UE may use to schedule a single-symbol DMRS and/or a double-symbol DMRS.
  • An NR network may support (e.g., for cyclic prefix orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (CP-OFDM)) a common DMRS structure for downlink and uplink, wherein a DMRS location, a DMRS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence for the DMRS may be the same or different.
  • CP-OFDM cyclic prefix orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • a PUSCH may comprise one or more layers, and the UE may transmit at least one symbol with DMRS present on a layer of the one or more layers of the PUSCH.
  • a higher layer may configure up to three DMRSs for the PUSCH.
  • Uplink PT-RS (which may be used by a base station for phase tracking and/or phase-noise compensation) may or may not be present depending on an RRC configuration of the UE.
  • the presence and/or pattern of uplink PT- RS may be configured on a UE-specific basis by a combination of RRC signaling and/or one or more parameters employed for other purposes (e.g., Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS)), which may be indicated by DCI.
  • MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme
  • a dynamic presence of uplink PT-RS may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MCS.
  • a radio network may support a plurality of uplink PT-RS densities defined in time/frequency domain.
  • a frequency domain density may be associated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth.
  • the UE may assume a same precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port.
  • a number of PT-RS ports may be fewer than a number of DMRS ports in a scheduled resource.
  • uplink PT-RS may be confined in the scheduled time/frequency duration for the UE.
  • SRS may be transmitted by a UE to a base station for channel state estimation to support uplink channel dependent scheduling and/or link adaptation.
  • SRS transmitted by the UE may allow a base station to estimate an uplink channel state at one or more frequencies.
  • a scheduler at the base station may employ the estimated uplink channel state to assign one or more resource blocks for an uplink PUSCH transmission from the UE.
  • the base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more SRS resource sets. For an SRS resource set, the base station may configure the UE with one or more SRS resources.
  • An SRS resource set applicability may be configured by a higher layer (e.g., RRC) parameter.
  • an SRS resource in a SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets may be transmitted at a time instant (e.g., simultaneously).
  • the UE may transmit one or more SRS resources in SRS resource sets.
  • An NR network may support aperiodic, periodic and/or semi-persistent SRS transmissions.
  • the UE may transmit SRS resources based on one or more trigger types, wherein the one or more trigger types may comprise higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC) and/or one or more DOI formats.
  • At least one DOI format may be employed for the UE to select at least one of one or more configured SRS resource sets.
  • An SRS trigger type 0 may refer to an SRS triggered based on a higher layer signaling.
  • An SRS trigger type 1 may refer to an SRS triggered based on one or more DOI formats.
  • the UE when PUSCH and SRS are transmitted in a same slot, the UE may be configured to transmit SRS after a transmission of a PUSCH and a corresponding uplink DMRS.
  • the base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more SRS configuration parameters indicating at least one of following: a SRS resource configuration identifier; a number of SRS ports; time domain behavior of an SRS resource configuration (e.g., an indication of periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS); slot, minislot, and/or subframe level periodicity; offset for a periodic and/or an aperiodic SRS resource; a number of OFDM symbols in an SRS resource; a starting OFDM symbol of an SRS resource; an SRS bandwidth; a frequency hopping bandwidth; a cyclic shift; and/or an SRS sequence ID.
  • SRS resource configuration identifier e.g., an indication of periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS
  • slot, minislot, and/or subframe level periodicity e.g., an indication of periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS
  • An antenna port is defined such that the channel over which a symbol on the antenna port is conveyed can be inferred from the channel over which another symbol on the same antenna port is conveyed. If a first symbol and a second symbol are transmitted on the same antenna port, the receiver may infer the channel (e.g., fading gain, multipath delay, and/or the like) for conveying the second symbol on the antenna port, from the channel for conveying the first symbol on the antenna port.
  • the channel e.g., fading gain, multipath delay, and/or the like
  • a first antenna port and a second antenna port may be referred to as quasi colocated (QCLed) if one or more large-scale properties of the channel over which a first symbol on the first antenna port is conveyed may be inferred from the channel over which a second symbol on a second antenna port is conveyed.
  • the one or more large-scale properties may comprise at least one of: a delay spread; a Doppler spread; a Doppler shift; an average gain; an average delay; and/or spatial Receiving (Rx) parameters.
  • Beam management may comprise beam measurement, beam selection, and beam indication.
  • a beam may be associated with one or more reference signals.
  • a beam may be identified by one or more beamformed reference signals.
  • the UE may perform downlink beam measurement based on downlink reference signals (e.g., a channel state information reference signal (OS l-RS)) and generate a beam measurement report.
  • the UE may perform the downlink beam measurement procedure after an RRC connection is set up with a base station.
  • downlink reference signals e.g., a channel state information reference signal (OS l-RS)
  • FIG. 11B illustrates an example of channel state information reference signals (CSI-RSs) that are mapped in the time and frequency domains.
  • CSI-RSs channel state information reference signals
  • a square shown in FIG. 11 B may span a resource block (RB) within a bandwidth of a cell.
  • a base station may transmit one or more RRC messages comprising CSI-RS resource configuration parameters indicating one or more CSI-RSs.
  • One or more of the following parameters may be configured by higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC and/or MAC signaling) for a CSI-RS resource configuration: a CSI-RS resource configuration identity, a number of CSI-RS ports, a CSI-RS configuration (e.g., symbol and resource element (RE) locations in a subframe), a CSI-RS subframe configuration (e.g., subframe location, offset, and periodicity in a radio frame), a CSI-RS power parameter, a CSI-RS sequence parameter, a code division multiplexing (CDM) type parameter, a frequency density, a transmission comb, quasi co-location (QCL) parameters (e.g., QCL-scramblingidentity, crs-portscount, mbsfn- subframeconfiglist, csi-rs-configZPid, qcl-csi-rs-configNZPid , and/or other radio resource parameters.
  • the three beams illustrated in FIG. 11 B may be configured for a UE in a UE-specific configuration. Three beams are illustrated in FIG. 11 B (beam #1 , beam #2, and beam #3), more or fewer beams may be configured.
  • Beam #1 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1101 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a first symbol.
  • Beam #2 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1102 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a second symbol.
  • Beam #3 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1103 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a third symbol.
  • a base station may use other subcarriers in a same RB (for example, those that are not used to transmit CSI-RS 1101) to transmit another CSI-RS associated with a beam for another UE.
  • FDM frequency division multiplexing
  • TDM time domain multiplexing
  • CSI-RSs such as those illustrated in FIG. 11 B (e.g., CSI-RS 1101, 1102, 1103) may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE for one or more measurements.
  • the UE may measure a reference signal received power (RSRP) of configured CSI-RS resources.
  • the base station may configure the UE with a reporting configuration and the UE may report the RSRP measurements to a network (for example, via one or more base stations) based on the reporting configuration.
  • the base station may determine, based on the reported measurement results, one or more transmission configuration indication (TCI) states comprising a number of reference signals.
  • TCI transmission configuration indication
  • the base station may indicate one or more TCI states to the UE (e.g., via RRC signaling, a MAC CE, and/or a DCI).
  • the UE may receive a downlink transmission with a receive (Rx) beam determined based on the one or more TCI states.
  • the UE may or may not have a capability of beam correspondence. If the UE has the capability of beam correspondence, the UE may determine a spatial domain filter of a transmit (Tx) beam based on a spatial domain filter of the corresponding Rx beam. If the UE does not have the capability of beam correspondence, the UE may perform an uplink beam selection procedure to determine the spatial domain filter of the Tx beam.
  • the UE may perform the uplink beam selection procedure based on one or more sounding reference signal (SRS) resources configured to the UE by the base station.
  • the base station may select and indicate uplink beams for the UE based on measurements of the one or more SRS resources transmitted by the UE.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • a UE may assess (e.g., measure) a channel quality of one or more beam pair links, a beam pair link comprising a transmitting beam transmitted by a base station and a receiving beam received by the UE. Based on the assessment, the UE may transmit a beam measurement report indicating one or more beam pair quality parameters comprising, e.g. , one or more beam identifications (e.g. , a beam index, a reference signal index, or the like), RSRP, a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), a channel quality indicator (CQI), and/or a rank indicator (Rl).
  • FIG. 12A illustrates examples of three downlink beam management procedures: P1, P2, and P3.
  • Procedure P1 may enable a UE measurement on transmit (Tx) beams of a transmission reception point (TRP) (or multiple TRPs), e.g., to support a selection of one or more base station Tx beams and/or UE Rx beams (shown as ovals in the top row and bottom row, respectively, of P1).
  • Beamforming at a TRP may comprise a Tx beam sweep for a set of beams (shown, in the top rows of P1 and P2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow).
  • Beamforming at a UE may comprise an Rx beam sweep for a set of beams (shown, in the bottom rows of P1 and P3, as ovals rotated in a clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow).
  • Procedure P2 may be used to enable a UE measurement on Tx beams of a TRP (shown, in the top row of P2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow).
  • the UE and/or the base station may perform procedure P2 using a smaller set of beams than is used in procedure P1 , or using narrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. This may be referred to as beam refinement.
  • the UE may perform procedure P3 for Rx beam determination by using the same Tx beam at the base station and sweeping an Rx beam at the UE.
  • FIG. 12B illustrates examples of three uplink beam management procedures: U1, U2, and U3.
  • Procedure U1 may be used to enable a base station to perform a measurement on Tx beams of a UE, e.g., to support a selection of one or more UE Tx beams and/or base station Rx beams (shown as ovals in the top row and bottom row, respectively, of U1).
  • Beamforming at the UE may include, e.g., a Tx beam sweep from a set of beams (shown in the bottom rows of U1 and U3 as ovals rotated in a clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow).
  • Beamforming at the base station may include, e.g., an Rx beam sweep from a set of beams (shown, in the top rows of U1 and U2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow).
  • Procedure U2 may be used to enable the base station to adjust its Rx beam when the UE uses a fixed Tx beam.
  • the UE and/or the base station may perform procedure U2 using a smaller set of beams than is used in procedure P1, or using narrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. This may be referred to as beam refinement
  • the UE may perform procedure U3 to adjust its Tx beam when the base station uses a fixed Rx beam.
  • a UE may initiate a beam failure recovery (BFR) procedure based on detecting a beam failure.
  • the UE may transmit a BFR request (e.g., a preamble, a UCI, an SR, a MAC GE, and/or the like) based on the initiating of the BFR procedure.
  • the UE may detect the beam failure based on a determination that a quality of beam pair link(s) of an associated control channel is unsatisfactory (e.g., having an error rate higher than an error rate threshold, a received signal power lower than a received signal power threshold, an expiration of a timer, and/or the like).
  • the UE may measure a quality of a beam pair link using one or more reference signals (RSs) comprising one or more SS/PBOH blocks, one or more CSI-RS resources, and/or one or more demodulation reference signals (DMRSs).
  • RSs reference signals
  • a quality of the beam pair link may be based on one or more of a block error rate (BLER), an RSRP value, a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) value, a reference signal received quality (RSRQ) value, and/or a CSI value measured on RS resources.
  • the base station may indicate that an RS resource is quasi co-located (QCLed) with one or more DM-RSs of a channel (e.g.
  • the RS resource and the one or more DMRSs of the channel may be QCLed when the channel characteristics (e.g., Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, spatial Rx parameter, fading, and/or the like) from a transmission via the RS resource to the UE are similar or the same as the channel characteristics from a transmission via the channel to the UE.
  • the channel characteristics e.g., Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, spatial Rx parameter, fading, and/or the like
  • a network e.g., a gNB and/or an ng-eNB of a network
  • the UE may initiate a random access procedure.
  • a UE in an RRC_I DLE state and/or an RRC_I NACTI VE state may initiate the random access procedure to request a connection setup to a network.
  • the UE may initiate the random access procedure from an RRC_CONNECTED state.
  • the UE may initiate the random access procedure to request uplink resources (e.g., for uplink transmission of an SR when there is no PUCOH resource available) and/or acquire uplink timing (e.g., when uplink synchronization status is non-synchronized).
  • the UE may initiate the random access procedure to request one or more system information blocks (SIBs) (e.g., other system information such as SIB2, SIB3, and/or the like).
  • SIBs system information blocks
  • the UE may initiate the random access procedure for a beam failure recovery request.
  • a network may initiate a random access procedure for a handover and/or for establishing time alignment for an SCell addition.
  • FIG. 13A illustrates a four-step contention-based random access procedure.
  • a base station may transmit a configuration message 1310 to the UE.
  • the procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A comprises transmission of four messages: a Msg 1 1311, a Msg 2 1312, a Msg 31313, and a Msg 41314.
  • the Msg 1 1311 may include and/or be referred to as a preamble (or a random access preamble).
  • the Msg 2 1312 may include and/or be referred to as a random access response (RAR).
  • RAR random access response
  • the configuration message 1310 may be transmitted, for example, using one or more RRC messages.
  • the one or more RRC messages may indicate one or more random access channel (RACH) parameters to the UE.
  • RACH parameters may comprise at least one of following: general parameters for one or more random access procedures (e.g., RACH-configGeneral ⁇ ; cell-specific parameters (e.g., RACH-ConfigCommon); and/or dedicated parameters (e.g., RACH-configDedicated ⁇ .
  • the base station may broadcast or multicast the one or more RRC messages to one or more UEs.
  • the one or more RRC messages may be UE-specific (e.g., dedicated RRC messages transmitted to a UE in an RRC_CONNECTED state and/or in an RRCJNACTIVE state).
  • the UE may determine, based on the one or more RACH parameters, a time-frequency resource and/or an uplink transmit power for transmission of the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 31313.
  • the UE may determine a reception timing and a downlink channel for receiving the Msg 2 1312 and the Msg 41314.
  • the one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310 may indicate one or more Physical RACH (PRACH) occasions available for transmission of the Msg 1 1311.
  • the one or more PRACH occasions may be predefined.
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate one or more available sets of one or more PRACH occasions (e.g., prach-Configlndex).
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a) one or more PRACH occasions and (b) one or more reference signals.
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a) one or more preambles and (b) one or more reference signals.
  • the one or more reference signals may be SS/PBCH blocks and/or CSI-RSs.
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate a number of SS/PBCH blocks mapped to a PRACH occasion and/or a number of preambles mapped to a SS/PBCH blocks.
  • the one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310 may be used to determine an uplink transmit power of Msg 1 1311 and/or Msg 3 1313.
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate a reference power for a preamble transmission (e.g., a received target power and/or an initial power of the preamble transmission).
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate: a power ramping step; a power offset between SSB and CSI-RS; a power offset between transmissions of the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 3 1313; and/or a power offset value between preamble groups.
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate one or more thresholds based on which the UE may determine at least one reference signal (e.g., an SSB and/or CSI-RS) and/or an uplink carrier (e.g., a normal uplink (NUL) carrier and/or a supplemental uplink (SUL) carrier).
  • at least one reference signal e.g., an SSB and/or CSI-RS
  • an uplink carrier e.g., a normal uplink (NUL) carrier and/or a supplemental uplink (SUL) carrier.
  • the Msg 1 1311 may include one or more preamble transmissions (e.g., a preamble transmission and one or more preamble retransmissions).
  • An RRC message may be used to configure one or more preamble groups (e.g., group A and/or group B).
  • a preamble group may comprise one or more preambles.
  • the UE may determine the preamble group based on a pathloss measurement and/or a size of the Msg 3 1313.
  • the UE may measure an RSRP of one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs) and determine at least one reference signal having an RSRP above an RSRP threshold (e.g., rsrp-ThresholdSSB and/or rsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS).
  • the UE may select at least one preamble associated with the one or more reference signals and/or a selected preamble group, for example, if the association between the one or more preambles and the at least one reference signal is configured by an RRC message.
  • the UE may determine the preamble based on the one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310. For example, the UE may determine the preamble based on a pathloss measurement, an RSRP measurement, and/or a size of the Msg 3 1313.
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate: a preamble format; a maximum number of preamble transmissions; and/or one or more thresholds for determining one or more preamble groups (e.g., group A and group B).
  • a base station may use the one or more RACH parameters to configure the UE with an association between one or more preambles and one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs).
  • the UE may determine the preamble to include in Msg 1 1311 based on the association.
  • the Msg 1 1311 may be transmitted to the base station via one or more PRACH occasions.
  • the UE may use one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs) for selection of the preamble and for determining of the PRACH occasion.
  • One or more RACH parameters e.g., ra-ssb-OccasionMsklndex and/or ra-OccasionList
  • the UE may perform a preamble retransmission if no response is received following a preamble transmission.
  • the UE may increase an uplink transmit power for the preamble retransmission.
  • the UE may select an initial preamble transmit power based on a pathloss measurement and/or a target received preamble power configured by the network.
  • the UE may determine to retransmit a preamble and may ramp up the uplink transmit power.
  • the UE may receive one or more RACH parameters (e.g., PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMP/NG_STEP) indicating a ramping step for the preamble retransmission.
  • the ramping step may be an amount of incremental increase in uplink transmit power for a retransmission.
  • the UE may ramp up the uplink transmit power if the UE determines a reference signal (e.g., SSB and/or CSI-RS) that is the same as a previous preamble transmission.
  • the UE may count a number of preamble transmissions and/or retransmissions (e.g., PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER).
  • the UE may determine that a random access procedure completed unsuccessfully, for example, if the number of preamble transmissions exceeds a threshold configured by the one or more RACH parameters (e.g., preambleTransMax).
  • the Msg 2 1312 received by the UE may include an RAR.
  • the Msg 21312 may include multiple RARs corresponding to multiple UEs.
  • the Msg 2 1312 may be received after or in response to the transmitting of the Msg 1 1311.
  • the Msg 2 1312 may be scheduled on the DL-SCH and indicated on a PDCCH using a random access RNTI (RA-RNTI).
  • RA-RNTI random access RNTI
  • the Msg 2 1312 may include a time-alignment command that may be used by the UE to adjust the UE’s transmission timing, a scheduling grant for transmission of the Msg 3 1313, and/or a Temporary Cell RNTI (TC-RNTI).
  • TC-RNTI Temporary Cell RNTI
  • the UE may start a time window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the Msg 2 1312.
  • the UE may determine when to start the time window based on a PRACH occasion that the UE uses to transmit the preamble.
  • the UE may start the time window one or more symbols after a last symbol of the preamble (e.g., at a first PDCCH occasion from an end of a preamble transmission).
  • the one or more symbols may be determined based on a numerology.
  • the PDCCH may be in a common search space (e.g., a Typel -PDCCH common search space) configured by an RRC message.
  • the UE may identify the RAR based on a Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI). RNTIs may be used depending on one or more events initiating the random access procedure.
  • the UE may use random access RNTI (RA-RNTI).
  • the RA-RNTI may be associated with PRACH occasions in which the UE transmits a preamble.
  • the UE may determine the RA-RNTI based on: an OFDM symbol index; a slot index; a frequency domain index; and/or a UL carrier indicator of the PRACH occasions.
  • RA-RNTI 1 + s_id + 14 x t_id + 14 x 80 x fjd + 14 x 80 x 8 x ul_carrier_id
  • s_id may be an index of a first OFDM symbol of the PRACH occasion (e.g., 0 ⁇ sjd ⁇ 14)
  • t_id may be an index of a first slot of the PRACH occasion in a system frame (e.g., 0 ⁇ tjd ⁇ 80)
  • fjd may be an index of the PRACH occasion in the frequency domain (e.g., 0 ⁇ fjd ⁇ 8)
  • ul_carrier_id may be a UL carrier used for a preamble transmission (e.g., 0 for an NUL carrier, and 1 for an SUL carrier).
  • the UE may transmit the Msg 3 1313 in response to a successful reception of the Msg 21312 (e.g., using resources identified in the Msg 21312).
  • the Msg 3 1313 may be used for contention resolution in, for example, the contention-based random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A.
  • a plurality of UEs may transmit a same preamble to a base station and the base station may provide an RAR that corresponds to a UE. Collisions may occur if the plurality of UEs interpret the RAR as corresponding to themselves.
  • Contention resolution (e.g., using the Msg 3 1313 and the Msg 41314) may be used to increase the likelihood that the UE does not incorrectly use an identity of another the UE.
  • the UE may include a device identifier in the Msg 3 1313 (e.g., a C-RNTI if assigned, a TC-RNTI included in the Msg 2 1312, and/or any other suitable identifier).
  • the Msg 41314 may be received after or in response to the transmitting of the Msg 3 1313. If a C-RNTI was included in the Msg 3 1313, the base station will address the UE on the PDCCH using the C-RNTI. If the UE's unique C-RNTI is detected on the PDCCH, the random access procedure is determined to be successfully completed. If a TC-RNTI is included in the Msg 31313 (e.g., if the UE is in an RRC_IDLE state or not otherwise connected to the base station), Msg 41314 will be received using a DL-SCH associated with the TC-RNTI.
  • the UE may determine that the contention resolution is successful and/or the UE may determine that the random access procedure is successfully completed.
  • the UE may be configured with a supplementary uplink (SUL) carrier and a normal uplink (NUL) carrier.
  • An initial access (e.g., random access procedure) may be supported in an uplink carrier.
  • a base station may configure the UE with two separate RACH configurations: one for an SUL carrier and the other for an NUL carrier.
  • the network may indicate which carrier to use (NUL or SUL).
  • the UE may determine the SUL carrier, for example, if a measured quality of one or more reference signals is lower than a broadcast threshold.
  • Uplink transmissions of the random access procedure (e.g., the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 31313) may remain on the selected carrier.
  • the UE may switch an uplink carrier during the random access procedure (e.g., between the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 3 1313) in one or more cases.
  • the UE may determine and/or switch an uplink carrier for the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 31313 based on a channel clear assessment (e.g., a listen- before-talk).
  • FIG. 13B illustrates a two-step contention-free random access procedure. Similar to the four-step contentionbased random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A, a base station may, prior to initiation of the procedure, transmit a configuration message 1320 to the UE.
  • the configuration message 1320 may be analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310.
  • the procedure illustrated in FIG. 13B comprises transmission of two messages: a Msg 1 1321 and a Msg 21322.
  • the Msg 1 1321 and the Msg 21322 may be analogous in some respects to the Msg 1 1311 and a Msg 21312 illustrated in FIG. 13A, respectively.
  • the contention- free random access procedure may not include messages analogous to the Msg 3 1313 and/or the Msg 41314.
  • the contention-free random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13B may be initiated for a beam failure recovery, other SI request, SCell addition, and/or handover.
  • a base station may indicate or assign to the UE the preamble to be used for the Msg 1 1321.
  • the UE may receive, from the base station via PDCCH and/or RRC, an indication of a preamble (e.g., ra-Preamblelndex).
  • the UE may start a time window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the RAR.
  • a time window e.g., ra-ResponseWindow
  • the base station may configure the UE with a separate time window and/or a separate PDCCH in a search space indicated by an RRC message (e.g., recoverySearchSpace/d).
  • the UE may monitor for a PDCCH transmission addressed to a Cell RNTI (C-RNTI) on the search space.
  • C-RNTI Cell RNTI
  • the UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes after or in response to transmission of Msg 1 1321 and reception of a corresponding Msg 2 1322.
  • the UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes, for example, if a PDCCH transmission is addressed to a C-RNTI.
  • the UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes, for example, if the UE receives an RAR comprising a preamble identifier corresponding to a preamble transmitted by the UE and/or the RAR comprises a MAC sub-PDU with the preamble identifier.
  • the UE may determine the response as an indication of an acknowledgement for an SI request.
  • FIG. 13C illustrates another two-step random access procedure. Similar to the random access procedures illustrated in FIGS. 13A and 13B, a base station may, prior to initiation of the procedure, transmit a configuration message 1330 to the UE.
  • the configuration message 1330 may be analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310 and/or the configuration message 1320.
  • the procedure illustrated in FIG. 13C comprises transmission of two messages: a Msg A 1331 and a Msg B 1332.
  • Msg A 1331 may be transmitted in an uplink transmission by the UE.
  • Msg A 1331 may comprise one or more transmissions of a preamble 1341 and/or one or more transmissions of a transport block 1342.
  • the transport block 1342 may comprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to the contents of the Msg 3 1313 illustrated in FIG. 13A.
  • the transport block 1342 may comprise UCI (e.g., an SR, a HARQ ACK/NACK, and/or the like).
  • the UE may receive the Msg B 1332 after or in response to transmitting the Msg A 1331.
  • the Msg B 1332 may comprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to the contents of the Msg 2 1312 (e.g., an RAR) illustrated in FIGS. 13A and 13B and/or the Msg 41314 illustrated in FIG. 13A.
  • an RAR e.g., an RAR
  • the UE may initiate the two-step random access procedure in FIG. 13C for licensed spectrum and/or unlicensed spectrum.
  • the UE may determine, based on one or more factors, whether to initiate the two-step random access procedure.
  • the one or more factors may be: a radio access technology in use (e.g., LTE, NR, and/or the like); whether the UE has valid TA or not; a cell size; the UE’s RRC state; a type of spectrum (e.g., licensed vs. unlicensed); and/or any other suitable factors.
  • the UE may determine, based on two-step RACH parameters included in the configuration message 1330, a radio resource and/or an uplink transmit power for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342 included in the Msg A 1331.
  • the RACH parameters may indicate a modulation and coding schemes (MOS), a time-frequency resource, and/or a power control for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342.
  • a time-frequency resource for transmission of the preamble 1341 e.g., a PRACH
  • a time-frequency resource for transmission of the transport block 1342 e.g., a PUSCH
  • the RACH parameters may enable the UE to determine a reception timing and a downlink channel for monitoring for and/or receiving Msg B 1332.
  • the transport block 1342 may comprise data (e.g., delay-sensitive data), an identifier of the UE, security information, and/or device information (e.g., an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (I MSI)).
  • the base station may transmit the Msg B 1332 as a response to the Msg A 1331.
  • the Msg B 1332 may comprise at least one of following: a preamble identifier; a timing advance command; a power control command; an uplink grant (e.g., a radio resource assignment and/or an MOS); a UE identifier for contention resolution; and/or an RNTI (e.g., a C-RNTI or a TC-RNTI).
  • RNTI e.g., a C-RNTI or a TC-RNTI
  • the UE may determine that the two-step random access procedure is successfully completed if: a preamble identifier in the Msg B 1332 is matched to a preamble transmitted by the UE; and/or the identifier of the UE in Msg B 1332 is matched to the identifier of the UE in the Msg A 1331 (e.g., the transport block 1342).
  • a UE and a base station may exchange control signaling.
  • the control signaling may be referred to as L1/L2 control signaling and may originate from the PHY layer (e.g., layer 1) and/or the MAC layer (e.g., layer 2).
  • the control signaling may comprise downlink control signaling transmitted from the base station to the UE and/or uplink control signaling transmitted from the UE to the base station.
  • the downlink control signaling may comprise: a downlink scheduling assignment; an uplink scheduling grant indicating uplink radio resources and/or a transport format; a slot format information; a preemption indication; a power control command; and/or any other suitable signaling.
  • the UE may receive the downlink control signaling in a payload transmitted by the base station on a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH).
  • the payload transmitted on the PDCCH may be referred to as downlink control information (DOI).
  • the PDCCH may be a group common PDCCH (GC-PDCCH) that is common to a group of UEs.
  • a base station may attach one or more cyclic redundancy check (CRC) parity bits to a DCI in order to facilitate detection of transmission errors.
  • CRC cyclic redundancy check
  • the base station may scramble the CRC parity bits with an identifier of the UE (or an identifier of the group of the UEs). Scrambling the CRC parity bits with the identifier may comprise Modulo-2 addition (or an exclusive OR operation) of the identifier value and the CRC parity bits.
  • the identifier may comprise a 16-bit value of a radio network temporary identifier (RNTI).
  • RNTI radio network temporary identifier
  • DCIs may be used for different purposes.
  • a purpose may be indicated by the type of RNTI used to scramble the CRC parity bits.
  • a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a paging RNTI may indicate paging information and/or a system information change notification.
  • the P-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFE” in hexadecimal.
  • a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a system information RNTI (SI-RNTI) may indicate a broadcast transmission of the system information.
  • SI-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFF” in hexadecimal.
  • a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a random access RNTI may indicate a random access response (RAR).
  • a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a cell RNTI may indicate a dynamically scheduled unicast transmission and/or a triggering of PDCCH-ordered random access.
  • a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a temporary cell RNTI may indicate a contention resolution (e.g., a Msg 3 analogous to the Msg 3 1313 illustrated in FIG. 13A).
  • RNTIs configured to the UE by a base station may comprise a Configured Scheduling RNTI (CS-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUCCH RNTI (TPC-PUCCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUSCH RNTI (TPC-PUSCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-SRS RNTI (TPC-SRS-RNTI), an Interruption RNTI (INT-RNTI), a Slot Format Indication RNTI (SFI-RNTI), a Semi-Persistent CSI RNTI (SP-CSI-RNTI), a Modulation and Coding Scheme Cell RNTI (MCS-C-RNTI), and/or the like.
  • CS-RNTI Configured Scheduling RNTI
  • TPC-PUCCH-RNTI Transmit Power Control-PUSCH RNTI
  • TPC-SRS-RNTI Transmit Power Control-SRS RNTI
  • INT-RNTI Interruption RNTI
  • the base station may transmit the DOIs with one or more DOI formats.
  • DOI format 0_0 may be used for scheduling of PUSCH in a cell.
  • DOI format 0_0 may be a fallback DOI format (e.g. , with compact DOI payloads).
  • DOI format 0_1 may be used for scheduling of PUSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DOI payloads than DOI format 0_0).
  • DOI format 1_0 may be used for scheduling of PDSCH in a cell.
  • DOI format 1_0 may be a fallback DOI format (e.g., with compact DOI payloads).
  • DOI format 1_1 may be used for scheduling of PDSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCI payloads than DCI format 1_0).
  • DCI format 2_0 may be used for providing a slot format indication to a group of UEs.
  • DCI format 2_1 may be used for notifying a group of UEs of a physical resource block and/or OFDM symbol where the UE may assume no transmission is intended to the UE.
  • DCI format 2_2 may be used for transmission of a transmit power control (TPC) command for PUCCH or PUSCH.
  • DCI format 2_3 may be used for transmission of a group of TPC commands for SRS transmissions by one or more UEs.
  • DCI format(s) for new functions may be defined in future releases.
  • DCI formats may have different DCI sizes, or may share the same DCI size.
  • the base station may process the DCI with channel coding (e.g., polar coding), rate matching, scrambling and/or QPSK modulation.
  • channel coding e.g., polar coding
  • a base station may map the coded and modulated DCI on resource elements used and/or configured for a PDCCH.
  • the base station may transmit the DCI via a PDCCH occupying a number of contiguous control channel elements (CCEs).
  • the number of the contiguous CCEs (referred to as aggregation level) may be 1 , 2, 4, 8, 16, and/or any other suitable number.
  • a CCE may comprise a number (e.g., 6) of resource-element groups (REGs).
  • REG may comprise a resource block in an OFDM symbol.
  • the mapping of the coded and modulated DCI on the resource elements may be based on mapping of CCEs and REGs (e.g., CCE-to-REG mapping).
  • FIG. 14A illustrates an example of CORESET configurations for a bandwidth part.
  • the base station may transmit a DCI via a PDCCH on one or more control resource sets (CORESETs).
  • a CORESET may comprise a timefrequency resource in which the UE tries to decode a DCI using one or more search spaces.
  • the base station may configure a CORESET in the time-frequency domain.
  • a first CORESET 1401 and a second CORESET 1402 occur at the first symbol in a slot.
  • the first CORESET 1401 overlaps with the second CORESET 1402 in the frequency domain.
  • a third CORESET 1403 occurs at a third symbol in the slot.
  • a fourth CORESET 1404 occurs at the seventh symbol in the slot.
  • FIG. 14B illustrates an example of a CCE-to-REG mapping for DCI transmission on a CORESET and PDCCH processing.
  • the CCE-to-REG mapping may be an interleaved mapping (e.g., for the purpose of providing frequency diversity) or a non-interleaved mapping (e.g., for the purposes of facilitating interference coordination and/or frequency- selective transmission of control channels).
  • the base station may perform different or same CCE-to-REG mapping on different CORESETs.
  • a CORESET may be associated with a CCE-to-REG mapping by RRC configuration.
  • a CORESET may be configured with an antenna port quasi co-location (QCL) parameter.
  • QCL quasi co-location
  • the antenna port QCL parameter may indicate QCL information of a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) for PDCCH reception in the CORESET.
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • the base station may transmit, to the UE, RRC messages comprising configuration parameters of one or more CORESETs and one or more search space sets.
  • the configuration parameters may indicate an association between a search space set and a CORESET.
  • a search space set may comprise a set of PDCOH candidates formed by COEs at a given aggregation level.
  • the configuration parameters may indicate: a number of PDCOH candidates to be monitored per aggregation level; a PDCOH monitoring periodicity and a PDCOH monitoring pattern; one or more DOI formats to be monitored by the UE; and/or whether a search space set is a common search space set or a UE- specific search space set.
  • a set of COEs in the common search space set may be predefined and known to the UE.
  • a set of COEs in the UE-specific search space set may be configured based on the UE’s identity (e.g., C-RNTI).
  • the UE may determine a time-frequency resource for a CORESET based on RRC messages.
  • the UE may determine a CCE-to-REG mapping (e.g., interleaved or non-interleaved, and/or mapping parameters) for the CORESET based on configuration parameters of the CORESET.
  • the UE may determine a number (e.g., at most 10) of search space sets configured on the CORESET based on the RRC messages.
  • the UE may monitor a set of PDCCH candidates according to configuration parameters of a search space set.
  • the UE may monitor a set of PDCCH candidates in one or more CORESETs for detecting one or more DCIs.
  • Monitoring may comprise decoding one or more PDCCH candidates of the set of the PDCCH candidates according to the monitored DCI formats.
  • Monitoring may comprise decoding a DCI content of one or more PDCCH candidates with possible (or configured) PDCCH locations, possible (or configured) PDCCH formats (e.g., number of CCEs, number of PDCCH candidates in common search spaces, and/or number of PDCCH candidates in the UE-specific search spaces) and possible (or configured) DCI formats.
  • the decoding may be referred to as blind decoding.
  • the UE may determine a DCI as valid for the UE, in response to CRC checking (e.g., scrambled bits for CRC parity bits of the DCI matching a RNTI value).
  • the UE may process information contained in the DCI (e.g., a scheduling assignment, an uplink grant, power control, a slot format indication, a downlink preemption, and/or the like).
  • the UE may transmit uplink control signaling (e.g., uplink control information (UCI)) to a base station.
  • the uplink control signaling may comprise hybrid automatic repeat request (HARO) acknowledgements for received DL- SCH transport blocks.
  • the UE may transmit the HARO acknowledgements after receiving a DL-SCH transport block.
  • Uplink control signaling may comprise channel state information (CSI) indicating channel quality of a physical downlink channel.
  • CSI channel state information
  • the UE may transmit the CSI to the base station.
  • the base station based on the received CSI, may determine transmission format parameters (e.g., comprising multi-antenna and beamforming schemes) for a downlink transmission.
  • Uplink control signaling may comprise scheduling requests (SR).
  • SR scheduling requests
  • the UE may transmit an SR indicating that uplink data is available for transmission to the base station.
  • the UE may transmit a UCI (e.g., HARO acknowledgements (HARG-ACK), CSI report, SR, and the like) via a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) or a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH).
  • the UE may transmit the uplink control signaling via a PUCCH using one of several PUCCH formats.
  • PUCCH format 0 may have a length of one or two OFDM symbols and may include two or fewer bits.
  • the UE may transmit UCI in a PUCOH resource using PUCOH format 0 if the transmission is over one or two symbols and the number of HARQ-ACK information bits with positive or negative SR (HARQ-ACK/SR bits) is one or two.
  • PUCOH format 1 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include two or fewer bits.
  • the UE may use PUCOH format 1 if the transmission is four or more symbols and the number of HARQ-ACK/SR bits is one or two.
  • PUCOH format 2 may occupy one or two OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits.
  • the UE may use PUCOH format 2 if the transmission is over one or two symbols and the number of UCI bits is two or more.
  • PUCOH format 3 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits.
  • the UE may use PUCOH format 3 if the transmission is four or more symbols, the number of UCI bits is two or more and PUCOH resource does not include an orthogonal cover code.
  • PUCOH format 4 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. The UE may use PUCOH format 4 if the transmission is four or more symbols, the number of UCI bits is two or more and the PUCOH resource includes an orthogonal cover code.
  • the base station may transmit configuration parameters to the UE for a plurality of PUCOH resource sets using, for example, an RRC message.
  • the plurality of PUCOH resource sets (e.g., up to four sets) may be configured on an uplink BWP of a cell.
  • a PUCOH resource set may be configured with a PUCOH resource set index, a plurality of PUCOH resources with a PUCOH resource being identified by a PUCOH resource identifier (e.g., pucch-Resourceid), and/or a number (e.g. a maximum number) of UCI information bits the UE may transmit using one of the plurality of PUCOH resources in the PUCCH resource set.
  • a PUCOH resource identifier e.g., pucch-Resourceid
  • the UE may select one of the plurality of PUCCH resource sets based on a total bit length of the UCI information bits (e.g., HARQ- ACK, SR, and/or CSI). If the total bit length of UCI information bits is two or fewer, the UE may select a first PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “0”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than two and less than or equal to a first configured value, the UE may select a second PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “1”.
  • a total bit length of the UCI information bits e.g., HARQ- ACK, SR, and/or CSI.
  • the UE may select a third PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “2”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than the second configured value and less than or equal to a third value (e.g., 1406), the UE may select a fourth PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “3”.
  • the UE may determine a PUCCH resource from the PUCCH resource set for UCI (HARQ-ACK, CSI, and/or SR) transmission.
  • the UE may determine the PUCCH resource based on a PUCCH resource indicator in a DCI (e.g., with a DCI format 1_0 or DCI for 1_1) received on a PDCCH.
  • a three-bit PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI may indicate one of eight PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set.
  • the UE may transmit the UCI (HARQ- ACK, CSI and/or SR) using a PUCCH resource indicated by the PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates an example of a wireless device 1502 in communication with a base station 1504 in accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the wireless device 1502 and base station 1504 may be part of a mobile communication network, such as the mobile communication network 100 illustrated in FIG. 1 A, the mobile communication network 150 illustrated in FIG. 1 B, or any other communication network. Only one wireless device 1502 and one base station 1504 are illustrated in FIG. 15, but it will be understood that a mobile communication network may include more than one UE and/or more than one base station, with the same or similar configuration as those shown in FIG. 15.
  • the base station 1504 may connect the wireless device 1502 to a core network (not shown) through radio communications over the air interface (or radio interface) 1506.
  • the communication direction from the base station 1504 to the wireless device 1502 over the air interface 1506 is known as the downlink, and the communication direction from the wireless device 1502 to the base station 1504 over the air interface is known as the uplink.
  • Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplink transmissions using FDD, TDD, and/or some combination of the two duplexing techniques.
  • data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 from the base station 1504 may be provided to the processing system 1508 of the base station 1504.
  • the data may be provided to the processing system 1508 by, for example, a core network.
  • data to be sent to the base station 1504 from the wireless device 1502 may be provided to the processing system 1518 of the wireless device 1502.
  • the processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 may implement layer 3 and layer 2 OSI functionality to process the data for transmission.
  • Layer 2 may include an SDAP layer, a PDCP layer, an RLC layer, and a MAC layer, for example, with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A.
  • Layer 3 may include an RRC layer as with respect to FIG. 2B.
  • the data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 may be provided to a transmission processing system 1510 of base station 1504.
  • the data to be sent to base station 1504 may be provided to a transmission processing system 1520 of the wireless device 1502.
  • the transmission processing system 1510 and the transmission processing system 1520 may implement layer 1 OSI functionality.
  • Layer 1 may include a PHY layer with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A.
  • the PHY layer may perform, for example, forward error correction coding of transport channels, interleaving, rate matching, mapping of transport channels to physical channels, modulation of physical channel, multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like.
  • a reception processing system 1512 may receive the uplink transmission from the wireless device 1502.
  • a reception processing system 1522 may receive the downlink transmission from base station 1504.
  • the reception processing system 1512 and the reception processing system 1522 may implement layer 1 OSI functionality.
  • Layer 1 may include a PHY layer with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A.
  • the PHY layer may perform, for example, error detection, forward error correction decoding, deinterleaving, demapping of transport channels to physical channels, demodulation of physical channels, MIMO or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like.
  • a wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504 may include multiple antennas.
  • the multiple antennas may be used to perform one or more MIMO or multi-antenna techniques, such as spatial multiplexing (e.g., single-user MIMO or multi-user Ml MO), transmit/receive diversity, and/or beamforming.
  • the wireless device 1502 and/or the base station 1504 may have a single antenna.
  • the processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 maybe associated with a memory 1514 and a memory 1524, respectively.
  • Memory 1514 and memory 1524 may store computer program instructions or code that may be executed by the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 to carry out one or more of the functionalities discussed in the present application.
  • the transmission processing system 1510, the transmission processing system 1520, the reception processing system 1512, and/or the reception processing system 1522 may be coupled to a memory (e.g., one or more non-transitory computer readable mediums) storing computer program instructions or code that may be executed to carry out one or more of their respective functionalities.
  • the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may comprise one or more controllers and/or one or more processors.
  • the one or more controllers and/or one or more processors may comprise, for example, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), a microcontroller, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) and/or other programmable logic device, discrete gate and/or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, an on-board unit, or any combination thereof.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may perform at least one of signal coding/processing, data processing, power control, input/output processing, and/or any other functionality that may enable the wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504 to operate in a wireless environment.
  • the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may be connected to one or more peripherals 1516 and one or more peripherals 1526, respectively.
  • the one or more peripherals 1516 and the one or more peripherals 1526 may include software and/or hardware that provide features and/or functionalities, for example, a speaker, a microphone, a keypad, a display, a touchpad, a power source, a satellite transceiver, a universal serial bus (USB) port, a hands-free headset, a frequency modulated (FM) radio unit, a media player, an Internet browser, an electronic control unit (e.g., for a motor vehicle), and/or one or more sensors (e.g., an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a temperature sensor, a radar sensor, a lidar sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a light sensor, a camera, and/or the like).
  • sensors e.g., an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a temperature sensor, a
  • the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may receive user input data from and/or provide user output data to the one or more peripherals 1516 and/or the one or more peripherals 1526.
  • the processing system 1518 in the wireless device 1502 may receive power from a power source and/or may be configured to distribute the power to the other components in the wireless device 1502.
  • the power source may comprise one or more sources of power, for example, a battery, a solar cell, a fuel cell, or any combination thereof.
  • the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may be connected to a GPS chipset 1517 and a GPS chipset 1527, respectively.
  • the GPS chipset 1517 and the GPS chipset 1527 may be configured to provide geographic location information of the wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504, respectively.
  • FIG. 16A illustrates an example structure for uplink transmission.
  • a baseband signal representing a physical uplink shared channel may perform one or more functions.
  • the one or more functions may comprise at least one of: scrambling; modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers; transform precoding to generate complex-valued symbols; precoding of the complex-valued symbols; mapping of precoded complex-valued symbols to resource elements; generation of complex-valued time-domain Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) or CP- OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/or the like.
  • SC-FDMA Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • FIG. 16A illustrates an example structure for uplink transmission.
  • FIG. 16B illustrates an example structure for modulation and up-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency.
  • the baseband signal may be a complex-valued SC-FDMA or CP-OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port and/or a complex-valued Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) baseband signal. Filtering may be employed prior to transmission.
  • PRACH Physical Random Access Channel
  • FIG. 16C illustrates an example structure for downlink transmissions.
  • a baseband signal representing a physical downlink channel may perform one or more functions.
  • the one or more functions may comprise: scrambling of coded bits in a codeword to be transmitted on a physical channel; modulation of scrambled bits to generate complexvalued modulation symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers; precoding of the complex-valued modulation symbols on a layer for transmission on the antenna ports; mapping of complex-valued modulation symbols for an antenna port to resource elements; generation of complex-valued timedomain OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/or the like.
  • These functions are illustrated as examples and it is anticipated that other mechanisms may be implemented in various embodiments.
  • FIG. 16D illustrates another example structure for modulation and up-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency.
  • the baseband signal may be a complex-valued OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port. Filtering may be employed prior to transmission.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station one or more messages (e.g. RRC messages) comprising configuration parameters of a plurality of cells (e.g. primary cell, secondary cell).
  • the wireless device may communicate with at least one base station (e.g. two or more base stations in dual-connectivity) via the plurality of cells.
  • the one or more messages (e.g. as a part of the configuration parameters) may comprise parameters of physical, MAC, RLC, PODP, SDAP, RRC layers for configuring the wireless device.
  • the configuration parameters may comprise parameters for configuring physical and MAC layer channels, bearers, etc.
  • the configuration parameters may comprise parameters indicating values of timers for physical, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRC layers, and/or communication channels.
  • a timer may begin running once it is started and continue running until it is stopped or until it expires.
  • a timer may be started if it is not running or restarted if it is running.
  • a timer may be associated with a value (e.g. the timer may be started or restarted from a value or may be started from zero and expire once it reaches the value).
  • the duration of a timer may not be updated until the timer is stopped or expires (e.g., due to BWP switching).
  • a timer may be used to measure a time period/window for a process.
  • a timer may be used to measure a time period/window for the procedure.
  • a random access response window timer may be used for measuring a window of time for receiving a random access response.
  • the time difference between two time stamps may be used.
  • a timer is restarted, a process for measurement of time window may be restarted.
  • Other example implementations may be provided to restart a measurement of a time window.
  • a satellite may comprise a spaceborne/airborne vehicle (e.g., satellite, balloon, air ship, high altitude platform station, unmanned/uncrewed aircraft system, space-borne platform, drone, and the like).
  • the spaceborne vehicle may, for example, provide a structure, power, commanding, telemetry, attitude control for the satellite, and possibly an appropriate thermal environment, radiation shielding.
  • the satellite may be referred to, for example, as an NTN base station.
  • the satellite may be referred to, for example, as a (serving) satellite.
  • the satellite may be referred to, for example, as an NTN payload.
  • the satellite may comprise, for example, an NTN payload.
  • the NTN payload for example, may be a network node embarked on board the satellite.
  • the satellite may, for example, orbit the Earth.
  • the satellite may be a part of a bent-pipe/transparent payload non-terrestrial network (NTN) communication link/system.
  • NTN non-terrestrial network
  • the satellite may forward a signal with amplification between a service link and a feeder link, for example, based on the satellite being part of the bent-pipe/transparent payload NTN system.
  • the satellite may forward the signal with frequency change/conversion/shift between a service link and a feeder link, for example, based on the satellite being part of the bent-pipe/transparent payload NTN system.
  • the satellite may operate, for example, as a repeater based on the satellite being part of the bent-pipe/transparent payload NTN system.
  • the satellite may operate, for example, as a relay node based on the satellite being part of the bent-pipe/transparent payload NTN system.
  • the satellite may operate, for example, as a regenerator based on the satellite being part of the bent-pipe/transparent payload NTN system.
  • the service link may connect the satellite and the UE on earth.
  • the feeder link may connect the satellite and an NTN gateway on earth.
  • a terrestrial base station may comprise the NTN gateway.
  • the terrestrial base station may be connected to a core network.
  • the satellite may be a part of a regenerative payload NTN communication link/system.
  • the satellite may be equipped with on-board processing.
  • the on-board processing may comprise demodulating and decoding a received signal.
  • the demodulating and decoding procedures may be different for the service link and the feeder link.
  • the onboard processing may comprise at least two demodulating and at least two decoding procedures.
  • the at least two demodulating procedures may comprise a first demodulating procedure and a second demodulating procedure.
  • the at least two decoding procedures may comprise a first decoding procedure and a second decoding procedure.
  • the satellite for example, may apply the first demodulating procedure to the signal that the satellite receives on the feeder link.
  • the satellite may apply the second demodulating procedure for the signal that the satellite receives on the service link.
  • the satellite may apply the first decoding procedure to the signal that the satellite receives on the feeder link.
  • the satellite may apply the second decoding procedure for the signal that the satellite receives on the service link.
  • the on-board processing may comprise regenerating the signal.
  • the regenerating procedure may be different for the service link and the feeder link.
  • the on-board processing for example, may comprise at least two regenerating procedures.
  • the at least two regenerating procedures may comprise a first regenerating procedure and a second regenerating procedure.
  • the satellite for example, may apply the first regenerating procedure to the signal that the satellite receives on the feeder link.
  • the satellite may apply the second regenerating procedure to the signal that the satellite receives on the service link.
  • a UE may transmit an uplink signal to the satellite (or the NTN base station).
  • the satellite may transmit the uplink signal to a terrestrial base station (or the NTN gateway). If the satellite transmits the uplink signal to the NTN gateway, the NTN gateway may transmit the uplink signal to a terrestrial base station.
  • the terrestrial base station may transmit the uplink signal to the core network.
  • the satellite may transmit the uplink signal to a different satellite, for example, over/via an inter-satellite link.
  • the UE may receive a downlink signal from the satellite (or the NTN base station).
  • the satellite may receive the downlink signal from a terrestrial base station (or the NTN gateway).
  • the satellite may receive the downlink signal from a different satellite, for example, over/via the inter-satellite link.
  • the terrestrial base station may receive the downlink signal from the core network.
  • a base station/gNB/eNB in NTN may comprise the NTN gateway.
  • the base station/gNB/eNB in NTN may comprise the satellite/NTN base station/NTN payload.
  • the base station/gNB/eNB in NTN may comprise the feeder link.
  • the feeder link may connect the NTN gateway and the satellite.
  • the base station/gNB/eNB in NTN may comprise non- NTN infrastructure that perform(s) gNB/eNB functions.
  • the non-NTN infrastructure may be referred to, for example, as a terrestrial base station/terrestrial g N B/terrestrial eNB.
  • the base station/gNB/eNB (or a portion of the base station/gNB/eNB) in NTN may be referred to, for example, as an NTN service link provisioning system.
  • the NTN gateway may be referred to as a terrestrial base station/terrestrial gNB/terrestrial eNB.
  • FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B illustrate an example of NTN architectures in which a satellite is used as part of a network as per embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 17A illustrates an example of NTN architecture corresponding to a satellite with on-board transparent payload model as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the NTN architecture may comprise a UE, a satellite, an NTN gateway, a base station or gNB/eNB, a core network, and/or a data network.
  • the satellite may behave as a remote radio unit (RRU) communicating with the NTN gateway.
  • the satellite may implement frequency conversion and/or radio frequency (RF) amplification in the uplink direction.
  • the satellite may implement frequency conversion and/or radio frequency amplification in the downlink direction.
  • the NTN gateway may connect to a base station. In an example, the base station may be on the ground.
  • a UE may transmit and receive via the satellite (e.g., as a relay or a repeater or a regenerator).
  • the satellite e.g., an RRU
  • the satellite may correspond to an analog RF repeater that repeats the signal from a service link (e.g., between the satellite and the UE) to a feeder link (e.g., between the NTN gateway and the satellite), and vice-versa.
  • FIG. 17B illustrates an example NTN architecture corresponding to a satellite with on-board regenerative payload model as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the NTN architecture may comprise a UE, a satellite, an NTN gateway, a core network, and/or the like.
  • the satellite may regenerate signals received from earth (e.g., from a UE or from an NTN gateway).
  • the satellite may regenerate the signal by decoding and re-encoding the signal.
  • the satellite may regenerate the signal by amplifying the signal.
  • the satellite may regenerate the signal by frequency shifting the signal.
  • the satellite may regenerate the signal by changing the carrier frequency of the signal.
  • the satellite may behave as a base station.
  • the NTN may comprise an earth fixed cell/beam.
  • An NTN earth fixed cell/beam may be referred to, for example, as an NTN earth centric cell/beam.
  • One or more satellites providing earth fixed cell/beam may cover a same (geographical) areas all/most of/a plurality of the time.
  • the one or more satellites providing the earth fixed cell/beam may be one or more geostationary/geosynchronous satellite orbit (GEO/GSO) satellites.
  • GEO/GSO geostationary/geosynchronous satellite orbit
  • an NTN earth fixed cell/beam may be provisioned by beam(s) continuously covering same geographical areas all the time.
  • the NTN may be/comprise a quasi-earth fixed cell/beam.
  • a quasi-earth fixed cell/beam may be referred to, for example, as a quasi-earth centric cell/beam.
  • One or more satellites in the quasi-earth fixed cell/beam may cover a (geographical) area for a fixed duration time and then cover a different (geographical) area for a next fixed duration of time.
  • a quasi-earth fixed cell/beam may be provisioned by beam(s) covering one geographic area for a limited period of time and a different geographic area during another period of time.
  • the one or more satellites providing quasi-earth fixed cell/beam may cover a first (geographical) area at a first time.
  • the one or more satellites in the quasi-earth fixed cell/beam may cover the first (geographical) area at a second time.
  • the one or more satellites providing the quasi-earth fixed cell/beam may cover a second (geographical) area at a third time.
  • the one or more satellites providing the quasi-earth fixed cell/beam may use steerable beams (and/or beam steering).
  • the one or more satellites providing the quasi-earth fixed cell/beam may be one or more non-GSO (NGSO) or non-GEO satellites (e.g., one or more low-earth orbit (LEO) satellites, one or more medium earth orbit (MEO) satellites, and the like).
  • NGSO non-GSO
  • non-GEO satellites e.g., one or more low-earth orbit (LEO) satellites, one or more medium earth orbit (MEO) satellites, and the like.
  • the NTN may be/comprise an earth moving cell/beam.
  • the (geographical) area covered by one or more satellites in the earth moving cell/beam may move/slide over the Earth surface.
  • an earth moving cell/beam may be provisioned by beam(s) whose coverage area slides over the Earth surface.
  • the one or more satellites providing the earth moving cell/beam may cover a first (geographical) area at a first time.
  • the one or more satellites providing the earth moving (cell) system/coverage may cover a second (geographical) area at a second time.
  • the one or more satellites providing the earth moving (cell) system/coverage may not use/generate steerable beams (or beam steering).
  • the one or more satellites providing the earth moving (cell) system/coverage may use/generate, for example, fixed beams.
  • the one or more satellites in the NTN earth moving (cell) system/coverage may use/generate, for example, non-steerable beams.
  • the cell coverage covered by the one or more satellites providing the earth moving cell/beam may change by time.
  • the one or more satellites providing the earth moving cell/beam may be one or more non-GSO (NGSO) or non-GEO (NGEO) satellites (e.g., one or more low-earth orbit (LEO) satellites, one or more medium earth orbit (MEO) satellites, and the like).
  • NGSO non-GSO
  • NGEO non-GEO
  • LEO low-earth orbit
  • MEO medium earth orbit
  • one or more satellites in an NTN may be one or more NGSO/NGEO satellites.
  • the NTN may be/comprise, for example, an earth fixed cell/beam.
  • the NTN may be/comprise, for example, quasi-earth fixed cell/beam.
  • one or more satellites in an NTN may be one or more GSO/GEO satellites.
  • the NTN may be/comprise, for example, NTN earth fixed cell/beam.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates examples of deployments of various platform types.
  • the platform types may be satellite types.
  • a satellite may be placed into a Low-Earth Orbit (LEO) at an altitude between 250 km to 1500 km, with orbital periods ranging from 90 to 130 minutes.
  • a mean orbital velocity needed to maintain a stable LEO may be 7.8 km/s and may be reduced with increased orbital altitude.
  • a mean orbital velocity for circular orbit of 200 km may be 7.79 km/s.
  • a mean orbital velocity for circular orbit 1500 km may be 7.12 km/s. From the perspective of a given point on the surface of the earth, the position of the LEO satellite may change.
  • the LEO satellite may provide quasi-earth fixed cell/beam.
  • the LEO satellite may provide earth moving cell/beam.
  • a satellite may be placed into a medium-earth orbit (MEO) at an altitude between 5000 to 20000 km, with orbital periods ranging from 2 hours to 14 hours.
  • the MEO satellite may provide quasi-earth fixed cell/beam.
  • the MEO satellite may provide earth moving cell/beam.
  • a satellite may be placed into a geostationary satellite earth orbit (GEO) at 35,786 km altitude, and directly above the equator. This may equate to an orbital velocity of 3.07 km/s and an orbital period of 1 ,436 minutes, which equates to almost one sidereal day (23.934461223 hours). From the perspective of a given point on the surface of the earth, the position of the GEO may not move.
  • the GEO may provide earth-fixed cell/beam.
  • an NTN may be a network or network segment that uses a space-borne vehicle to embark a transmission equipment relay node or a base station. While a terrestrial network is a network located on the surface of the earth, an NTN may be a network which uses a satellite as an access network, a backhaul interface network, or both. A satellite may generate several beams over a given area.
  • a footprint of a beam of a satellite may be in an elliptical shape (e.g., which may be considered as a cell).
  • the footprint of a beam may be referred to as a spotbeam.
  • the footprint of a beam may be referred to as a beam footprint.
  • the footprint of a beam may move over the Earth’s surface with the satellite movement.
  • the footprint of a beam may be Earth fixed with one or more beam pointing mechanisms used by the satellite to compensate for its motion.
  • the size of a beam footprint may depend on the system design and may range from tens of kilometers to a few thousand kilometers.
  • the footprints of one or more beams may be a considered a cell.
  • the footprint of one or more beams may be referred to be a beam.
  • the beam may be associated with one or more aspects of a cell.
  • the beam may be associated with a cell-specific reference signal (CRS), for example, a beam-specific reference signal.
  • CRS cell-specific reference signal
  • the beam may be associated with a physical cell ID (PCI) or a physical beam ID.
  • PCI physical cell ID
  • the terms cell and beam may be used interchangeably to refer to one or more footprints of at least one beam.
  • a UE may be in a range (or a coverage area) of a serving/primary cell/beam.
  • One or more cells/beams e.g., non-serving/neighbor/assisting/candidate cells/beams
  • a propagation delay (e.g., between a satellite and the ground or between multiple satellites) may be the amount of time it takes for the head of the signal to travel from a sender to a receiver or vice versa.
  • the sender may be a UE and the receiver may be a base station/access network.
  • the sender may be a base station/access network and the receiver may be a UE.
  • the propagation delay may vary depending on a distance between the sender and the receiver.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates examples of propagation delay corresponding to satellites types of different altitudes and different elevation angle (degrees).
  • the propagation delay in the figure may be one-way latency.
  • oneway latency may be an amount of time required to propagate through a telecommunication system from a terminal (e.g. UE) to the receiver (e.g., base station, eNB, gNB, RRU of a base station).
  • the round-trip propagation time may comprise service link delay (e.g., between the satellite and the UE) and feeder link delay (e.g., between the NTN gateway and the satellite).
  • the RTT may be four times of 138.9 milliseconds (approximately 556 milliseconds).
  • an RTT of the GEO satellite may be more than a few seconds if processing time and congestion are considered.
  • an RTT of a terrestrial network e.g., NR, E-UTRA, LTE
  • the RTT of a terrestrial network may be less than 1 millisecond.
  • the RTT of a GEO satellite may be hundreds of times longer than the RTT of a terrestrial network.
  • a maximum RTT of a LEO satellite with transparent payload with altitude of 600km may be 25.77 milliseconds.
  • the differential RTT may be 3.12 milliseconds.
  • the differential RTT within a beam of the satellite may be calculated based on the maximum diameter of the beam footprint at nadir.
  • the differential RTT may imply the difference between communication latency that two UEs (e.g., one UE may be located close to the edge of the cell/beam and the other UE may be located close to the center of the cell/beam) may experience while communicating with an NTN node.
  • the maximum RTD of may be 41.77 milliseconds.
  • the differential RTT may be 3.18 milliseconds.
  • FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B illustrate examples of service link with maximum propagation delay of the cell/beam.
  • an NTN may comprise at least one of: a transparent satellite, feeder link, ground/terrestrial gNB/eNB, a cell/beam, and service links of two wireless users.
  • a first UE may be located closer to the cell/beam center than a second UE (e.g., UE2).
  • the first UE e.g., UE1
  • the UE1 may have smaller RTT compared to the UE2.
  • the RTT seen by UE1 may be 3.18 milliseconds lower than the RTT seen by UE2 for an NTN with LEO satellite with transparent payload with altitude of 1200km.
  • the UE may receive information from the base station in a downlink message (e.g., SIB or RRC message) to estimate a location of the satellite.
  • the UE may use the location of the satellite to estimate/determ ine/calcu late/compu te the propagation delay of the service link.
  • the UE may receive the satellite ephemeris via a downlink message (e.g., SIB or RRC message).
  • the UE may receive the satellite ephemeris via one or more configuration parameters from the base station.
  • the satellite ephemeris may indicate a state vector indicating the coordinates of the satellite.
  • the satellite ephemeris may indicate an orbital velocity of the satellite.
  • the satellite ephemeris may comprise one or more Kepler orbit elements or orbital elements or Keplerian elements, e.g., semi-major axis, eccentricity, argument of periapsis, longitude of ascending node, inclination, and true anomaly at epoch time of the satellite.
  • the UE may determine/calculate/compute/estimate the location of the satellite based on the satellite ephemeris. For example, the UE may determine/calculate/deduce/compute/estimate the Cartesian coordinates of the satellite at any given time instant using the satellite ephemeris.
  • the satellite ephemeris may be periodically broadcast by the satellite as part of system information (e.g., RRC message or SIB).
  • the system information message/signal/command (e.g., SIB) may comprise an indication indicating the rate at which the calculation of RTT performed by the UE based on the satellite ephemeris should be updated.
  • the UE may adjust the calculated RTT during a timer period based on the indicated rate.
  • the timer period may indicate a duration between two consecutive receptions of the satellite ephemeris by the UE.
  • the satellite ephemeris may not accurately provide the location of the satellite if the periodicity during which the satellite ephemeris is broadcast is relatively long. For example, the location of the satellite determined by the UE may be inaccurate due to an expiry of the satellite ephemeris.
  • the periodicity of the satellite ephemeris broadcast may be set such that the satellite ephemeris may be updated before expiry.
  • the periodicity of the satellite ephemeris broadcast may, for example, depend on altitude of the satellite. For example, the periodicity of the satellite ephemeris broadcast may be larger for a GEO satellite than the periodicity of the satellite ephemeris broadcast for a LEO satellite.
  • the periodicity of the satellite ephemeris broadcast may further depend on velocity of the satellite.
  • a UE on earth may have visibility of at least two satellites.
  • the at least two satellites may be a first satellite and a second satellite.
  • the first satellite may move at/with a first velocity.
  • the second satellite may move at/with a second velocity.
  • the first velocity may be greater/higher than the second velocity.
  • the periodicity of the satellite ephemeris broadcast may be smaller for the first satellite than the periodicity of the satellite ephemeris for the second satellite.
  • the satellite ephemeris broadcast may increase signaling overhead.
  • the satellite ephemeris broadcast may increase the communication latency in an NTN.
  • the satellite ephemeris may not accurately provide the location of the satellite when required.
  • the location of the satellite determined by the UE may be accurate at the time the UE receives the satellite ephemeris but may be inaccurate by the time the UE uses the determined satellite location, for example, for random-access preamble transmission (e.g., MSG1), or random-access MSG3 transmission, or MSG5 transmission.
  • the satellite ephemeris may not accurately provide the location of the satellite if the movement of the satellite gradually drifts from the predicted orbital movement at the UE using the satellite ephemeris.
  • the satellite ephemeris data may provide the UE with a correction margin to help the UE compensate for the inaccuracy of the satellite ephemeris data.
  • the UE may use the correction margin of the satellite ephemeris data to partially account for the drift of the satellite from the orbit of the satellite.
  • a reference location of a cell may be broadcast as a part of RRC message (e.g., RRCReconfiguration message, SIB).
  • the reference location may describe a coordination in a geographic shape.
  • the geographic shape may be ellipsoid point.
  • the ellipsoid point may be a point on the surface of the ellipsoid.
  • the ellipsoid point may comprise at least one of degrees of longitude, degrees of latitude, and sign of latitude (e.g., north, or south).
  • the reference location of a cell may be provided via quasi-earth fixed cell.
  • the UE may calculate the distance between the UE and the reference location of a cell.
  • the location of the UE may be based on GNSS positioning information.
  • a reference location of a serving cell may be used for measurement rule in
  • RRC_I DLE/I NACTIVE state The UE in RRCJ DLE/INACTIVE state may calculate the distance between the UE and the reference location of the serving cell. For example, the UE may choose not to perform intra-frequency measurements if the distance between UE and the serving cell reference location is shorter than a threshold. In an another example, the UE may choose not to perform inter-frequency measurements if the distance between UE and the serving cell reference location is shorter than a threshold.
  • a reference location of a serving cell and a reference location of a OHO candidate target cell may be used for OHO execution condition.
  • the UE state may calculate the distance between the UE and reference location of the serving cell.
  • the UE may calculate the distance between the UE and reference location of the OHO candidate target cell.
  • the UE may perform OHO to the OHO candidate target cell if the distance between UE and a reference location of the serving cell becomes larger than a first threshold and the distance between UE and a reference location of the OHO candidate cell becomes shorter than a second threshold.
  • the reference location of the serving cell, reference location of the OHO candidate target cell, the first threshold, and the second threshold may be provided in an RRC message (e.g., RRCReconfiguration message, SIB).
  • a Timing Advance (e.g., in NTN 5G NR) may be based on the orthogonal frequency-division multiple access (OFDMA) as the multi-access scheme in the uplink.
  • OFDMA orthogonal frequency-division multiple access
  • the transmissions from different wireless devices in a cell/beam may need to be time-aligned at the gNB/eNB and/or the satellite to maintain uplink orthogonality.
  • Time alignment may be achieved by using different timing advance (TA) values at different UEs to compensate for their different propagation delays or RTT.
  • the transmissions from different UEs in a cell/beam may need to be time-aligned at the gNB/eNB.
  • the TA value may comprise the service link delay and the feeder link delay.
  • the transmissions from different UE in a cell/beam may need to be time-aligned at the satellite.
  • the TA value may comprise the service link delay.
  • the transmissions from different UE in a cell/beam may need to be time-aligned at a non-terrestrial point on the feeder link.
  • the TA value may comprise the service link delay and a non-zero fraction of the feeder link delay.
  • the transmissions from different UE in a cell/beam may need to be time-aligned at a non-terrestrial point on the service link.
  • the TA value may comprise a non-zero fraction of the service link delay.
  • the size of the cells/beams may be larger than the size of cells in terrestrial networks.
  • the maximum footprint of GEO NTN cell/beam may be 3500 kilometers and the maximum footprint of LEO NTN cell/beam may be 1000 kilometers.
  • the size of cell of the terrestrial network may be less than a kilometer to a few kilometers.
  • Different UEs in NTN may experience different propagation delays between the satellite and the UE due to the large footprint of the beam/cell.
  • Different UEs in NTN may experience different propagation delays between the NTN gateway and the UE due to the large footprint of the beam/cell.
  • Different UEs in NTN may experience different propagation delays between the gNB/eNB and the UE due to the large footprint of the cell/beam.
  • a differential delay between two UEs may indicate the difference between the one way propagation delay of the service link for the two UEs.
  • a maximum differential delay may indicate the difference between the maximum one way delay (i.e., one way propagation delay experienced by a UE that is located at a point farthest away from the satellite) and the minimum one way delay (i.e., one way propagation delay experienced by a UE that is located at a point that is closest to the satellite) of/in the service link.
  • a UE that is at/close to the cell/beam center may be at a point that is closest to the satellite.
  • a UE that is at/close to the cell/beam edge/boundary may be at a point that is farthest away from the satellite.
  • the maximum differential delay for a LEO satellite based NTN may be 3.18 milliseconds.
  • the maximum differential delay for a GEO satellite based NTN may be 10.3 milliseconds.
  • the maximum differential delay in a terrestrial network may be less than one millisecond.
  • the base station may receive randomaccess preambles transmitted by different NTN UEs at/in/on the same RACH occasion at different times based on the differential delay between the UEs.
  • the base station may use an expanded preamble reception window when operating in an NTN to receive random-access preambles transmitted in/on/at the same RACH occasion.
  • the base station may use a preamble reception window that starts from [RACH occasion timing + 2*minimum one way propagation delay] and end at [RACH occasion +2*maximum one way propagation delay].
  • Using an expanded preamble reception window may increase the time gap between two consecutive supported RACH occasions. For example, the time gap between two consecutive supported RACH occasions may be greater than 2*(maximum differential delay).
  • a limited number of PRACH configurations may support the time gap between two consecutive supported RACH occasions to be greater than 2*(maximum differential delay).
  • the limited number of PRACH configurations may support a small number of UEs in a given area, i.e., the limited number of PRACH configurations may support a small UE density.
  • the supported UE density may be 51 UEs per square kilometer when each UE accesses the RACH once every 10 minutes for an NTN served by a LEO satellite with a cell/beam coverage area of 26000 square kilometers.
  • the UEs may pre-compensate random-access preamble transmission based on a TA value to compensate for the long RTT to allow for a smaller preamble reception window at the base station (e.g., 1 ms). This may allow for a larger number of UE density (e.g., 60,000 UEs per square kilometer).
  • the random-access procedure may be a four-step random access procedure. In an example, the random-access procedure may be a two-step random access procedure.
  • FIG. 21A and FIG. 21A illustrate examples of received signal strength when UE is in terrestrial network and NTN.
  • FIG. 21A illustrates an example that UE1 locates near cell center and UE2 locates at cell edge in terrestrial network.
  • the received signal strength e.g., RSRP
  • the difference of received signal strength between the UE1 and UE2 may be clear.
  • FIG. 21 B illustrates an example that UE1 locates near cell center and UE2 locates at cell edge in NTN.
  • the difference of received signal strength between the UE1 and UE2 may be smaller than the case in terrestrial network, as illustrated in FIG. 21A.
  • the high received signal strength may not mean that the UE is at cell center.
  • UE at cell edge may have high received signal strength.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates an example of an NTN.
  • the gNB depicted in FIG. 22 may be subdivided into non-NTN infrastructure gNB functions and an NTN Service Link provisioning System.
  • the NTN infrastructure shown in FIG. 22 may be (thought of being) subdivided into an NTN Service Link provisioning System and an NTN Control function.
  • the NTN Service Link provisioning System may comprise one or more NTN payloads and NTN Gateways.
  • the NTN payload may be embarked on a spaceborne (or airborne) vehicle.
  • the NTN payload may provide a structure, power, commanding, telemetry, and /or attitude control for the satellite.
  • the NTN payload may provide an appropriate thermal environment and/or radiation shielding.
  • the NTN Service Link provisioning System may map the NR-Uu radio protocol over radio resources of the NTN infrastructure (e.g., beams, channels, Tx power, and the like).
  • the NTN control function may control the spaceborne (or airborne) vehicle(s).
  • the NTN control function may control one or more radio resources of the NTN infrastructure (e.g., NTN payload(s) and NTN Gateway(s)).
  • the NTN control function may provide control data, e.g., satellite ephemeris, to the non-NTN infrastructure gNB functions of the gNB.
  • the NTN may provide non-terrestrial access to the UE by means of an NTN payload and an NTN Gateway, depicting a service link between the NTN payload and the UE, and a feeder link between the NTN Gateway and the NTN payload.
  • the NTN payload may (also) be referred to as a satellite.
  • the NTN payload may transparently forward a radio protocol received from the UE (e.g., via the service link) to the NTN Gateway (e.g., via the feeder link) and vice-versa.
  • the following connectivity may be supported by the NTN payload:
  • - a gNB may serve multiple (e.g., more than one, plurality, and the like) NTN payloads;
  • an NTN payload may be served by multiple (e.g., more than one, plurality, and the like) gNBs.
  • the NTN payload may change a carrier frequency, before re-transmitting it on the service link, and vice versa (e.g., respectively on the feeder link).
  • a Tracking Area may correspond to a fixed geographical area. Any respective mapping may be configured in a radio access network (RAN);
  • RAN radio access network
  • Non-Geosynchronous orbit may include Low Earth Orbit at altitude approximately between 300 km and 1500 km.
  • NGSO may include Medium Earth Orbit at altitude approximately between 7000 km and 25000 km.
  • At least three types of service links may be supported:
  • system/service link/cell/cell system provisioned by beam(s) continuously covering the same geographical areas a plurality of (e.g. , all) the time (e.g. , the case of GSO satellites);
  • system/service link/cell/cell system provisioned by beam(s) covering one geographic area for a limited period and a different geographic area during another period (e.g., a case of NGSO satellites generating steerable beams);
  • - earth-moving provisioned by beam(s) whose coverage area slides over the Earth surface (e.g., a case of NGSO satellites generating fixed or non-steerable beams).
  • the gNB may provide either quasi-Earth-fixed cell coverage or Earth-moving cell coverage.
  • the gNB operating with GSO satellite may provide Earth fixed cell coverage.
  • the UE supporting NTN may be GNSS-capable.
  • a service link switch may refer to a change of serving satellite.
  • the UE may be configured to report a timing advance (TA) of the UE.
  • the UE may be configured to report the TA, for example, during random-access procedure in RRC_I DLE and/or RRC_I NACTI VE state.
  • the UE may be configured to report the TA, for example, during random-access procedure in RRC_CONNECTED state (e.g., using event-triggered reporting; for RRC re-establishment procedure, if an indication is broadcasted by the target cell's SI; for handover, the UE may trigger TA report if the target cell indicates the TA report in a handover command).
  • HARQ feedback may be enabled or disabled per HARQ process.
  • the UE may be configured with a HARQ mode A or HARQ mode B per HARQ process.
  • a maximum number of HARQ processes may be extended to 32.
  • value ranges of MAC e.g., sr-ProhibitTimer and configuredGrantTimef
  • RLC e.g., t-Reassembly
  • PDCP e.g., discardTimer and t-reordering layer timers may be extended.
  • the gNB may ensure proper configuration of HARQ feedback (e.g., enabled or disabled) for HARQ processes used by a semi persistent scheduling (SPS) configuration and of HARQ mode for HARQ processes used by a configured grant (CG) configuration.
  • SPS semi persistent scheduling
  • CG configured grant
  • the logical channel may (only) be mapped to a HARQ process with a same HARQ mode.
  • Timing relationships modified for NTN using Koffset may be transmission timing of DOI scheduled PUSCH including CSI transmission on PUSCH, transmission timing of random-access response (RAR) grant or fal IbackRAR grant scheduled PUSCH, timing of the first PUSCH transmission opportunity in type-2 configured grant, transmission timing of HARQ-ACK on physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) including HARQ-ACK on PUCCH to message B (MsgB) in 2-step random access, transmission timing of PDCCH ordered physical random access channel (PRACH), timing of the adjustment of uplink transmission timing upon reception of a corresponding timing advance command, transmission timing of aperiodic sounding reference signal (SRS), and/or CSI reference resource timing.
  • RAR random-access response
  • MsgB message B
  • /c mac may be a scheduling offset supported in NTN for MAC CE timing relationships enhancement.
  • the /c mac may be provided by the network (e.g., via SIB, RRC configuration, and the like) in response to downlink and uplink frame timing not being aligned at the g N B .
  • the /c mac may be needed for UE action and assumption on downlink configuration indicated by a MAC-CE command in PDSCH.
  • the K mac may be used in beam failure recovery, where after a PRACH transmission in uplink slot n the UE monitors the corresponding PDCCH starting from downlink slot "n + /c m ac +4" within a corresponding RAR window.
  • the UE action and assumption on the downlink configuration may be applied starting from the first slot that is after slot n + the SCS configuration for the PUCCH.
  • the UE may (be able to) perform time pre-compensation for (all) uplink transmissions (e.g., PRACH preamble transmissions, uplink transmissions during the RRC_CONNECTED-state, and the like).
  • the UE may be assisted by GNSS (e.g., in/within the UE).
  • the UE may be assisted by the network (e.g., gNB).
  • the gNB may periodically broadcast NTN assistance information.
  • the NTN assistance information may comprise serving satellite ephemeris.
  • the NTN assistance information may comprise higher layer Common-TA- related parameters.
  • the higher layer Common-TA-related parameters may be used to calculate the common round-trip delay (RTD) e.g. delay on the feeder link.
  • RTD round-trip delay
  • Af TAoffset may be a fixed offset used to calculate the timing advance.
  • a TM n may be network-controlled common include any timing offset considered necessary by the network (e.g. feeder link delay/delay of the feeder link).
  • A/ TA E adj may be self-estimated TA by the UE to pre-compensate for delay of the service link (e.g., service link delay).
  • A/ TA E adj may be computed by the UE based on a position of the UE and serving satellite-ephemeris-related higher-layers parameters if configured, otherwise
  • A/ T ⁇ E adj 0.
  • T c may be a NR basic time unit.
  • the UE may (be capable to) use an acquired GNSS position (of the UE) and serving satellite ephemeris information (when provided by the network) to calculate frequency pre-compensation to counter shift instantaneous Doppler shift experienced on the service link.
  • the pre-compensation of the instantaneous Doppler shift experienced on the service link may be performed by the UE.
  • Management of Doppler shift experienced over the feeder link as well as any transponder frequency error whether it is introduced in Downlink or Uplink may be network implementation.
  • the network may broadcast multiple Tracking Area Codes per PLMN in an NTN cell.
  • a tracking area code change in the System Information may be under network control, e.g., it may not be exactly synchronized with real-time illumination of beams on ground.
  • the UE may determine a network type (e.g., terrestrial or nonterrestrial) implicitly by the existence of scheduling information of SIB19 in SIB1. Non-NTN capable UEs may be prevented from accessing an NTN cell.
  • a network type e.g., terrestrial or nonterrestrial
  • the satellite ephemeris (or NTN ephemeris) may be divided into serving cell's satellite ephemeris and neighboring cell's satellite ephemeris.
  • the UE may perform time-based and location-based cell selection/reselection.
  • Timing information and location information associated to a (NTN) cell may be provided via system information (e.g., SIB, NTN-specific SIB, and the like).
  • the timing information may refer to a time when a serving cell may stop serving a geographical area.
  • the location information may refer to a reference location of the serving cell or neighboring cells.
  • the location information may be used to assist cell reselection in NTN with, for example, a condition based on the distance between the UE and the reference location of the serving cell and/or neighbor cells.
  • the UE may support mobility between radio access technologies based on different orbit (GSO, NGSO at different altitude, and the like).
  • a feeder link switch over may be a procedure where the feeder link is changed from a source NTN Gateway to a target NTN Gateway for a specific NTN payload.
  • the feeder link switch over may be a Transport Network Layer procedure. Both hard and soft feeder link switch over may be applicable to NTN.
  • a feeder link switch over may result in transferring an established connection for affected UE between two gNBs.
  • an NTN payload may be able to connect to more than one NTN Gateway during a given period, e.g., a temporary overlap may be ensured during a transition between the feeder links.
  • an NTN payload may only connect to one NTN Gateway at any given time, e.g., a radio link interruption may occur during a transition between the feeder links.
  • An NTN Control function may determine a point in time when a feeder link switch over between two gNBs is performed.
  • a transfer of the affected UEs’ context between the two gNBs at feeder link switch over may be performed by means of either NG based or Xn based handover. The transfer may depend on the gNBs' implementation and configuration information provided to the gNBs by the NTN Control function.
  • a UE may not be required to connect to both NTN and Terrestrial Network at the same time.
  • the mobility between NTN and Terrestrial Network may be referred to as NTN- Terrestrial Network hand-over.
  • NTN-Terrestrial Network hand-over may refer to mobility in both directions, e.g. , from NTN to Terrestrial Network (hand-in) and from Terrestrial Network to NTN (hand-out).
  • a UE may receive a conditional handover (OHO) configuration.
  • the OHO configuration may be a conditional reconfiguration.
  • the OHO configuration may include one or more OHO candidate cells.
  • Each OHO candidate cell may comprise OHO execution condition.
  • the UE may execute OHO to the Oho candidate cell based on the comprised OHO execution condition. For example, UE can execute OHO to a OHO candidate cell if all the configured OHO execution condition(s) of the OHO candidate cell is fulfilled. Up to two OHO execution conditions can be configured for a OHO candidate cell.
  • the OHO execution condition for a OHO candidate cell may comprise: a cell quality-based OHO execution condition (event A3, event A4, event A5); and/or atime-based OHO execution condition (e.g., condEvent T1, or event T1); and/or a location-based OHO execution condition (e.g., event D1).
  • a cell quality-based OHO execution condition (event A3, event A4, event A5)
  • atime-based OHO execution condition e.g., condEvent T1, or event T1
  • a location-based OHO execution condition e.g., event D1
  • a cell quality-based OHO execution condition may be based on measurement results of a cell quality (e.g., RSRP, RSRQ, or SI NR).
  • a cell quality e.g., RSRP, RSRQ, or SI NR.
  • event A3 may be satisfied if measured cell quality of the OHO candidate cell is offset higher than the SpOell (e.g., POell, or SPCell).
  • the event A3 may be condEvent A3.
  • event A4 may be satisfied if measured cell quality of the OHO candidate cell is higher than a threshold.
  • the event A4 may be condEvent A4.
  • event A5 may be satisfied if measured cell quality of the SpOell (e.g., POell, or SPCell) is lower than a first threshold and measured cell quality of the OHO candidate cell is higher than a second threshold.
  • the event A5 may be condEvent A5.
  • a time-based OHO execution condition (e.g., event T1, or condEvent T1) may comprise a time period.
  • the time period may comprise a starting time point of the time period and a time duration of the time period. End time point of the time period may be the time duration after the starting time point of the time period.
  • the time period may comprise a starting time point as 9:00 UTO and a time duration as 10 minutes. Then the time period may start at 9:00 UTO and lasts 10 minutes. The time period may be from 9:00 UTO to 9:10 UTO.
  • the time-based OHO execution condition may be satisfied when the time measured at UE is after the starting time point of the time period and before the end time point of the time period.
  • a location-based OHO execution condition may comprise a first reference location which is associated to serving cell (e.g., POell, SPCell) and a second reference location which is associated to the CHO candidate cell (e.g., CHO target cell).
  • the location-based CHO execution condition may be satisfied when the distance between the UE and the first reference location is higher than a first threshold and the distance between the UE and the second reference location is lower than a second threshold.
  • a time-based CHO execution condition or a location-based CHO execution condition may be configured together with a cell quality-based CHO execution condition (e.g., event A3, event A4, or A5).
  • a time-based CHO execution condition and a location-based CHO execution may not be configured together for a CHO candidate cell.
  • the (NTN) base station/network may configure:
  • the adjustment of SMTCs may be possible under network control for connected mode and under UE control based on UE location information and ephemeris for idle/inactive modes.
  • a UE may report coarse UE location information (e.g., X most Significant Bits of GNSS coordinates of the UE with accuracy around 2km level) to the NG-RAN without receiving any prior explicit user consent. If user consent is available at the UE, the UE may report the coarse UE location information. Else, the UE may respond "no coarse GNSS location available". Periodic location reporting may be configured by gNB to obtain UE location update of mobile UE in RRC_CONNECTED mode/state.
  • the base station e.g., gNB
  • the base station may transmit/broadcast the NTN-specific SIB.
  • the NTN-specific SIB may be, for example, SIB19.
  • the NTN-specific SIB may comprise satellite assistance information.
  • the NTN-specific SIB may comprise ephemeris data.
  • the NTN-specific SIB may comprise common TA parameters.
  • the NTN-specific SIB may comprise common TA parameters.
  • the NTN-specific SIB may comprise k-offset.
  • the NTN-specific SIB may comprise a validity duration for UL synchronization information.
  • the NTN-specific SIB may comprise an epoch time.
  • the NTN-specific SIB may comprise a reference location of a (NTN) cell provided via NTN quasi-Earth fixed system.
  • the NTN-specific SIB may comprise a t-service.
  • the t-service may indicate time information on when a (NTN) cell provided via NTN quasi-Earth fixed system is going to stop serving an area the (NTN) cell is currently covering.
  • the t-service may count a number of universal time coordinated (UTC) seconds in 10 ms units since 00:00:00 on Gregorian calendar date 1 January, 1900 (midnight between Sunday, December31, 1899 and Monday, January 1, 1900).
  • UTC universal time coordinated
  • the UE may instruct lower layers to start or restart ntn- UlSyncValidityDuration from the subframe/slot indicated by the epoch time.
  • the UE may attempt to re-acquire the NTN- specific SIB before end of a duration indicated by rrtn-UISyncVa/idityDuration and the epoch time.
  • Support for bandwidth limited low complexity (BL) UEs, UEs in enhanced coverage, and/or narrowband Internet-of-Things (NB-loT) UEs over NTN may be applicable.
  • UEs not supporting NTN may be barred from an NTN cell.
  • BL UEs In NTN, BL UEs, UEs in enhanced coverage, and NB-loT wire UEs with GNSS capability may be supported.
  • increased timer values and window sizes, or delayed starting times may be supported for the physical layer and/or for higher layers.
  • UL segmented transmission may be supported for UL transmission with repetitions in NTN. The UE may apply UE pre-compensation per segment of UL transmission of PUSCH/PUCCH/PRACH for eMTC and NPUSCH/NPRACH for NB-loT from one segment to a next segment.
  • ⁇ offset an d Kmac- ⁇ offset may be a round-trip time between the UE and an uplink time synchronization reference point (RP).
  • RP uplink time synchronization reference point
  • ⁇ offset may correspond to a sum of a service link RTT and a common TA if indicated.
  • K mac may be a round trip time between the RP and the eNB/gNB.
  • DL and UL may frame aligned at the uplink time synchronization RP with an offset given by N TA offset .
  • Timing relationships that may be modified for NB-loT using ⁇ offset are summarized as follows: a transmission timing of NPDOCH scheduled NPUSCH format 1 ; a transmission timing of random access response (RAR) grant scheduled NPUSCH format 1 ; a transmission timing of HARQ-ACK on NPUSCH format 2; a transmission timing of NPDCCH ordered NB-loT physical random access channel (NPRACH); a timing of the adjustment of uplink transmission timing upon reception of a corresponding timing advance command.
  • RAR random access response
  • NPRACH physical random access channel
  • RAR random access response
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • SRS aperiodic sounding reference signal
  • ⁇ offset ma Y For initial access, information of ⁇ offset ma Y be carried in system information. Update of the ⁇ offset after initial access may be supported.
  • a UE-specific ⁇ offset ma Y be provided and updated by network/gNB/eNB/base station with MAC CE.
  • mac is a scheduling offset that may be supported in NTN for MAC CE timing relationships enhancement.
  • m ac ma Y be provided by the network if downlink and uplink frame timing are not aligned at eNB.
  • K mac may be needed for UE action and assumption on downlink configuration indicated by a MAC-CE command in (N)PDSCH.
  • the m ac ma Y a ls° be used in pre-configured uplink resources, in response to the UE initiating an (N)PUSCH transmission using pre-configured uplink resources ending in subframe n, the UE shall start or restart to monitor the N/MPDCCH from DL subframe n + 4 + K mac .
  • a network/eN B/g N B may broadcast ephemeris information and common TA parameters for the UE to autonomously perform TA pre-compensation.
  • the network/gNB/eNB may broadcast ephemeris information and common TA parameters for the UE to autonomously perform frequency shift precompensation.
  • the UE may acquire a GNSS position of the UE before connecting to an NTN cell to ensure the UE is synchronized.
  • the UE may acquire satellite ephemeris and common TA before connected to the NTN cell to ensure the UE is synchronized.
  • the UE may autonomously pre-compensate a TA for the long propagation delay as well as the frequency doppler shift by considering the common TA, position of the UE and a satellite position through the satellite ephemeris.
  • the UE may continuously update the TA and frequency pre-compensation.
  • the UE may not be expected to perform GNSS acquisition.
  • One or more timers may ensure that the UE does not perform any transmissions due to outdated satellite ephemeris, common TA, or GNSS position.
  • the UE may re-acquire one or more broadcasted parameters.
  • the UE may move to RRCJDLE mode.
  • the UE may be configured to report TA at initial access or in the RRC_CONEECTED mode. In the RRC_CONEECTED mode, triggered reporting of the TA may be supported.
  • the UE may be capable of using an acquired GNSS position of UE and the satellite ephemeris information (when provided by the network/gNB/eNB) to calculate frequency pre-compensation to counter shift an instantaneous Doppler shift experienced on a service link.
  • a satellite beams coverage area may move and cover different portions of a geographical area due to an orbital movement of the satellite.
  • a UE located in a concerned geographical area may experience a situation of discontinuous coverage, due to, for example, a sparse satellites constellation deployment.
  • the network/gNB/eNB may provide satellite assistance information (e.g. satellite ephemeris parameters, a start-time of upcoming satellite's coverage, end-time of satellite's coverage, and the like) ephemeris parameters to enable the UE to predict when coverage will be provided by upcoming satellites. Predicting out of coverage and in coverage may be up to UE implementation. When out of coverage, the UE may not be required to perform access stratum functions.
  • satellite assistance information e.g. satellite ephemeris parameters, a start-time of upcoming satellite's coverage, end-time of satellite's coverage, and the like
  • a feeder link switch over may be a procedure where a feeder link is changed from a source NTN Gateway to a target NTN Gateway for a specific NTN payload.
  • the feeder link switch over may be a Transport Network Layer procedure. Both hard and soft feeder link switch over may be applicable to NTN.
  • a feeder link switch over may result in transferring an established connection for affected UE between two eNBs/gNBs/base stations.
  • an NTN payload may be able to connect to more than one NTN Gateway during a given period, e.g. , a temporary overlap may be ensured during transition between feeder links.
  • an NTN payload may only connect to one NTN Gateway at any given time, e.g., a radio link interruption may occur during a transition between the feeder links.
  • An NTN control function may determine a point in time when the feeder link switch over between two eNBs/gNBs/base stations is performed. For BL UEs and UEs in enhanced coverage, transfer of the affected UEs’ contexts between the two eNBs/gNBs/base stations at the feeder link switch over may be performed by means of either S1 based or X2 based handover. The transfer may depend on implementations of the two eNBs/gNBs/base stations and configuration information provided to the two eNBs/gNBs/base stations by the NTN control function.
  • UE in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state may perform an idle/inactive measurement procedure.
  • the idle/inactive measurement procedure may refer to a measurement procedure comprising an idle/inactive measurement performed during the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state and/or a transmission of idle/inactive measurement result(s) of the idle/inactive measurement to a base station.
  • the idle/inactive measurement procedure may be referred to as an EMR, an EMR procedure, an RRC idle/inactive measurement, and/or the like.
  • the idle/inactive measurement procedure may specify measurement(s) to be performed and stored by a UE in RRCJDLE and RRC_INACTIVE when the UE has an idle/inactive measurement configuration.
  • the UE may perform the idle/inactive measurement procedure to support fast CA/DC setup after transitioning from RRC idle state or RRC inactive state to RRC connected state.
  • an idle/inactive measurement configuration may refer to a measurement configuration comprising one or more parameters indicating at least one measurement object (e.g., a carrier configured in a carrier frequency) and a measurement quantity (e.g., report quantity) of the at least one measurement object.
  • the UE may measure one or more reference signals (e.g., SSB and/or CSI-RS) of the at least one measurement object and/or may determine the measurement quantity (e.g., RSRP value, RSRQ value, and/or RSSI value) measured on the one or more reference signals of the measurement object.
  • an idle/inactive measurement result may refer to a measurement result and/or a measurement (or report) quantity (e.g., RSRP value, RSRQ value, and/or RSSI value) that the UE determines by measuring a measurement object (e.g., performing an idle/inactive measurement procedure) according the an idle/inactive measurement configuration while the UE in RRC_I DLE and RRC_I NACTIVE.
  • a measurement object e.g., performing an idle/inactive measurement procedure
  • an idle/inactive measurement result may refer to a measurement quantity (e.g., RSRP value, RSRQ value, and/or RSSI value) that the UE determines by measuring a measurement object (e.g., performing an idle/inactive measurement procedure) according an idle/inactive measurement configuration.
  • a measurement quantity e.g., RSRP value, RSRQ value, and/or RSSI value
  • the UE may receive, from a base station, a message comprising an idle/inactive measurement configuration.
  • the idle/inactive measurement configuration may be referred to as an EMR configuration, an RRC idle/inactive measurement configuration, and/or the like.
  • the message may be an RRC release message.
  • the UE may transition to the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, e.g., in response to the RRC release message (e.g., comprising a suspendCofig).
  • the UE may perform idle/inactive measurements using the idle/inactive measurement configuration while the UE is in RRC idle state or RRC inactive state.
  • the UE may transmit, to a base station, an indication indicating that the idle/inactive measurement results are available at the UE. Then the base station may request the UE to report the idle/inactive measurement results. In response to receiving the request, the UE may transmit the idle/inactive measurement results to the base station. Based on the idle/inactive measurement results, the base station may configure the carrier aggregation or multi-radio access technology dual connectivity (MRDO) to the UE after the UE transitions to the RRC connected state.
  • MRDO multi-radio access technology dual connectivity
  • the MRDC configuration may include NR-NR dual connectivity (the master node and the secondary node(s) are NR gNBs), E-UTRA— NR dual connectivity (the master node is E-UTRA ng-eNB and the secondary node(s) is(are) NR gNB(s)), and NR— E-UTRA dual connectivity (the master node is NR gNB and the secondary node is(are) E-UTRA ng-eNB(s).
  • the RRC release message may comprise idle/inactive measurement configuration (e.g., measIdleConfigDedicated).
  • the UE may store (e.g., keep) the idle/inactive measurement configuration in the idle/inactive measurement configuration UE variable (e.g., VarMeasIdleConfig).
  • the UE variable in the example embodiments in the present disclosure may refer to a variable that the UE stores (e.g., keeps and/or maintain) for a (e.g., future) use in the operation.
  • a UE variable may comprise (e.g., stores, keeps, and/or maintain) one or more parameter values (e.g., each parameter value is associated with a respective parameter).
  • the UE may apply and/or use one or more parameter values stored (e.g., kept and/or maintained) in the UE variable for one or more procedures that the UE performs.
  • the UE may discard, release, remove, and/or abandon one or more parameter values from the UE variable that comprises (e.g., stores, keeps, and/or maintain) the one or more parameter values.
  • the UE may not (e.g., may not be able to) recover a parameter value, e.g., once the UE discards (or releases, removes, deletes, and/or abandons) the parameter value from the UE variable.
  • the UE may store (e.g., keep and/or maintain), in the UE variable, one or more parameter values that the UE receives in a message (e.g., RRC message) from a network (e.g., a base station).
  • a message e.g., RRC message
  • the network may store (e.g., keeps and/or maintain) the one or more parameter values that are the same as the one that UE stores in the UE variable.
  • the UE and the network may be in sync to maintain the one or more parameter values.
  • storing (e.g., keeping, and/or maintain), in a UE variable, a parameter may refer to or interchangeable with storing (e.g., keeping, and/or maintain), in a UE variable, a parameter value (e.g., identifier of a carrier) of the parameter (e.g., the carrier).
  • discarding e.g., releasing, removing, deleting, and/or abandoning
  • a parameter e.g., a carrier
  • discarding e.g., releasing, removing, deleting, and/or abandoning
  • a parameter value e.g., identifier of a carrier of the parameter (e.g., the carrier).
  • the idle/inactive measurement configuration may comprise at least one of: indication(s) of NR carrier(s) to be measured; indication(s) of E-UTRA carrier(s) to be measured; a timer value of idle/inactive measurement duration timer; and indication(s) of Validity area.
  • the value of the idle/inactive measurement duration timer may be in the idle/inactive measurement configuration as a mandatory parameter.
  • the other parameters, NR carriers to be measured, E-UTRA carriers to be measured, and validity area, may be in the idle/inactive measurement configuration as an optional parameter(s).
  • a validity area may be (e.g., refer to) a configuration and/or an information element (IE) that UE uses to validate measurement configuration(s) (e.g., idle/inactive measurement configuration(s)), e.g., configured for measurements during RRC IDLE and/or RRC INACTIVE.
  • UE may receive, from a base station, a message (e.g., RRC release message) comprising one or more validity areas and/or measurement configuration(s) (e.g., idle/inactive measurement conf igu ration (s)) .
  • the one or more validity areas may be included in the message as a form of a list of validity areas (e.g., Valid ityAreaList) .
  • a (e.g., each) validity area of the one or more validity area may comprise one or more parameters indicating a carrier frequency (e.g., parameter name: carrierFreq, parameter value: ARFCN Value) respective to the validity area and/or one or more cells (e.g., a list of validity cells, Valid ityCell List) respective to the validity area.
  • the one or more cells in the validity area may be configured with the carrier frequency in the validity area.
  • the UE may invalidate the measurement configuration(s) in response to a camp-on cell is not included any of validity cell(s) included in all of validity area(s) (e.g., .
  • the UE may release (e.g., abandon, discard, delete, and/or remove) the measurement configuration(s) in response to invalidating the measurement configuration(s).
  • the UE may start the idle/inactive measurement duration timer with the timer value. While the idle/inactive measurement duration timer is running, other parameters in the idle/inactive measurement configuration, the NR carriers to be measured, E-UTRA carriers to be measured, and validity area are valid to be used or applied to the idle/inactive measurement procedure. After or in response to an expiry of the idle/inactive measurement duration timer, the UE may release the stored idle/inactive measurement configuration.
  • the idle/inactive measurement duration timer may be interchangeable with T331 timer.
  • the UE may update the idle/inactive measurement configuration, e.g., in response to selecting a cell when entering RRC idle state or RRC inactive state and/or in response to determining an update of system information (e.g., SIB4, or SIB11).
  • system information e.g., SIB4, or SIB11
  • the UE may store the carriers (e.g., comprising at least one of NR carrier(s) and/or E-UTRA carrier(s)) indicated by system information (e.g., SIB11) as the one to be measured from the system information (e.g., SIB11).
  • system information e.g., SIB11
  • the UE may store or replace the E-UTRA carriers to be measured within the UE variable, e.g., if the UE receives, from a serving cell, system information (e.g., SIB11) and/or if the system information (e.g., SIB11) comprises idle/inactive measurement configuration (e.g., meas/dleConfigSIB indicating E-UTRA carriers to be measured.
  • SIB11 system information
  • SIB11 comprises idle/inactive measurement configuration
  • the UE may remove, from the UE variable, the E-UTRA carriers to be measured, if any, e.g., if the SIB11 does not include the E-UTRA carriers to be measured.
  • the UE may store or replace the NR carriers to be measured within the UE variable, e.g., if the UE receive, from a serving cell, system information (e.g., SIB11) and/or if the SIB11 comprises idle/inactive measurement configuration (e.g., meas/dleConfigSIB) indicating NR carriers to be measured.
  • SIB11 system information
  • SIB11 idle/inactive measurement configuration
  • the UE may remove, from the UE variable, the NR carriers to be measured, if any, e.g., if the SIB11 does not include the NR carriers to be measured.
  • UE may delete the SSB measurement configuration and store the SSB measurement configuration from the SIB11 into nrofSS-BlocksToAverage, absThreshSS-BlocksConsolidation, smte, ssb-ToMeasure, deriveSSB-lndexFromCell, and ss-RSSI-Measurement within SSB measurement configuration of the corresponding configuration of the stored carrier, e.g., if there is a stored carrier to be measured that does not contain an SSB measurement configuration (e.g., ssb-MeasConfig) received from the RRC release message, and/or if there is an NR carrier in SIB11 that has the same carrier frequency and subcarrier spacing as the stored carrier.
  • SSB measurement configuration e.g., ssb-MeasConfig
  • the UE may delete the SSB measurement configuration and stores the SSB measurement configuration from the SIB11 into nrofSS-BlocksToAverage, absThreshSS-BlocksConsolidation, smte, ssb-ToMeasure, deriveSSB-lndexFromCell, and ss-RSSI-Measurement within SSB measurement configuration of the corresponding configuration of the stored carrier, e.g., if there is a stored carrier to be measured that does not contain an SSB measurement configuration (e.g., ssb-MeasConfig) received from the RRC release message, and/or if there is a stored carrier to be measured that does not contain an SSB measurement configuration (e.g., ssb-MeasConfig) received from the RRC release message, and/or if there is an NR carrier in SIB4 that has the same carrier frequency and subcarrier spacing as the stored carrier.
  • SSB measurement configuration
  • the UE may perform idle/inactive measurements on the NR carriers included in the idle/inactive measurement configuration and E-UTRA carriers included in the idle/inactive measurement configuration, e.g., while the T331 is running.
  • UE may perform idle/inactive measurements on the stored E-UTRA carriers to be measured that the UE supports NE-DC between the serving carrier and the E-UTRA carrier to be measured, e.g., if UE receives the SIB1 , broadcast by the serving cell, that comprises E-UTRA measurement indication (e.g., idleModeMeasurementsEUTRA) and/or if the UE has stored E-UTRA carriers to be measured.
  • E-UTRA measurement indication e.g., idleModeMeasurementsEUTRA
  • the UE may determine RSRQ as the sorting quantity. If not indicated, the UE may determine RSRP as the sorting quantity; and if the E-UTRA cell list (e.g., measCellListEUTRA) is included, the UE may determine the cells identified by the cell list to be applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting.
  • the E-UTRA report quantity indication of the carrier e.g., reporiQuantitiesEUTRA
  • the UE may determine RSRQ as the sorting quantity. If not indicated, the UE may determine RSRP as the sorting quantity; and if the E-UTRA cell list (e.g., measCellListEUTRA) is included, the UE may determine the cells identified by the cell list to be applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting.
  • the UE may determine up to N (e.g., maxCellMeas/dle) strongest identified cells, according to the sorting quantity based on the E- UTRA report quantity indication, to be applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting. [0334] The UE may derive the idle/inactive measurement results for the measurement quantities indicated by the E- UTRA report quantity indication for all cells applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting.
  • N e.g., maxCellMeas/dle
  • the UE may store the derived (or determined) idle/inactive measurement results as indicated by the E-UTRA report quantity within an idle/inactive measurement results UE variable (e.g., VarMeasIdleReport) in decreasing order of the sorting quantity.
  • E-UTRA quality threshold e.g., qualityThresholdEUTRA
  • the UE may include the measurement results from the cells applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting whose RSRP/RSRQ measurement results are above the value(s) provided in the E-UTRA quality threshold.
  • the E-UTRA quality threshold is not configured, the UE may include the measurement results from all cells applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting.
  • UE may perform idle/inactive measurements on the stored NR carriers to be measured that the UE supports NR-DC between the serving carrier and the NR carrier to be measured, e.g., if UE receives the SIB1 , broadcast by the serving cell, that comprises NR measurement indication (e.g., idleModeMeasurementsNR) and/or if the UE has stored NR carriers to be measured.
  • NR measurement indication e.g., idleModeMeasurementsNR
  • the UE may determine RSRQ as the sorting quantity. If not indicated, the UE may determine RSRP as the sorting quantity; and if the NR cell list (e.g., measCe/IListNR) is included, the UE may determine the cells identified by the cell list to be applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting.
  • the NR report quantity indication of the carrier e.g., reportQuantities
  • the UE may determine RSRP as the sorting quantity
  • the NR cell list e.g., measCe/IListNR
  • the UE may determine up to N (e.g., maxCellMeasIdle strongest identified cells, according to the sorting quantity based on the NR report quantity indication, to be applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting.
  • N e.g., maxCellMeasIdle strongest identified cells, according to the sorting quantity based on the NR report quantity indication, to be applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting.
  • the UE may derive the idle/inactive measurement results for the measurement quantities indicated by the NR report quantity indication for all cells applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting.
  • the UE may store the derived (or determined) idle/inactive measurement results as indicated by the NR report quantity within the idle/inactive measurement results UE variable (e.g., VarMeasIdleReport) in decreasing order of the sorting quantity.
  • NR quality threshold e.g., qualltyThresholdNR
  • the UE may include the measurement results from the cells applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting whose RSRP/RSRQ measurement results are above the value(s) provided in the NR quality threshold.
  • the NR quality threshold is not configured, the UE may include the measurement results from all cells applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting.
  • the UE may derive beam measurements based on SS/PBCH block, e.g., the measurement configuration of the NR carrier to be measured comprises beam measurement configuration (e.g., beamMeasConfigldle), and/or the UE supports beam measurements of the carrier frequency.
  • the measurement configuration of the NR carrier to be measured comprises beam measurement configuration (e.g., beamMeasConfigldle), and/or the UE supports beam measurements of the carrier frequency.
  • the validity area list may comprise one or more validity areas (e.g., Valldi'tyArea).
  • a (e.g., each) validity area of the one or more validity areas may comprise a respective carrier frequency.
  • a (e.g., each) validity area of the one or more validity areas may comprise a respective list of cells (e.g., validityCellList) in the validity area.
  • One or more cells in the list of cells of the validity area may be associated with the carrier frequency of the validity area.
  • a cell in the list of cells may be indicated by an index, identity, or identifier (e.g., physical cell identity) of the cell.
  • the UE may release the stored idle/inactive measurement configuration (e.g., whole or all idle/inactive measurement configurations stored in a UE variable (e.g., VarMeasIdleConfig) and/or received from the RRC release message and/or SIB) if:
  • a UE variable e.g., VarMeasIdleConfig
  • a serving frequency e.g., a carrier frequency of a camp-on cell and/or a carrier frequency of a cell that the UE selects based on the cell selection procedure or cell reselection procedure
  • a serving frequency does not match with a carrier frequency in a (e.g., any) validity area of the one or more validity areas
  • a serving frequency matches with a carrier frequency in at least one validity area of the one or more validity areas, a list of cells (e.g., validityCellList) is included in the at least one validity area, and the physical cell identity of a serving cell (e.g., a camp-on cell, and/or a cell that the UE selects based on the cell selection procedure or cell reselection procedure) does not match with any cell in the list of cells in the at least one validity area.
  • a serving frequency e.g., a carrier frequency of a camp-on cell and/or a carrier frequency of a cell that the UE selects based on the cell
  • a camp-on cell in the disclosure may be (e.g., refer to) a cell that UE monitors system information (e.g., SIB) and/or paging information (e.g., Short Message) during RRC IDLE, RRC INACTIVE and/or RRC CONNECTED. For example, the UE performs a SIB acquisition and/or paging procedure in the camp-on cell during RRC IDLE, RRC INACTIVE and/or RRC CONNECTED.
  • SIB system information
  • paging information e.g., Short Message
  • the camp-on cell may be (e.g., refer to) a cell that UE has selected (e.g., determined and/or chosen) after, during, and/or in response to the cell selection procedure (process) and/or cell reselection procedure (e.g., process). For example, UE performs a cell selection procedure and/or a cell reselection procedure to select (e.g., determine) a cell for monitoring system information (e.g., SIB) and/or paging information (e.g., Short Message) during RRC IDLE, RRC INACTIVE and/or RRC CONNECTED.
  • the selected cell from the cell selection procedure and/or the cell reselection procedure may be referred to as a camp-on cell.
  • the UE may keep the idle/inactive measurement configuration, continue performing the measurements, and keep running the timer T331, e.g., validity area list comprises the serving cell and the timer T331 is running,
  • RRC setup complete message may comprise an idle/inactive measurement information availability indication (e.g., idleMeasAvailable) if: the SIB1 contains NR measurement indication (e.g., idleModeMeasurementsNR) and the UE has NR idle/inactive measurement information (e.g., measurement results of NR carriers to be measured) in the idle/inactive measurement results UE variable (e.g., VarMeas/dleReport); or the SIB1 contains E-UTRA measurement indication (e.g., IdleModeMeasurementsE-UTRA) and the UE has E- UTRA idle/inactive measurement information (e.g., measurement results of E-UTRA carriers to be measured) in the idle/inactive measurement results UE variable (e.g., VarMeas/dleReport).
  • NR measurement indication e.g., idleModeMeasurementsNR
  • E-UTRA measurement indication e.g., IdleModeMea
  • RRC resume complete message may comprise an idle/inactive measurement information availability indication (e.g., idleMeasAvailable) in response to receiving RRC resume message not comprising an idle/inactive measurement request indication (e.g., IdleModeMeasurementReq), if: the SIB1 contains NR measurement indication (e.g., idleModeMeasurementsNR) and the UE has NR idle/inactive measurement information (e.g., measurement results of NR carriers to be measured) in the idle/inactive measurement results UE variable (e.g., VarMeasIdleReport); or the SIB1 contains E-UTRA measurement indication (e.g., idleModeMeasurementsE-UTRA and the UE has E- UTRA idle/inactive measurement information (e.g., measurement results of E-UTRA carriers to be measured) in the idle/inactive measurement results UE variable (e.g., VarMeas
  • RRC resume complete message may comprise idle/inactive measurement result(s) of the idle/inactive measurement (e.g., measResultldleEUTRA and/or measResultldleNR) in response to receiving RRC resume message comprising the idle/inactive measurement request indication.
  • the UE may discard the idle/inactive measurement result(s) of the idle/inactive measurement in the UE variable upon successful delivery of the RRC resume complete message confirmed by lower layers (e.g., MAC layer).
  • UE information response message (e.g., UElnformationResponse message) may comprise idle/inactive measurement result(s) of the idle/inactive measurement (e.g., measResultldleEUTRA and/or measResultldleNR) in response to receiving UE information request message (e.g., UElnformationRequest message) comprising the idle/inactive measurement request indication.
  • the UE may discard the idle/inactive measurement result(s) of the idle/inactive measurement in the UE variable upon successful delivery of the UE information response message confirmed by lower layers (e.g., MAC layer).
  • FIG. 23 illustrates an example of idle/inactive measurement information report.
  • the UE in RRC connected state may receive RRC release message comprising idle/inactive measurement configuration.
  • the idle/inactive measurement configuration may comprise NR/E-UTRA carriers to be measured, idle/inactive measurement duration timer, and validity area list.
  • the UE may enter RRC idle state if the RRC release message does not comprise suspend configuration (e.g., suspendConfig).
  • suspendConfig e.g., suspendConfig
  • the UE may perform measurements on the carriers to be measured in the idle/inactive measurement configuration.
  • the UE may store the idle/inactive measurement results of the carriers to be measured in the UE variable.
  • the UE may perform RRC connection establishment procedure and enter RRC connected state.
  • the UE may include an indication, idleMeasAvailable, in the RRCRetupComplete message.
  • the indication indicates that the UE has idle/inactive measurement information to report.
  • the UE may receive, from the base station, UElnformationRequest message comprising a request indication, idleModeMeasurementReq.
  • the request indication may indicate the UE to report the idle/inactive measurement information.
  • the UE may report the stored idle/inactive measurement information to the base station in the UElnformationResponse message.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates an example of idle/inactive measurement information report.
  • the UE in RRC connected state may receive RRC release message comprising idle/inactive measurement configuration.
  • the idle/inactive measurement configuration may comprise NR/E-UTRA carriers to be measured, idle/inactive measurement duration timer, and validity area list.
  • the UE may enter RRC inactive state if the RRC release message comprises suspend configuration (e.g., suspendConfig).
  • suspendConfig e.g., suspendConfig
  • the UE may perform idle/inactive measurements on the carriers to be measured in the idle/inactive measurement configuration.
  • the UE may store the idle/inactive measurement results of the carriers to be measured in the UE variable.
  • the UE may trigger RRC connection resume procedure and transmit RRCResumeRequest message or RRCResumeRequestl message.
  • the UE may receive RRCResume message comprising a request indication, idleModeMeasurementReq.
  • the request indication may indicate the UE to report the idle/inactive measurement information.
  • the UE may transmit, to the base station, the RRCResumeComplete message comprising the stored idle/inactive measurement information.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates an example of idle/inactive measurement information report.
  • the UE in RRC connected state may receive RRC release message comprising idle/inactive measurement configuration.
  • the idle/inactive measurement configuration may comprise NR/E-UTRA carriers to be measured, idle/inactive measurement duration timer, and validity area list.
  • the UE may enter RRC inactive state if the RRC release message comprises suspend configuration (e.g., suspendConfig).
  • suspendConfig e.g., suspendConfig
  • the UE may perform measurements on the carriers to be measured in the idle/inactive measurement configuration.
  • the UE may store the idle/inactive measurement results of the carriers to be measured in the UE variable.
  • the UE may perform RRC connection resume procedure and enter RRC connected state.
  • the UE may include an indication, idleMeasAvailable, in the RRCResumeComplete message.
  • the indication indicates that the UE has idle/inactive measurement information to report.
  • the UE may receive, from the base station, UElnformationRequest message comprising a request indication, idleModeMeasurementReq.
  • the request indication may indicate the UE to report the idle/inactive measurement information.
  • the UE may report the stored idle/inactive measurement information to the base station in the UElnformationResponse message.
  • the UE may perform cell selection procedure in response to receiving RRC release message, initiation of the RRC connection re-establishment procedure, or performing the actions upon going to RRC idle state.
  • the cell selection procedure may comprise performing initial cell selection or cell selection by leveraging stored information.
  • the UE may perform the initial cell selection if the UE have no prior knowledge of which RF channels are NR frequencies.
  • Performing the initial cell selection may comprise: scanning all RF channels in the NR bands according to its capabilities to find a suitable cell; searching for the strongest cell of each frequency of neighbor frequencies, except for operation with shared spectrum channel access where the UE may search for the next strongest cell(s); and selecting, if a suitable cell is found, the suitable cell.
  • the neighbor frequencies may be the frequencies that the SIB4 comprises.
  • the cell selection by leveraging stored information may be based on stored information of frequencies and information on cell parameters, which SIB4 comprises, from previously received measurement control information elements or previously detected cell. Once the UE has found a suitable cell, the UE may select it. If no suitable cell is found after performing the cell selection by leveraging stored information, the UE may start the initial cell selection procedure.
  • a cell may be suitable cell in response to: being part of either the selected PLMN or the registered PLMN or PLMN of the Equivalent PLMN list, and for that PLMN either; fulfilling the cell selection criteria; being not barred; and being part of at least one TA that is not part of the list of "Forbidden Tracking Areas for Roaming".
  • Srxlev is equal to “Qrxlevmeas - (Qrxlevmin + Qrxlevminoffset )- Pcompensation - Qoffsettemp”;
  • the cell selection criterion may comprise the parameters indicating: cell selection RX level value (e.g., Srxlev); cell selection quality value (e.g., Squal); measured, by the wireless device, cell RX level value (e.g., Qrxlevmeas); measured, by the wireless device, cell quality value (e.g., Qqualmeas); minimum required RX level in the cell (e.g., Qrxlevmin); minimum required quality level in the cell (e.g., Qqualmin); offset to the signalled minimum required RX level in the cell (e.g., Qrxlevminoffset); offset to the signalled minimum required quality level in the cell (e.g., Qrxlevminoffset); power compensation value (e.g., Pcompensation); maximum TX power level of a wireless device may use when transmitting on the uplink in the cell (e.g., PEMAX1, PEMAX2); and maximum RF output power of the wireless device according to the wireless device power class (
  • the UE may perform neighbor cell measurements on one or more neighbor frequencies.
  • the one or more neighbor frequencies may be determined based on the one or more carrier frequencies that SIB4 comprises.
  • the UE may search for a better cell. If the better cell is found, the UE may select the cell. The UE may perform cell reselection to the selected cell. A cell may be the better cell if the cell fulfils cell reselection criteria.
  • a neighbor cell on a higher priority NR frequency or inter-RAT (e.g., E-UTRA) frequency than the serving frequency may fulfil the cell reselection criteria if:
  • Squal value of the cell is higher than a threshold (e.g., Threshx, Higho) for a time interval (e.g., T reselection RAT); or Srxlev value of the cell is higher than a threshold (e.g., Threshx, Highp) for a time interval (e.g., TreselectionRAi) and more than one second has elapsed since the UE camped on the current serving cell.
  • a threshold e.g., Threshx, Higho
  • a threshold e.g., Threshx, Highp
  • TreselectionRAi TreselectionRAi
  • a neighbor cell on a lower priority NR frequency or inter-RAT (e.g., E-UTRA) frequency than the serving frequency may fulfil the cell reselection criteria if:
  • Squal value of the serving cell is lower than a serving cell RSRQ threshold (e.g., Th reshserving, LOWQ) and Squal value of the cell is higher than a neighbor cell RSRQ threshold (e.g., Threshx, LOWQ) for a time interval (e.g., TreselectionRAi); or
  • Srxlev value of the serving cell is lower than a serving cell RSRP threshold (e.g., Thresh serving, LOWP) and Srxlev value of the cell is higher than a neighbor cell RSRP threshold (e.g., Threshx, LOWP) for a time interval (e.g., TreselectionRAi);
  • a serving cell RSRP threshold e.g., Thresh serving, LOWP
  • a neighbor cell RSRP threshold e.g., Threshx, LOWP
  • TreselectionRAi e.g., TreselectionRAi
  • a neighbor cell on an equal priority NR frequency or on same frequency with serving frequency may fulfil the cell reselection criteria if R value of the cell is higher than R value of the serving cell and more than one second has elapsed since the UE camped on the current serving cell, wherein: the R value of the serving cell may be equals to “Qmeas.s +Qhyst - Qoffsettemp”, wherein Qmeas.s indicates RSRP measurement quantity of the serving cell, Qhyst indicates hysteresis value, and Qoffsettemp indicates temporarily applied offset value to the serving cell; and the R value of the neighbor cell may be equals to “Qmeas.n -Qoffset - Qoffsettemp”, wherein Qmeas.n indicates RSRP measurement quantity of the neighbor cell, Qoffset indicates offset value, and Qoffsettemp indicates temporarily applied offset value to the neighbor cell.
  • a UE when a UE receives RRC release message (e.g., RRCRelease message) comprising an idle/inactive measurement configuration, the UE may perform idle/inactive measurements on the one or more carriers to be measured that the idle/inactive measurement configuration comprises and store the measurement result(s) of the idle/inactive measurement.
  • the idle/inactive measurement result(s) of the idle/inactive measurement may be idle/inactive measurement information.
  • the UE may transmit the idle/inactive measurement information to the base station.
  • RRCResumeComplete message or UElnformati nResponse message may comprise the report of the idle/inactive measurement information.
  • the idle/inactive measurement information may comprise all the idle/inactive measurement results of the one or more carriers that were measured since the UE started the idle/inactive measurement until the UE stopped the idle/inactive measurement.
  • the base station may transmit, to the UE, configuration of carrier aggregation or dual connectivity (CA/DC) before the UE transmits measurement report of measurement result(s) of one or more measurement objects.
  • CA/DC carrier aggregation or dual connectivity
  • the idle/inactive measurement configuration may comprise a validity area list.
  • the validity area list comprises one or more validity areas. Each validity area of one or more validity areas is associated with a respective carrier frequency.
  • the UE may release the idle/inactive measurement configuration in response to the validity area list does not include the serving cell.
  • the validity area list may comprise one or more cells that can be aggregated with at least one of the one or more carriers to be measured using CA/DC.
  • the validity area list may not comprise a cell not supporting CA/DC aggregation with the one or more carriers to be measured.
  • the UE may discard stored idle/inactive measurement configuration, stop the idle/inactive measurement duration timer (e.g., T331), and stop performing the idle/inactive measurement in response to the serving cell being not match with any cells in the validity area.
  • stop the idle/inactive measurement duration timer e.g., T331
  • the NTN cells may appear or disappear to the UE.
  • the cell coverage area of the NTN cell may be fixed for a time period and then the cell coverage may move to the next area. Then the cell coverage may disappear to the UE.
  • the cell coverage area may change over time.
  • the relative position of the UE inside the cell coverage may change over time. After a time elapses, the cell coverage may disappear to the UE.
  • a serving satellite of an NTN cell may perform feeder link switch to change its serving NTN gateway. If the source gNB and the target gNB are different, the PCIs belonging to the source gNB may be changed to the PCIs belonging to the target gNB. After performing the feeder link switch, one or more PCIs belonging the source gNB may need to be deleted from the validity area and new PCIs, belonging to the target gNB, replacing the one or more PCIs may need to be added to the validity area.
  • the new serving gNB may assigned new PCIs to one or more cells in the validity area list. After being assigned new PCIs, the one or more cells may have the same CA/DC capabilities. The UE may need to perform idle/inactive measurement when the UE camps on a cell of the one or more cells. However, upon camping on a cell of the one or more cells, the UE will discard the idle/inactive measurement configuration because the validity area list does not include the updated PCIs.
  • FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 illustrates an example scenario that one or more cells are updated (e.g., selected and/or determined) after or in response to performing feeder link switch.
  • a UE may be camping on cell A in frequency 1.
  • the cell A may be served by satellite 1.
  • Service link of the UE is connected to satellite 1.
  • Neighbor cells of the UE may be cell B and cell C in frequency 2.
  • the cell B and the cell C may be served by satellite 2.
  • Feeder link of the satellite 1 is connected to NTN gateway 1.
  • Feeder link of the satellite 2 is connected to NTN gateway 1.
  • NTN gateway 1 is connected to g N B 1.
  • the gNB1 may support CA/DC between frequency 1 and frequency 2.
  • the cell A may transmit, to the UE, an idle/inactive measurement configuration comprising a validity area list.
  • the validity area list may comprise: cell A in frequency 1 ; and cell B and cell C in frequency 2.
  • Satellite 1 and satellite 2 are moving to NTN gateway 2. After the time point t1, satellite 1 may perform feeder link switch. [0371] In FIG. 27, at time point t2, the satellite 2 may perform the feeder link switch. After performing the feeder link switch, the feeder link of satellite 2 is connected to NTN gateway 2. The NTN gateway 2 is connected to g N B2. Feeder link of the satellite 1 is connected to NTN gateway 1. NTN gateway 1 is connected to gNB. The UE may be camping on cell A in frequency 1. The gNB2 updates the cells in frequency 2 from cell B and cell 0 to cell E and cell F. The cell E may control/manage same radio resource and capabilities with cell B. The cell B may control/manage same radio resource and capabilities with cell 0. The validity area list at t1 may comprise same cells and frequencies as the validity area list at t1 comprises.
  • gNB 1 may allocate the PCI of the cell B to a new NTN cell.
  • gNB1 may allocate, to the new NTN cell, a PCI that is same with PCI of the cell B.
  • the UE may perform cell reselection to the new NTN cell.
  • the validity area list at t2 comprises the cell B in frequency 2, the UE may keep the idle/inactive measurement configuration while camping on the new NTN cell that is different from the cell that the validity area list was indicating.
  • the performing idle/inactive measurement while camping on the new NTN cell may be an unnecessary because the new NTN cell may not support CA/DC aggregation with the frequency 1.
  • cell E and cell F may support same CA/DC capabilities with cell B and cell C. So, the UE may need to perform idle/inactive measurements while camping on cell E or cell F. However, the UE may release the idle/inactive measurement configuration upon the UE performs cell reselection to cell E or cell F, because the validity area list does not include the cell E and the cell F at the time point t2.
  • FIG. 28 illustrates an example embodiment for updating (e.g., selecting and/or determining) validity cells that are associated with validity time condition or validity location condition.
  • a UE may be camping on cell A.
  • the UE may receive RRCRelease message comprising idle/inactive measurement configuration comprising a validity area list.
  • One or more cells in the validity area list may be associated with one or more validity time condition or validity location condition.
  • the validity area list comprises:
  • Cell A in frequency 1 which does not comprise validity condition.
  • the cell A may be validity cell and the validity area list may comprise the cell A in frequency 1 ;
  • the associated validity time condition of the cell B comprises a start time point tO and an end time point t2.
  • the cell B may be validity cell if the associated validity time condition is satisfied (e.g., current measured time at UE is later than the time point tO and earlier than the time point t2);
  • the associated validity time condition of the cell C comprises a start time point t3 and an end time point t4.
  • the cell C may be validity cell if the associated validity time condition is satisfied (e.g., current measured time at UE is later than the time point t3 and earlier than the time point t4); and Cell D in frequency 2 which is associated with a validity location condition.
  • the associated validity location condition of the cell D comprises a reference location (x, y, z) and a distance threshold Dthreshold.
  • the cell D may be validity cell if the associated validity location condition is satisfied (e.g., the distance between the UE and the reference location is lower than the distance threshold Dthreshold).
  • a validity cell may be (e.g., refer to) a cell that UE uses to validate measurement configuration(s) (e.g., idle/inactive measurement configuration(s)), e.g., configured for measurements during RRC IDLE and/or RRC INACTIVE.
  • UE may receive, from a base station, a message (e.g., RRC release message) comprising one or more validity cells and/or measurement configuration(s) (e.g., idle/inactive measurement configuration(s)).
  • Each validity cell of the one or more validity cells may be associated with a respective carrier frequency.
  • the UE may invalidate the measurement configuration(s) in response to a camp-on cell is not included any of the one or more validity cells.
  • the UE may release (e.g., abandon, discard, delete, and/or remove) the measurement configuration(s) in response to invalidating the measurement configuration(s).
  • the associated validity time condition of the cell B may be satisfied.
  • the cell B in frequency 2 may become validity cell and may be added to the validity area list.
  • the associated validity location condition of the cell D may be satisfied (e.g., the distance between the UE and the reference location (x, y, z) of the validity location condition associated with cell D being lower than the distance threshold Dthreshold).
  • the cell D in frequency 2 may become validity cell and may be added to the validity area list.
  • the serving satellite of the UE may perform feeder link switch.
  • the associated validity time condition of the cell B may be not satisfied.
  • the cell B in frequency 2 may become not validity cell and may be deleted from the validity area list.
  • the associated validity time condition of the cell C may be satisfied.
  • the cell C in frequency 2 may become validity cell and may be added to the validity area list.
  • the associated validity time condition of the cell C may be not satisfied.
  • the cell C in frequency 2 may become not validity cell and may be deleted from the validity area list.
  • the associated validity location condition of the cell D may be not satisfied (e.g., the distance between the UE and the reference location (x, y, z) of the validity location condition associated with cell D being higher than the distance threshold Dthreshold).
  • the cell D in frequency 2 may become not validity cell and may be deleted from the validity area list.
  • FIG. 29 illustrates an example embodiment for updating (e.g., selecting and/or determining) validity cells that are associated with validity time condition.
  • a UE may be camping on cell A.
  • the UE may receive RRCRelease message comprising idle/inactive measurement configuration comprising a validity area list.
  • One or more cells in the validity area list may be associated with one or more validity time condition.
  • the validity area list comprises:
  • the cell A in frequency 1 which does not comprise validity condition.
  • the cell A may be validity cell and the validity area list may comprise the cell A in frequency 1 ;
  • Cell B in frequency 2 which is associated with a validity time condition.
  • the associated validity time condition of the cell B comprises a start time point tO and an end time point t2.
  • the cell B may be validity cell if the associated validity time condition is satisfied (e.g., current measured time at UE is later than the time point tO and earlier than the time point t2);
  • the associated validity time condition of the cell C comprises a start time point t1 and an end time point t3.
  • the cell C may be validity cell if the associated validity time condition is satisfied (e.g., current measured time at UE is later than the time point t1 and earlier than the time point t3), [0383]
  • the associated validity time condition of the cell B may be satisfied.
  • the cell B in frequency 2 may become validity cell and may be added to the validity area list.
  • the associated validity time condition of the cell C may be satisfied.
  • the cell C in frequency 2 may become validity cell and may be added to the validity area list.
  • the associated validity time condition of the cell B may be not satisfied.
  • the cell B in frequency 2 may become not validity cell and may be deleted from the validity area list.
  • the associated validity time condition of the cell C may be not satisfied.
  • the cell 0 in frequency 2 may become not validity cell and may be deleted from the validity area list.
  • the idle/inactive measurement configuration may comprise a validity area list, one or more cells, one or more validity time conditions, and one or more validity location conditions.
  • the validity area list may comprise the one or more cells.
  • Each cell of the one or more cells may be associated with one or more validity time conditions and/or one or more validity location conditions.
  • a cell of the one or more cells may be validity cell if at least one of associated validity time condition or validity location condition of the cell is satisfied.
  • the UE may release the idle/inactive measurement configuration in response to the validity cells not comprising the camp-on cell.
  • the UE may receive a radio resource control (RRC) release message (e.g., RRCRelease) comprising a measurement configuration (e.g., mesaldleConfig).
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the measurement configuration may comprise one or more first cells and one or more validity conditions.
  • the UE may perform cell selection procedure during an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state.
  • the UE may select a camp-on cell based on the cell selection procedure.
  • the UE may determine that the camp-on cell is not a validity cell, wherein the determination of the validity cell is based on the one or more validity conditions.
  • the UE may release the measurement configuration in response to the camp-on cell being not the validity cell.
  • the UE may receive a radio resource control (RRC) release message (e.g., RRCRelease) comprising a measurement configuration (e.g., mesaldleConfig).
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the measurement configuration may comprise one or more first cells and one or more validity conditions.
  • the UE may update (e.g., select and/or determine) a validity cell based on a cell selection procedure during an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state and the one or more validity conditions.
  • the UE may release the measurement configuration in response to a camp-on cell being not a validity cell.
  • the UE may receive a radio resource control (RRC) release message (e.g., RRCRe/ease) comprising a measurement configuration (e.g., mesaldleConfig .
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the measurement configuration may comprise one or more first cells and one or more validity conditions.
  • the UE may release the measurement configuration in response to the camp-on cell is not a validity cell updated (e.g., determined and/or selected) from the one or more first cells based on the one or more validity conditions.
  • the UE may receive a radio resource control (RRC) release message (e.g., RRCRelease) comprising a measurement configuration (e.g., mesaldleConfig) that may be used in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the measurement configuration may comprise one or more validity time conditions, one or more validity location conditions, and one or more first cells to validate the measurement configuration.
  • Each cell of the one or more first cells is associated with a respective validity time condition of the one or more validity time conditions and a respective validity location condition of the one or more validity location conditions.
  • the UE may transition to the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state based on the RRC release message.
  • the UE may perform a cell selection procedure during the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state. Based on the cell selection procedure, the UE may: determine a camp-on cell; update (determine and/or select), among the one or more first cells, one or more validity cells based on one or more validity time conditions; and releasing the measurement configuration in response to the one or more validity cells not comprising the camp-on cell.
  • FIG. 32 illustrate an example flow diagram of validity cell determination in the disclosure.
  • a wireless device may receive a radio resource control (RRC) release message comprising a measurement configuration used in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state.
  • the measurement configuration e.g., Measld leConfig
  • the measurement configuration indicates: one or more validity time conditions; one or more validity location conditions; and one or more first cells to validate the measurement configuration.
  • each cell of the one or more first cells is associated with: a respective validity time condition of the one or more validity time conditions; and a respective validity location condition of the one or more validity location conditions.
  • the wireless device may transition to the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state based on the RRC release message.
  • the wireless device may determine a camp-on cell; update (e.g., determine and/or select), among the one or more first cells, one or more validity cells based on one or more validity time conditions; and release the measurement configuration in response to the one or more validity cells not comprising the camp-on cell.
  • FIG. 33 illustrate an example flow diagram of validity cell determination in the disclosure.
  • a wireless device may receive a radio resource control (RRC) release message comprising a measurement configuration indicating: one or more first cells; and one or more validity conditions.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the wireless device may select, based on a cell selection procedure during an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state, a camp-on cell.
  • the wireless device may release the measurement configuration in response to a determination that the camp-on cell is not a validity cell. For example, the determination is based on the validity conditions.
  • a wireless device may receive a radio resource control (RRC) release message comprising a measurement configuration indicating: one or more first cells; and one or more validity conditions.
  • the wireless device may update (e.g., determine and/or select) a validity cell based on: a cell selection procedure during an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state; and the one or more validity conditions.
  • the wireless device may release the measurement configuration in response to a camp-on cell is not a validity cell.
  • a wireless device may receive a radio resource control (RRC) release message comprising a measurement configuration indicating: one or more first cells; and one or more validity conditions; and releasing the measurement configuration in response to a camp-on cell is not a validity cell updated (e.g., determined and/or selected) from the one or more first cells based on the one or more validity conditions.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the radio resource control (RRC) release message comprises an RRC connection release message (e.g. RRCRelease message).
  • the measurement configuration comprises an idle/inactive measurement configuration (e.g., idleMeasConfig, MeasIdleConfigDedicated).
  • idleMeasConfig MeasIdleConfigDedicated
  • the cell selection procedure comprises determining, as the camp-on cell, a cell in which the wireless device: receives MIB and/or SIB; or monitors a control channel.
  • the wireless device may select the cell based on one or more measurements that the wireless device performs while in RRC idle state or RRC inactive state.
  • the cell is referred to as a suitable cell or an acceptable cell.
  • the wireless device may perform, after receiving the RRC release message, a cell reselection procedure during the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
  • cell reselection procedure comprises identifying, as the camp-on cell, a cell in which the wireless device: receives MIB and/or SIB; or monitors a control channel.
  • the wireless device may perform cell reselection procedure is based on one or more measurements that the wireless device performs while in RRC idle state or RRC inactive state.
  • the measurement configuration comprises one or more parameters (e.g., carrierFreq EUTRA-r16 with a value of ARFCN-ValueEUTRA) indicating one or more E-UTRA carrier frequencies to be measured during RRC idle state or RRC inactive state.
  • the measurement configuration comprises one or more parameters (e.g., carrierFreq-r16 with a value of ARFCN-ValueNR) indicating one or more NR carrier frequencies to be measured during RRC idle state or RRC inactive state.
  • parameters e.g., carrierFreq-r16 with a value of ARFCN-ValueNR
  • the measurement configuration comprises a timer value, of a timer (e.g., measl d le Du ration-r 16), indicating a duration for performing measurements while in the RRC idle state or RRC inactive state.
  • a timer e.g., measl d le Du ration-r 16
  • the timer is T331.
  • the wireless device may, in response to receiving the timer value, start the timer based on the timer value.
  • each cell of the one or more first cells comprises a first cell.
  • the measurement configuration comprises a validity area list (e.g., ValidityAreal_ist-r16).
  • the validity area list comprises one or more validity areas.
  • the one or more validity area comprises a validity area (e.g., ValidityArea-r16), wherein the validity area is associated with a respective frequency.
  • a first validity area of the one or more validity areas indicates one or more cells (e.g., ValidityCellList-r16) in which the wireless device performs measurements at a first frequency respective to the first validity area while in RRC idle state and RRC inactive state.
  • each cell of the one or more first cells is associated with one of the one or more validity areas.
  • the validity area comprises physical cell identity of the first cell.
  • the validity area comprises a subcarrier spacing parameter (e.g., ssbSubcarrierSpacing-r16) indicating subcarrier spacing of SSB of the associated respective frequency of the validity area.
  • a subcarrier spacing parameter e.g., ssbSubcarrierSpacing-r16
  • the one or more cells comprise a physical cell identity range (e.g., PCI-Range) indicating a single or a range of physical cell identities.
  • a physical cell identity range e.g., PCI-Range
  • the one or more validity conditions comprise one or more validity time conditions.
  • the one or more validity time conditions comprise a validity time condition.
  • the validity time condition comprises at least one of: a start time threshold; and an end time threshold.
  • the wireless device may determine: the validity time condition being satisfied in response to the time measured at UE being later than the start time threshold.
  • the time validity condition comprises the start time threshold and does not comprise the end time threshold; the validity time condition being satisfied in response to the time measured at UE being earlier than the end time threshold.
  • the time validity condition comprises the end time threshold and does not comprise the start time threshold; or the validity time condition being satisfied in response to the time measured at UE being later than the start time threshold and being earlier than the end time threshold.
  • the time validity condition comprises the start time threshold and the end time threshold.
  • the one or more validity conditions comprise one or more validity location conditions.
  • the one or more validity location conditions comprise a validity location condition.
  • the validity location condition comprises at least one of: a reference location; a distance threshold; and a geographical area.
  • the geographical area comprises a polygonal area that comprises one or more: orthogonal coordinates; and polar coordinates.
  • the wireless device may determine: that the validity location condition being satisfied in response to the distance between the wireless device and the reference location being lower than the distance threshold; determining of the validity location condition being satisfied in response to the distance between the camp-on cell and the reference location being lower than the distance threshold; or determining of the validity location condition being satisfied in response to the UE location being inside or within the geographical area.
  • the first cell is associated with one or more validity time conditions.
  • the first cell is associated with one or more validity location conditions.
  • the wireless device may determine the first cell being validity cell in response to: at least one of validity time condition associated with the first cell being satisfied; or at least one of validity location condition associated with the first cell being satisfied.
  • a first validity time condition of the one or more validity time conditions is associated one or more second cells, wherein the one or more first cells comprises each cell of the one or more second cells.
  • the wireless device may determine that the one or more second cells are validity cells in response to the first validity time condition being satisfied.
  • a first validity location condition of the one or more validity location conditions is associated one or more third cells.
  • the one or more first cells comprises each cell of the one or more third cells.
  • the wireless device may determine that the one or more third cells are validity cells in response to the first validity time condition being satisfied.
  • the wireless device may determine each cell of the one or more first cells being validity cell in response to: receiving RRC release message comprising the measurement configuration; or in response to performing the cell selection.
  • the wireless device may validate the measurement configuration in response to determining each cell of the one or more first cells being validity cell.
  • validating the measurement configuration comprises releasing the measurement configuration in response to the validity cell not comprising the serving cell.
  • validating the measurement configuration comprises releasing the measurement configuration in response to the validity cell not comprising the camp-on cell.
  • the wireless device transitions: to the RRC inactive state, wherein the RRC release message comprises a suspend configuration (e.g. suspendConfig); or to the RRC idle state, wherein the RRC release message does not comprise the suspend configuration.
  • the wireless device in response to receiving the measurement configuration, stores the one or more E-UTRA carriers to be measured and one or more NR carriers to be measured.
  • the wireless device may, in response to receiving the measurement configuration, store the one or more E-UTRA carriers to be measured and one or more NR carriers to be measured being broadcast (e.g., SIB11).
  • the RRC release message comprises the measurement configuration comprising neither the one or more E-UTRA carriers to be measured nor one or more NR carriers to be measured.
  • the wireless device may store the one or more E-UTRA carriers and the one or more NR carriers to be measured being broadcast in response to: selecting a cell when entering RRC idle state or RRC inactive state from RRC connected state or RRC inactive state; or receiving update of system information (e.g., SIB4, or SIB11).
  • SIB4 system information
  • the storing the one or more E-UTRA carriers to be measured being broadcast comprises: storing or replacing the one or more E-UTRA carriers to be measured from the system information, wherein the system information comprises one or more E-UTRA carriers to be measured; and removing the one or more E-UTRA carriers to be measured from the system information, wherein the system information does not comprise one or more E-UTRA carriers to be measured and the wireless device does not have stored one or more E-UTRA carriers to be measured.
  • the storing the one or more NR carriers to be measured being broadcast comprises: storing or replacing the one or more NR carriers to be measured from the system information, wherein the system information comprises one or more NR carriers to be measured; and removing the one or more NR carriers to be measured from the system information, wherein the system information does not comprise one or more NR carriers to be measured and the wireless device does not have stored one or more NR carriers to be measured.
  • the wireless device may perform measurements in a E-UTRA carrier.
  • the one or more E-UTRA carriers comprises the E-UTRA carrier; an E-UTRA broadcast indication (e.g., idleModeMeasurementsEUTRA) indicates to perform measurements on the E- UTRA carriers; and NE-DC between the serving carrier and the E-UTRA carrier is supported, by the wireless device.
  • E-UTRA broadcast indication e.g., idleModeMeasurementsEUTRA
  • the wireless device may consider: RSRQ as the sorting quantity, wherein a report quantity indication (e.g., reportQuantitiesEUTRA) indicates RSRQ; and RSRP as the sorting quantity, wherein the report quantity indication (e.g., reportQuantitiesEUTRA) does not indicate RSRQ.
  • a report quantity indication e.g., reportQuantitiesEUTRA
  • RSRP the sorting quantity, wherein the report quantity indication (e.g., reportQuantitiesEUTRA) does not indicate RSRQ.
  • the wireless device may store: the measurements of a list of E-UTRA cells of the E-UTRA carrier.
  • the measurement configuration comprises the list of E-UTRA cells of the E-UTRA carrier; or the measurements of up to a number (e.g., maxCellMeasIdle) of strongest identified cells, according to the sorting quantity.
  • the measurement configuration does not comprise the list of E-UTRA cells of the E-UTRA carrier.
  • the wireless device may perform measurements in a NR carrier.
  • the one or more NR carriers comprises the NR carrier; an NR broadcast indication (e.g., idleModeMeasurementsNR) indicates to perform measurements on the NR carriers; and carrier aggregation or NR-DC between the serving carrier and the NR carrier is supported, by the wireless device.
  • a NR broadcast indication e.g., idleModeMeasurementsNR
  • the wireless device may consider: RSRQ as the sorting quantity, wherein a report quantity indication (e.g., reportQuantities) indicates RSRQ; and RSRP as the sorting quantity, wherein the report quantity indication (e.g., reportQuantities) does not indicate RSRQ.
  • a report quantity indication e.g., reportQuantities
  • RSRP the sorting quantity
  • the wireless device may store: the measurements of a list of NR cells of the NR carrier (e.g, measCellListNR), wherein the measurement configuration comprises the list of NR cells of the NR carrier; or the measurements of up to a number (e.g., maxCell Measldle) of strongest identified cells, according to the sorting quantity, wherein the measurement configuration does not comprise the list of NR cells of the NR carrier.
  • a list of NR cells of the NR carrier e.g, measCellListNR
  • the measurement configuration comprises the list of NR cells of the NR carrier
  • the measurement configuration does not comprise the list of NR cells of the NR carrier.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A wireless device receives a measurement configuration indicating one or more validity conditions for determining cell validity. The wireless device releases the measurement configuration based on a cell, selected by the wireless device, not being valid.

Description

TITLE
Conditional Validity Area
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 63/422,766, filed November 04, 2022, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0002] Examples of several of the various embodiments of the present disclosure are described herein with reference to the drawings.
[0003] FIG. 1 A and FIG. 1 B illustrate example mobile communication networks in which embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented.
[0004] FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B respectively illustrate a New Radio (NR) user plane and control plane protocol stack.
[0005] FIG. 3 illustrates an example of services provided between protocol layers of the NR user plane protocol stack of FIG. 2A.
[0006] FIG. 4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack of FIG. 2A.
[0007] FIG. 4B illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU.
[0008] FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B respectively illustrate a mapping between logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels for the downlink and uplink.
[0009] FIG. 6 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of a UE.
[0010] FIG. 7 illustrates an example configuration of an NR frame into which OFDM symbols are grouped.
[0011] FIG. 8 illustrates an example configuration of a slot in the time and frequency domain for an NR carrier.
[0012] FIG. 9 illustrates an example of bandwidth adaptation using three configured BWPs for an NR carrier.
[0013] FIG. 10A illustrates three carrier aggregation configurations with two component carriers.
[0014] FIG. 10B illustrates an example of how aggregated cells may be configured into one or more PUCCH groups.
[0015] FIG. 11A illustrates an example of an SS/PBCH block structure and location.
[0016] FIG. 11B illustrates an example of CSI-RSs that are mapped in the time and frequency domains.
[0017] FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B respectively illustrate examples of three downlink and uplink beam management procedures.
[0018] FIG. 13A, FIG. 13B, and FIG. 13C respectively illustrate a four-step contention-based random access procedure, a two-step contention-free random access procedure, and another two-step random access procedure. [0019] FIG. 14A illustrates an example of CORESET configurations for a bandwidth part.
[0020] FIG. 14B illustrates an example of a COE-to-REG mapping for DOI transmission on a CORESET and PDCCH processing.
[0021] FIG. 15 illustrates an example of a wireless device in communication with a base station.
[0022] FIG. 16A, FIG. 16B, FIG. 160, and FIG. 16D illustrate example structures for uplink and downlink transmission. [0023] FIG. 17 A and FIG. 17B illustrate an example of NTN architectures.
[0024] FIG. 18 illustrates examples of deployments of various platform types.
[0025] FIG. 19 illustrates examples of propagation delay corresponding to satellite types of different altitudes and different elevation angle (degrees).
[0026] FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B illustrate examples of service link with maximum propagation delay of the cell/beam. [0027] FIG. 21A and FIG. 21 B illustrate examples of received signal strength when UE is in terrestrial network and NTN.
[0028] FIG. 22 illustrates an example of an NTN.
[0029] FIG. 23 illustrates an example of idle/inactive measurement information report.
[0030] FIG. 24 illustrates an example of idle/inactive measurement information report.
[0031] FIG. 25 illustrates an example of idle/inactive measurement information report.
[0032] FIG. 26 illustrates an example scenario that one or more cells are updated (e.g., selected and/or determined) after or in response to performing feeder link switch.
[0033] FIG. 27 illustrates an example scenario that one or more cells are updated (e.g., selected and/or determined) after or in response to performing feeder link switch.
[0034] FIG. 28 illustrates an example of updating (e.g., selecting and/or determining) validity cells that are associated with validity time condition or validity location condition.
[0035] FIG. 29 illustrates an example of updating (e.g., selecting and/or determining) validity cells that are associated with validity time condition.
[0036] FIG. 30 illustrates an example of updating (e.g., selecting and/or determining) validity cells that are associated with validity time condition.
[0037] FIG. 31 illustrates an example of updating (e.g., selecting and/or determining) validity cells that are associated with validity time condition.
[0038] FIG. 32 illustrates an example flow diagram of validity cell determination in the disclosure.
[0039] FIG. 33 illustrates an example flow diagram of validity cell determination in the disclosure.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0040] In the present disclosure, various embodiments are presented as examples of how the disclosed techniques may be implemented and/or how the disclosed techniques may be practiced in environments and scenarios. It will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art that various changes in form and detail can be made therein without departing from the scope. In fact, after reading the description, it will be apparent to one skilled in the relevant art how to implement alternative embodiments. The present embodiments should not be limited by any of the described exemplary embodiments. The embodiments of the present disclosure will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. Limitations, features, and/or elements from the disclosed example embodiments may be combined to create further embodiments within the scope of the disclosure. Any figures which highlight the functionality and advantages, are presented for example purposes only. The disclosed architecture is sufficiently flexible and configurable, such that it may be utilized in ways other than that shown. For example, the actions listed in any flowchart may be re-ordered or only optionally used in some embodiments.
[0041] Embodiments may be configured to operate as needed. The disclosed mechanism may be performed when certain criteria are met, for example, in a wireless device, a base station, a radio environment, a network, a combination of the above, and/or the like. Example criteria may be based, at least in part, on for example, wireless device or network node configurations, traffic load, initial system set up, packet sizes, traffic characteristics, a combination of the above, and/or the like. When the one or more criteria are met, various example embodiments may be applied. Therefore, it may be possible to implement example embodiments that selectively implement disclosed protocols. [0042] A base station may communicate with a mix of wireless devices. Wireless devices and/or base stations may support multiple technologies, and/or multiple releases of the same technology. Wireless devices may have some specific capability(ies) depending on wireless device category and/or capability(ies). When this disclosure refers to a base station communicating with a plurality of wireless devices, this disclosure may refer to a subset of the total wireless devices in a coverage area. This disclosure may refer to, for example, a plurality of wireless devices of a given LTE or 5G release with a given capability and in a given sector of the base station. The plurality of wireless devices in this disclosure may refer to a selected plurality of wireless devices, and/or a subset of total wireless devices in a coverage area which perform according to disclosed methods, and/or the like. There may be a plurality of base stations or a plurality of wireless devices in a coverage area that may not comply with the disclosed methods, for example, those wireless devices or base stations may perform based on older releases of LTE or 5G technology.
[0043] In this disclosure, “a” and “an” and similar phrases are to be interpreted as “at least one” and “one or more.” Similarly, any term that ends with the suffix “(s)” is to be interpreted as “at least one” and “one or more.” In this disclosure, the term “may” is to be interpreted as “may, for example.” In other words, the term “may” is indicative that the phrase following the term “may” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed by one or more of the various embodiments. The terms “comprises” and “consists of”, as used herein, enumerate one or more components of the element being described. The term “comprises” is interchangeable with “includes” and does not exclude unenumerated components from being included in the element being described. By contrast, “consists of” provides a complete enumeration of the one or more components of the element being described. The term “based on”, as used herein, should be interpreted as “based at least in part on” rather than, for example, “based solely on”. The term “and/or” as used herein represents any possible combination of enumerated elements. For example, “A, B, and/or C” may represent A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; or A, B, and C.
[0044] If A and B are sets and every element of A is an element of B, A is called a subset of B. In this specification, only non-empty sets and subsets are considered. For example, possible subsets of B = {celH , cell2} are: {celH }, {cell2}, and {celH , cell2}. The phrase “based on” (or equally “based at least on”) is indicative that the phrase following the term “based on” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments. The phrase “in response to” (or equally “in response at least to”) is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “in response to” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments. The phrase “depending on” (or equally “depending at least to”) is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “depending on” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments. The phrase “employin g/using” (or equally “employing/using at least”) is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “employin g/using” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.
[0045] The term configured may relate to the capacity of a device whether the device is in an operational or non- operational state. Configured may refer to specific settings in a device that effect the operational characteristics of the device whether the device is in an operational or non-operational state. In other words, the hardware, software, firmware, registers, memory values, and/or the like may be “configured” within a device, whether the device is in an operational or nonoperational state, to provide the device with specific characteristics. Terms such as “a control message to cause in a device” may mean that a control message has parameters that may be used to configure specific characteristics or may be used to implement certain actions in the device, whether the device is in an operational or non-operational state.
[0046] In this disclosure, parameters (or equally called, fields, or Information elements: lEs) may comprise one or more information objects, and an information object may comprise one or more other objects. For example, if parameter (IE) N comprises parameter (IE) M, and parameter (IE) M comprises parameter (IE) K, and parameter (IE) K comprises parameter (information element) J. Then, for example, N comprises K, and N comprises J. In an example embodiment, when one or more messages comprise a plurality of parameters, it implies that a parameter in the plurality of parameters is in at least one of the one or more messages, but does not have to be in each of the one or more messages.
[0047] Many features presented are described as being optional through the use of “may” or the use of parentheses. For the sake of brevity and legibility, the present disclosure does not explicitly recite each and every permutation that may be obtained by choosing from the set of optional features. The present disclosure is to be interpreted as explicitly disclosing all such permutations. For example, a system described as having three optional features may be embodied in seven ways, namely with just one of the three possible features, with any two of the three possible features or with three of the three possible features.
[0048] Many of the elements described in the disclosed embodiments may be implemented as modules. A module is defined here as an element that performs a defined function and has a defined interface to other elements. The modules described in this disclosure may be implemented in hardware, software in combination with hardware, firmware, wetware (e.g. hardware with a biological element) or a combination thereof, which may be behaviorally equivalent. For example, modules may be implemented as a software routine written in a computer language configured to be executed by a hardware machine (such as C, C++, Fortran, Java, Basic, MATLAB or the like) or a modeling/simulation program such as Simulink, Stateflow, GNU Octave, or LabVI EWMathScript. It may be possible to implement modules using physical hardware that incorporates discrete or programmable analog, digital and/or quantum hardware. Examples of programmable hardware comprise: computers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, applicationspecific integrated circuits (ASICs); field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs); and complex programmable logic devices (CPLDs). Computers, microcontrollers and microprocessors are programmed using languages such as assembly, C, C++ or the like. FPGAs, ASICs and CPLDs are often programmed using hardware description languages (HDL) such as VHSIC hardware description language (VHDL) or Verilog that configure connections between internal hardware modules with lesser functionality on a programmable device. The mentioned technologies are often used in combination to achieve the result of a functional module.
[0049] FIG. 1A illustrates an example of a mobile communication network 100 in which embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented. The mobile communication network 100 may be, for example, a public land mobile network (PLMN) run by a network operator. As illustrated in FIG. 1A, the mobile communication network 100 includes a core network (CN) 102, a radio access network (RAN) 104, and a wireless device 106.
[0050] The CN 102 may provide the wireless device 106 with an interface to one or more data networks (DNs), such as public DNs (e.g., the Internet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs. As part of the interface functionality, the CN 102 may set up end-to-end connections between the wireless device 106 and the one or more DNs, authenticate the wireless device 106, and provide charging functionality.
[0051] The RAN 104 may connect the CN 102 to the wireless device 106 through radio communications over an air interface. As part of the radio communications, the RAN 104 may provide scheduling, radio resource management, and retransmission protocols. The communication direction from the RAN 104 to the wireless device 106 over the air interface is known as the downlink and the communication direction from the wireless device 106 to the RAN 104 over the air interface is known as the uplink. Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplink transmissions using frequency division duplexing (FDD), time-division duplexing (TDD), and/or some combination of the two duplexing techniques.
[0052] The term wireless device may be used throughout this disclosure to refer to and encompass any mobile device or fixed (non-mobile) device for which wireless communication is needed or usable. For example, a wireless device may be a telephone, smart phone, tablet, computer, laptop, sensor, meter, wearable device, Internet of Things (loT) device, vehicle road side unit (RSU), relay node, automobile, and/or any combination thereof. The term wireless device encompasses other terminology, including user equipment (UE), user terminal (UT), access terminal (AT), mobile station, handset, wireless transmit and receive unit (WTRU), and/or wireless communication device.
[0053] The RAN 104 may include one or more base stations (not shown). The term base station may be used throughout this disclosure to refer to and encompass a Node B (associated with UMTS and/or 3G standards), an Evolved Node B (eNB, associated with E-UTRA and/or 4G standards), a remote radio head (RRH), a baseband processing unit coupled to one or more RRHs, a repeater node or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a donor node, a Next Generation Evolved Node B (ng-eNB), a Generation Node B (gNB, associated with NR and/or 5G standards), an access point (AP, associated with, for example, WiFi or any other suitable wireless communication standard), and/or any combination thereof. A base station may comprise at least one g N B Central Unit (gNB-CU) and at least one a g N B Distributed Unit (gNB-DU).
[0054] A base station included in the RAN 104 may include one or more sets of antennas for communicating with the wireless device 106 over the air interface. For example, one or more of the base stations may include three sets of antennas to respectively control three cells (or sectors). The size of a cell may be determined by a range at which a receiver (e.g., a base station receiver) can successfully receive the transmissions from a transmitter (e.g., a wireless device transmitter) operating in the cell. Together, the cells of the base stations may provide radio coverage to the wireless device 106 over a wide geographic area to support wireless device mobility.
[0055] In addition to three-sector sites, other implementations of base stations are possible. For example, one or more of the base stations in the RAN 104 may be implemented as a sectored site with more or less than three sectors. One or more of the base stations in the RAN 104 may be implemented as an access point, as a baseband processing unit coupled to several remote radio heads (RRHs), and/or as a repeater or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a donor node. A baseband processing unit coupled to RRHs may be part of a centralized or cloud RAN architecture, where the baseband processing unit may be either centralized in a pool of baseband processing units or virtualized. A repeater node may amplify and rebroadcast a radio signal received from a donor node. A relay node may perform the same/similar functions as a repeater node but may decode the radio signal received from the donor node to remove noise before amplifying and rebroadcasting the radio signal.
[0056] The RAN 104 may be deployed as a homogenous network of macrocell base stations that have similar antenna patterns and similar high-level transmit powers. The RAN 104 may be deployed as a heterogeneous network. In heterogeneous networks, small cell base stations may be used to provide small coverage areas, for example, coverage areas that overlap with the comparatively larger coverage areas provided by macrocell base stations. The small coverage areas may be provided in areas with high data traffic (or so-called “hotspots”) or in areas with weak macrocell coverage. Examples of small cell base stations include, in order of decreasing coverage area, microcell base stations, picocell base stations, and femtocell base stations or home base stations.
[0057] The Third-Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) was formed in 1998 to provide global standardization of specifications for mobile communication networks similar to the mobile communication network 100 in FIG. 1A. To date, 3GPP has produced specifications for three generations of mobile networks: a third generation (3G) network known as Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), a fourth generation (4G) network known as Long-Term Evolution (LTE), and a fifth generation (5G) network known as 5G System (5GS). Embodiments of the present disclosure are described with reference to the RAN of a 3GPP 5G network, referred to as next-generation RAN (NG- RAN). Embodiments may be applicable to RANs of other mobile communication networks, such as the RAN 104 in FIG. 1 A, the RANs of earlier 3G and 4G networks, and those of future networks yet to be specified (e.g., a 3GPP 6G network). NG-RAN implements 5G radio access technology known as New Radio (NR) and may be provisioned to implement 4G radio access technology or other radio access technologies, including non-3GPP radio access technologies. [0058] FIG. 1 B illustrates another example mobile communication network 150 in which embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented. Mobile communication network 150 may be, for example, a PLMN run by a network operator. As illustrated in FIG. 1B, mobile communication network 150 includes a 5G core network (5G-CN) 152, an NG-RAN 154, and UEs 156A and 156B (collectively UEs 156). These components may be implemented and operate in the same or similar manner as corresponding components described with respect to FIG. 1A.
[0059] The 5G-CN 152 provides the UEs 156 with an interface to one or more DNs, such as public DNs (e.g., the Internet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs. As part of the interface functionality, the 5G-CN 152 may set up end- to-end connections between the UEs 156 and the one or more DNs, authenticate the UEs 156, and provide charging functionality. Compared to the ON of a 3GPP 4G network, the basis of the 5G-CN 152 may be a service-based architecture. This means that the architecture of the nodes making up the 5G-CN 152 may be defined as network functions that offer services via interfaces to other network functions. The network functions of the 5G-CN 152 may be implemented in several ways, including as network elements on dedicated or shared hardware, as software instances running on dedicated or shared hardware, or as virtualized functions instantiated on a platform (e.g., a cloud-based platform).
[0060] As illustrated in FIG. 1B, the 5G-CN 152 includes an Access and Mobility Management Function (AMF) 158A and a User Plane Function (UPF) 158B, which are shown as one component AMF/UPF 158 in FIG. 1 B for ease of illustration. The UPF 158B may serve as a gateway between the NG-RAN 154 and the one or more DNs. The UPF 158B may perform functions such as packet routing and forwarding, packet inspection and user plane policy rule enforcement, traffic usage reporting, uplink classification to support routing of traffic flows to the one or more DNs, quality of service (QoS) handling for the user plane (e.g., packet filtering, gating, uplink/downlink rate enforcement, and uplink traffic verification), downlink packet buffering, and downlink data notification triggering. The UPF 158B may serve as an anchor point for intra-/inter-Radio Access Technology (RAT) mobility, an external protocol (or packet) data unit (PDU) session point of interconnect to the one or more DNs, and/or a branching point to support a multi-homed PDU session. The UEs 156 may be configured to receive services through a PDU session, which is a logical connection between a UE and a DN.
[0061] The AMF 158A may perform functions such as Non-Access Stratum (NAS) signaling termination, NAS signaling security, Access Stratum (AS) security control, inter-CN node signaling for mobility between 3GPP access networks, idle mode UE reachability (e.g., control and execution of paging retransmission), registration area management, intra-system and inter-system mobility support, access authentication, access authorization including checking of roaming rights, mobility management control (subscription and policies), network slicing support, and/or session management function (SMF) selection. NAS may refer to the functionality operating between a CN and a UE, and AS may refer to the functionality operating between the UE and a RAN.
[0062] The 5G-CN 152 may include one or more additional network functions that are not shown in FIG. 1B for the sake of clarity. For example, the 5G-CN 152 may include one or more of a Session Management Function (SMF), an NR Repository Function (NRF), a Policy Control Function (PCF), a Network Exposure Function (NEF), a Unified Data Management (UDM), an Application Function (AF), and/or an Authentication Server Function (AUSF).
[0063] The NG-RAN 154 may connect the 5G-CN 152 to the UEs 156 through radio communications over the air interface. The NG-RAN 154 may include one or more gNBs, illustrated as gNB 160A and gNB 160B (collectively gNBs 160) and/or one or more ng-eNBs, illustrated as ng-eNB 162A and ng-eNB 162B (collectively ng-eNBs 162). The gNBs 160 and ng-eNBs 162 may be more generically referred to as base stations. The gNBs 160 and ng-eNBs 162 may include one or more sets of antennas for communicating with the UEs 156 over an air interface. For example, one or more of the gNBs 160 and/or one or more of the ng-eNBs 162 may include three sets of antennas to respectively control three cells (or sectors). Together, the cells of the gNBs 160 and the ng-eNBs 162 may provide radio coverage to the UEs 156 over a wide geographic area to support UE mobility.
[0064] As shown in FIG. 1 B, the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to the 5G-CN 152 by means of an NG interface and to other base stations by an Xn interface. The NG and Xn interfaces may be established using direct physical connections and/or indirect connections over an underlying transport network, such as an internet protocol (IP) transport network. The gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to the UEs 156 by means of a Uu interface. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 1B, gNB 160A may be connected to the UE 156A by means of a Uu interface. The NG, Xn, and Uu interfaces are associated with a protocol stack. The protocol stacks associated with the interfaces may be used by the network elements in FIG. 1 B to exchange data and signaling messages and may include two planes: a user plane and a control plane. The user plane may handle data of interest to a user. The control plane may handle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.
[0065] The gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to one or more AMF/UPF functions of the 5G-CN 152, such as the AMF/UPF 158, by means of one or more NG interfaces. For example, the gNB 160A may be connected to the UPF 158B of the AMF/UPF 158 by means of an NG-User plane (NG-U) interface. The NG-U interface may provide delivery (e.g., non-guaranteed delivery) of user plane PDUs between the gNB 160A and the UPF 158B. The gNB 160A may be connected to the AMF 158A by means of an NG-Control plane (NG-C) interface. The NG-C interface may provide, for example, NG interface management, UE context management, UE mobility management, transport of NAS messages, paging, PDU session management, and configuration transfer and/or warning message transmission.
[0066] The gNBs 160 may provide NR user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UEs 156 over the Uu interface. For example, the gNB 160A may provide NR user plane and control plane protocol terminations toward the UE 156A over a Uu interface associated with a first protocol stack. The ng-eNBs 162 may provide Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UEs 156 over a Uu interface, where E-UTRA refers to the 3GPP 4G radio-access technology. For example, the ng-eNB 162B may provide E-UTRA user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UE 156B over a Uu interface associated with a second protocol stack. [0067] The 5G-CN 152 was described as being configured to handle NR and 4G radio accesses. It will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art that it may be possible for NR to connect to a 4G core network in a mode known as “non-standalone operation.” In non-standalone operation, a 4G core network is used to provide (or at least support) control-plane functionality (e.g., initial access, mobility, and paging). Although only oneAMF/UPF 158 is shown in FIG. 1 B, one g N B or ng-eNB may be connected to multiple AMF/UPF nodes to provide redundancy and/or to load share across the multiple AMF/UPF nodes.
[0068] As discussed, an interface (e.g., Uu, Xn, and NG interfaces) between the network elements in FIG. 1 B may be associated with a protocol stack that the network elements use to exchange data and signaling messages. A protocol stack may include two planes: a user plane and a control plane. The user plane may handle data of interest to a user, and the control plane may handle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.
[0069] FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B respectively illustrate examples of NR user plane and NR control plane protocol stacks for the Uu interface that lies between a UE 210 and a gNB 220. The protocol stacks illustrated in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B may be the same or similar to those used for the Uu interface between, for example, the UE 156A and the gNB 160A shown in FIG. 1B.
[0070] FIG. 2A illustrates a NR user plane protocol stack comprising five layers implemented in the UE 210 and the gNB 220. At the bottom of the protocol stack, physical layers (PHYs) 211 and 221 may provide transport services to the higher layers of the protocol stack and may correspond to layer 1 of the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model. The next four protocols above PHYs 211 and 221 comprise media access control layers (MAGs) 212 and 222, radio link control layers (RLCs) 213 and 223, packet data convergence protocol layers (PDOPs) 214 and 224, and service data application protocol layers (SDAPs) 215 and 225. Together, these four protocols may make up layer 2, or the data link layer, of the OSI model.
[0071] FIG. 3 illustrates an example of services provided between protocol layers of the NR user plane protocol stack. Starting from the top of FIG. 2A and FIG. 3, the SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform QoS flow handling. The UE 210 may receive services through a PDU session, which may be a logical connection between the UE 210 and a DN. The PDU session may have one or more QoS flows. A UPF of a CN (e.g., the UPF 158B) may map IP packets to the one or more QoS flows of the PDU session based on QoS requirements (e.g., in terms of delay, data rate, and/or error rate). The SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform mapping/de-mapping between the one or more QoS flows and one or more data radio bearers. The mapping/de-mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers may be determined by the SDAP 225 at the gNB 220. The SDAP 215 at the UE 210 may be informed of the mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers through reflective mapping or control signaling received from the gNB 220. For reflective mapping, the SDAP 225 at the gNB 220 may mark the downlink packets with a QoS flow indicator (QFI), which may be observed by the SDAP 215 at the UE 210 to determine the mapping/de-mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers.
[0072] The PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform header compression/decompression to reduce the amount of data that needs to be transmitted over the air interface, ciphering/deciphering to prevent unauthorized decoding of data transmitted over the air interface, and integrity protection (to ensure control messages originate from intended sources. The PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform retransmissions of undelivered packets, in-sequence delivery and reordering of packets, and removal of packets received in duplicate due to, for example, an intra-gNB handover. The PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform packet duplication to improve the likelihood of the packet being received and, at the receiver, remove any duplicate packets. Packet duplication may be useful for services that require high reliability.
[0073] Although not shown in FIG. 3, PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform mapping/de-mapping between a split radio bearer and RLC channels in a dual connectivity scenario. Dual connectivity is a technique that allows a UE to connect to two cells or, more generally, two cell groups: a master cell group (MCG) and a secondary cell group (SCG). A split bearer is when a single radio bearer, such as one of the radio bearers provided by the PDCPs 214 and 224 as a service to the SDAPs 215 and 225, is handled by cell groups in dual connectivity. The PDCPs 214 and 224 may map/de-map the split radio bearer between RLC channels belonging to cell groups.
[0074] The RLCs 213 and 223 may perform segmentation, retransmission through Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ), and removal of duplicate data units received from MACs 212 and 222, respectively. The RLCs 213 and 223 may support three transmission modes: transparent mode (TM); unacknowledged mode (UM); and acknowledged mode (AM). Based on the transmission mode an RLC is operating, the RLC may perform one or more of the noted functions. The RLC configuration may be per logical channel with no dependency on numerologies and/or Transmission Time Interval (TTI) durations. As shown in FIG. 3, the RLCs 213 and 223 may provide RLC channels as a service to PDCPs 214 and 224, respectively.
[0075] The MACs 212 and 222 may perform multiplexing/demultiplexing of logical channels and/or mapping between logical channels and transport channels. The multiplexing/demultiplexing may include multiplexing/demultiplexing of data units, belonging to the one or more logical channels, into/from Transport Blocks (TBs) delivered to/from the PHYs
211 and 221. The MAC 222 may be configured to perform scheduling, scheduling information reporting, and priority handling between UEs by means of dynamic scheduling. Scheduling may be performed in the g N B 220 (at the MAC 222) for downlink and uplink. The MACs 212 and 222 may be configured to perform error correction through Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) (e.g., one HARQ entity per carrier in case of Carrier Aggregation (CA)), priority handling between logical channels of the UE 210 by means of logical channel prioritization, and/or padding. The MACs
212 and 222 may support one or more numerologies and/or transmission timings. In an example, mapping restrictions in a logical channel prioritization may control which numerology and/or transmission timing a logical channel may use. As shown in FIG. 3, the MACs 212 and 222 may provide logical channels as a service to the RLCs 213 and 223.
[0076] The PHYs 211 and 221 may perform mapping of transport channels to physical channels and digital and analog signal processing functions for sending and receiving information over the air interface. These digital and analog signal processing functions may include, for example, coding/decoding and modulation/demodulation. The PHYs 211 and 221 may perform multi-antenna mapping. As shown in FIG. 3, the PHYs 211 and 221 may provide one or more transport channels as a service to the MACs 212 and 222. [0077] FIG. 4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack. FIG. 4A illustrates a downlink data flow of three IP packets (n, n+1, and m) through the NR user plane protocol stack to generate two TBs at the gNB 220. An uplink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack may be similar to the downlink data flow depicted in FIG. 4A.
[0078] The downlink data flow of FIG. 4A begins when SDAP 225 receives the three IP packets from one or more QoS flows and maps the three packets to radio bearers. In FIG. 4A, the SDAP 225 maps IP packets n and n+1 to a first radio bearer 402 and maps IP packet m to a second radio bearer 404. An SDAP header (labeled with an “H” in FIG. 4A) is added to an IP packet. The data unit from/to a higher protocol layer is referred to as a service data unit (SDU) of the lower protocol layer and the data unit to/from a lower protocol layer is referred to as a protocol data unit (PDU) of the higher protocol layer. As shown in FIG. 4A, the data unit from the SDAP 225 is an SDU of lower protocol layer PDCP 224 and is a PDU of the SDAP 225.
[0079] The remaining protocol layers in FIG. 4A may perform their associated functionality (e.g. , with respect to FIG. 3), add corresponding headers, and forward their respective outputs to the next lower layer. For example, the PDCP 224 may perform IP-header compression and ciphering and forward its output to the RLC 223. The RLC 223 may optionally perform segmentation (e.g., as shown for IP packet m in FIG. 4A) and forward its output to the MAC 222. The MAC 222 may multiplex a number of RLC PDUs and may attach a MAC subheader to an RLC PDU to form a transport block. In NR, the MAC subheaders may be distributed across the MAC PDU, as illustrated in FIG. 4A. In LTE, the MAC subheaders may be entirely located at the beginning of the MAC PDU. The NR MAC PDU structure may reduce processing time and associated latency because the MAC PDU subheaders may be computed before the full MAC PDU is assembled.
[0080] FIG. 4B illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU. The MAC subheader includes: an SDU length field for indicating the length (e.g., in bytes) of the MAC SDU to which the MAC subheader corresponds; a logical channel identifier (LCID) field for identifying the logical channel from which the MAC SDU originated to aid in the demultiplexing process; a flag (F) for indicating the size of the SDU length field; and a reserved bit (R) field for future use.
[0081] FIG. 4B further illustrates MAC control elements (CEs) inserted into the MAC PDU by a MAC, such as MAC 223 or MAC 222. For example, FIG. 4B illustrates two MAC CEs inserted into the MAC PDU. MAC CEs may be inserted at the beginning of a MAC PDU for downlink transmissions (as shown in FIG. 4B) and at the end of a MAC PDU for uplink transmissions. MAC CEs may be used for in-band control signaling. Example MAC CEs include: scheduling-related MAC CEs, such as buffer status reports and power headroom reports; activation/deactivation MAC CEs, such as those for activation/deactivation of PDCP duplication detection, channel state information (CSI) reporting, sounding reference signal (SRS) transmission, and prior configured components; discontinuous reception (DRX) related MAC CEs; timing advance MAC CEs; and random access related MAC CEs. A MAC CE may be preceded by a MAC subheader with a similar format as described for MAC SDUs and may be identified with a reserved value in the LCID field that indicates the type of control information included in the MAC CE. [0082] Before describing the NR control plane protocol stack, logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels are first described as well as a mapping between the channel types. One or more of the channels may be used to carry out functions associated with the NR control plane protocol stack described later below.
[0083] FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B illustrate, for downlink and uplink respectively, a mapping between logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels. Information is passed through channels between the RLC, the MAC, and the PHY of the NR protocol stack. A logical channel may be used between the RLC and the MAC and may be classified as a control channel that carries control and configuration information in the NR control plane or as a traffic channel that carries data in the NR user plane. A logical channel may be classified as a dedicated logical channel that is dedicated to a specific UE or as a common logical channel that may be used by more than one UE. A logical channel may also be defined by the type of information it carries. The set of logical channels defined by NR include, for example:
-- a paging control channel (PCCH) for carrying paging messages used to page a UE whose location is not known to the network on a cell level;
-- a broadcast control channel (BCCH) for carrying system information messages in the form of a master information block (MIB) and several system information blocks (SIBs), wherein the system information messages may be used by the UEs to obtain information about how a cell is configured and how to operate within the cell;
-- a common control channel (CCCH) for carrying control messages together with random access;
-- a dedicated control channel (DCCH) for carrying control messages to/from a specific the UE to configure the UE; and -- a dedicated traffic channel (DTCH) for carrying user data to/from a specific the UE.
[0084] T ransport channels are used between the MAC and PHY layers and may be defined by how the information they carry is transmitted over the air interface. The set of transport channels defined by NR include, for example: -- a paging channel (PCH) for carrying paging messages that originated from the PCCH;
-- a broadcast channel (BCH) for carrying the MIB from the BCCH;
-- a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) for carrying downlink data and signaling messages, including the SIBs from the BCCH;
-- an uplink shared channel (UL-SCH) for carrying uplink data and signaling messages; and
-- a random access channel (RACH) for allowing a UE to contact the network without any prior scheduling.
[0085] The PHY may use physical channels to pass information between processing levels of the PHY. A physical channel may have an associated set of time-frequency resources for carrying the information of one or more transport channels. The PHY may generate control information to support the low-level operation of the PHY and provide the control information to the lower levels of the PHY via physical control channels, known as L1/L2 control channels. The set of physical channels and physical control channels defined by NR include, for example:
-- a physical broadcast channel (PBCH) for carrying the MIB from the BCH;
-- a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) for carrying downlink data and signaling messages from the DL-SCH, as well as paging messages from the PCH; -- a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) for carrying downlink control information (DOI), which may include downlink scheduling commands, uplink scheduling grants, and uplink power control commands;
-- a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) for carrying uplink data and signaling messages from the UL-SCH and in some instances uplink control information (UCI) as described below;
-- a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) for carrying UCI, which may include HARQ acknowledgments, channel quality indicators (CQI), pre-coding matrix indicators (PMI), rank indicators (Rl), and scheduling requests (SR); and -- a physical random access channel (PRACH) for random access.
[0086] Similar to the physical control channels, the physical layer generates physical signals to support the low-level operation of the physical layer. As shown in FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B, the physical layer signals defined by NR include: primary synchronization signals (PSS), secondary synchronization signals (SSS), channel state information reference signals (CSI-RS), demodulation reference signals (DMRS), sounding reference signals (SRS), and phase-tracking reference signals (PT-RS). These physical layer signals will be described in greater detail below.
[0087] FIG. 2B illustrates an example NR control plane protocol stack. As shown in FIG. 2B, the NR control plane protocol stack may use the same/similar first four protocol layers as the example NR user plane protocol stack. These four protocol layers include the PHYs 211 and 221 , the MAGs 212 and 222, the RLCs 213 and 223, and the PDCPs 214 and 224. Instead of having the SDAPs 215 and 225 at the top of the stack as in the NR user plane protocol stack, the NR control plane stack has radio resource controls (RRCs) 216 and 226 and NAS protocols 217 and 237 at the top of the NR control plane protocol stack.
[0088] The NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 (e.g., the AMF 158A) or, more generally, between the UE 210 and the CN. The NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 via signaling messages, referred to as NAS messages. There is no direct path between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 through which the NAS messages can be transported. The NAS messages may be transported using the AS of the Uu and NG interfaces. NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality such as authentication, security, connection setup, mobility management, and session management.
[0089] The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the gNB 220 or, more generally, between the UE 210 and the RAN. The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the gNB 220 via signaling messages, referred to as RRC messages. RRC messages may be transmitted between the UE 210 and the RAN using signaling radio bearers and the same/similar PDCP, RLC, MAC, and PHY protocol layers. The MAC may multiplex control-plane and user-plane data into the same transport block (TB). The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality such as: broadcast of system information related to AS and NAS; paging initiated by the CN or the RAN; establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection between the UE 210 and the RAN; security functions including key management; establishment, configuration, maintenance and release of signaling radio bearers and data radio bearers; mobility functions; QoS management functions; the UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting; detection of and recovery from radio link failure (RLF); and/or NAS message transfer. As part of establishing an RRC connection, RRCs 216 and 226 may establish an RRC context, which may involve configuring parameters for communication between the UE 210 and the RAN.
[0090] FIG. 6 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of a UE. The UE may be the same or similar to the wireless device 106 depicted in FIG. 1A, the UE 210 depicted in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any other wireless device described in the present disclosure. As illustrated in FIG. 6, a UE may be in at least one of three RRC states: RRC connected 602 (e.g., RRC_CONNECTED), RRC idle 604 (e.g., RRC_I DLE), and RRC inactive 606 (e.g., RRCJNACTIVE).
[0091] In RRC connected 602, the UE has an established RRC context and may have at least one RRC connection with a base station. The base station may be similar to one of the one or more base stations included in the RAN 104 depicted in FIG. 1A, one of the gNBs 160 or ng-eNBs 162 depicted in FIG. 1 B, the gNB 220 depicted in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any other base station described in the present disclosure. The base station with which the UE is connected may have the RRC context for the UE. The RRC context, referred to as the UE context, may comprise parameters for communication between the UE and the base station. These parameters may include, for example: one or more AS contexts; one or more radio link configuration parameters; bearer configuration information (e.g., relating to a data radio bearer, signaling radio bearer, logical channel, QoS flow, and/or PDU session); security information; and/or PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, and/or SDAP layer configuration information. While in RRC connected 602, mobility of the UE may be managed by the RAN (e.g., the RAN 104 or the NG-RAN 154). The UE may measure the signal levels (e.g., reference signal levels) from a serving cell and neighboring cells and report these measurements to the base station currently serving the UE. The UE’s serving base station may request a handover to a cell of one of the neighboring base stations based on the reported measurements. The RRC state may transition from RRC connected 602 to RRC idle 604 through a connection release procedure 608 or to RRC inactive 606 through a connection inactivation procedure 610. [0092] In RRC idle 604, an RRC context may not be established for the UE. In RRC idle 604, the UE may not have an RRC connection with the base station. While in RRC idle 604, the UE may be in a sleep state for the majority of the time (e.g., to conserve battery power). The UE may wake up periodically (e.g., once in every discontinuous reception cycle) to monitor for paging messages from the RAN. Mobility of the UE may be managed by the UE through a procedure known as cell reselection. The RRC state may transition from RRC idle 604 to RRC connected 602 through a connection establishment procedure 612, which may involve a random access procedure as discussed in greater detail below.
[0093] In RRC inactive 606, the RRC context previously established is maintained in the UE and the base station. This allows for a fast transition to RRC connected 602 with reduced signaling overhead as compared to the transition from RRC idle 604 to RRC connected 602. While in RRC inactive 606, the UE may be in a sleep state and mobility of the UE may be managed by the UE through cell reselection. The RRC state may transition from RRC inactive 606 to RRC connected 602 through a connection resume procedure 614 or to RRC idle 604 though a connection release procedure 616 that may be the same as or similar to connection release procedure 608. [0094] An RRC state may be associated with a mobility management mechanism. In RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606, mobility is managed by the UE through cell reselection. The purpose of mobility management in RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 is to allow the network to be able to notify the UE of an event via a paging message without having to broadcast the paging message over the entire mobile communications network. The mobility management mechanism used in RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 may allow the network to track the UE on a cell-group level so that the paging message may be broadcast over the cells of the cell group that the UE currently resides within instead of the entire mobile communication network. The mobility management mechanisms for RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 track the UE on a cell-group level. They may do so using different granularities of grouping. For example, there may be three levels of cell-grouping granularity: individual cells; cells within a RAN area identified by a RAN area identifier (RAI); and cells within a group of RAN areas, referred to as a tracking area and identified by a tracking area identifier (TAI).
[0095] T racking areas may be used to track the UE at the CN level. The CN (e.g., the CN 102 or the 5G-CN 152) may provide the UE with a list of TAIs associated with a UE registration area. If the UE moves, through cell reselection, to a cell associated with a TAI not included in the list of TAIs associated with the UE registration area, the UE may perform a registration update with the CN to allow the CN to update the UE’s location and provide the UE with a new the UE registration area.
[0096] RAN areas may be used to track the UE at the RAN level. For a UE in RRC inactive 606 state, the UE may be assigned a RAN notification area. A RAN notification area may comprise one or more cell identities, a list of RAIs, or a list of TAIs. In an example, a base station may belong to one or more RAN notification areas. In an example, a cell may belong to one or more RAN notification areas. If the UE moves, through cell reselection, to a cell not included in the RAN notification area assigned to the UE, the UE may perform a notification area update with the RAN to update the UE’s RAN notification area.
[0097] A base station storing an RRC context for a UE or a last serving base station of the UE may be referred to as an anchor base station. An anchor base station may maintain an RRC context for the UE at least during a period of time that the UE stays in a RAN notification area of the anchor base station and/or during a period of time that the UE stays in RRC inactive 606.
[0098] A gNB, such as gNBs 160 in FIG. 1 B, may be split in two parts: a central unit (gNB-CU), and one or more distributed units (gNB-DU). A gNB-CU may be coupled to one or more gNB-DUs using an F1 interface. The gNB-CU may comprise the RRC, the PDCP, and the SDAP. A gNB-DU may comprise the RLC, the MAC, and the PHY.
[0099] In NR, the physical signals and physical channels (discussed with respect to FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B) may be mapped onto orthogonal frequency divisional multiplexing (OFDM) symbols. OFDM is a multicarrier communication scheme that transmits data over F orthogonal subcarriers (or tones). Before transmission, the data may be mapped to a series of complex symbols (e.g., M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM) or M-phase shift keying (M-PSK) symbols), referred to as source symbols, and divided into F parallel symbol streams. The F parallel symbol streams may be treated as though they are in the frequency domain and used as inputs to an Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (I FFT) block that transforms them into the time domain. The IFFT block may take in F source symbols at a time, one from each of the F parallel symbol streams, and use each source symbol to modulate the amplitude and phase of one of F sinusoidal basis functions that correspond to the F orthogonal subcarriers. The output of the IFFT block may be F time-domain samples that represent the summation of the F orthogonal subcarriers. The F time-domain samples may form a single OFDM symbol. After some processing (e.g., addition of a cyclic prefix) and up-conversion, an OFDM symbol provided by the IFFT block may be transmitted over the air interface on a carrier frequency. The F parallel symbol streams may be mixed using an FFT block before being processed by the IFFT block. This operation produces Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)-precoded OFDM symbols and may be used by UEs in the uplink to reduce the peak to average power ratio (PAPR). Inverse processing may be performed on the OFDM symbol at a receiver using an FFT block to recover the data mapped to the source symbols.
[0100] FIG. 7 illustrates an example configuration of an NR frame into which OFDM symbols are grouped. An NR frame may be identified by a system frame number (SFN). The SFN may repeat with a period of 1024 frames. As illustrated, one NR frame may be 10 milliseconds (ms) in duration and may include 10 subframes that are 1 ms in duration. A subframe may be divided into slots that include, for example, 14 OFDM symbols per slot.
[0101] The duration of a slot may depend on the numerology used for the OFDM symbols of the slot. In NR, a flexible numerology is supported to accommodate different cell deployments (e.g., cells with carrier frequencies below 1 GHz up to cells with carrier frequencies in the mm-wave range). A numerology may be defined in terms of subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix duration. For a numerology in NR, subcarrier spacings may be scaled up by powers of two from a baseline subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz, and cyclic prefix durations may be scaled down by powers of two from a baseline cyclic prefix duration of 4.7 ps. For example, NR defines numerologies with the following subcarrier spacing/cyclic prefix duration combinations: 15 kHz/4.7 ps; 30 kHz/2.3 ps; 60 kHz/1.2 ps; 120 kHz/0.59 ps; and 240 kHz/0.29 ps.
[0102] A slot may have a fixed number of OFDM symbols (e.g., 14 OFDM symbols). A numerology with a higher subcarrier spacing has a shorter slot duration and, correspondingly, more slots per subframe. FIG. 7 illustrates this numerology-dependent slot duration and slots-per-subframe transmission structure (the numerology with a subcarrier spacing of 240 kHz is not shown in FIG. 7 for ease of illustration). A subframe in NR may be used as a numerologyindependent time reference, while a slot may be used as the unit upon which uplink and downlink transmissions are scheduled. To support low latency, scheduling in NR may be decoupled from the slot duration and start at any OFDM symbol and last for as many symbols as needed for a transmission. These partial slot transmissions may be referred to as mini-slot or subslot transmissions.
[0103] FIG. 8 illustrates an example configuration of a slot in the time and frequency domain for an NR carrier. The slot includes resource elements (REs) and resource blocks (RBs). An RE is the smallest physical resource in NR. An RE spans one OFDM symbol in the time domain by one subcarrier in the frequency domain as shown in FIG. 8. An RB spans twelve consecutive REs in the frequency domain as shown in FIG. 8. An NR carrier may be limited to a width of 275 RBs or 275x12 = 3300 subcarriers. Such a limitation, if used, may limit the NR carrier to 50, 100, 200, and 400 MHz for subcarrier spacings of 15, 30, 60, and 120 kHz, respectively, where the 400 MHz bandwidth may be set based on a 400 MHz per carrier bandwidth limit.
[0104] FIG. 8 illustrates a single numerology being used across the entire bandwidth of the NR carrier. In other example configurations, multiple numerologies may be supported on the same carrier.
[0105] NR may support wide carrier bandwidths (e.g., up to 400 MHz for a subcarrier spacing of 120 kHz). Not all UEs may be able to receive the full carrier bandwidth (e.g., due to hardware limitations). Also, receiving the full carrier bandwidth may be prohibitive in terms of UE power consumption. In an example, to reduce power consumption and/or for other purposes, a UE may adapt the size of the UE’s receive bandwidth based on the amount of traffic the UE is scheduled to receive. This is referred to as bandwidth adaptation.
[0106] NR defines bandwidth parts (BWPs) to support UEs not capable of receiving the full carrier bandwidth and to support bandwidth adaptation. In an example, a BWP may be defined by a subset of contiguous RBs on a carrier. A UE may be configured (e.g., via RRC layer) with one or more downlink BWPs and one or more uplink BWPs per serving cell (e.g., up to four downlink BWPs and up to four uplink BWPs per serving cell). At a given time, one or more of the configured BWPs for a serving cell may be active. These one or more BWPs may be referred to as active BWPs of the serving cell. When a serving cell is configured with a secondary uplink carrier, the serving cell may have one or more first active BWPs in the uplink carrier and one or more second active BWPs in the secondary uplink carrier.
[0107] For unpaired spectra, a downlink BWP from a set of configured downlink BWPs may be linked with an uplink BWP from a set of configured uplink BWPs if a downlink BWP index of the downlink BWP and an uplink BWP index of the uplink BWP are the same. For unpaired spectra, a UE may expect that a center frequency for a downlink BWP is the same as a center frequency for an uplink BWP.
[0108] For a downlink BWP in a set of configured downlink BWPs on a primary cell (POell), a base station may configure a UE with one or more control resource sets (CORESETs) for at least one search space. A search space is a set of locations in the time and frequency domains where the UE may find control information. The search space may be a UE-specific search space or a common search space (potentially usable by a plurality of UEs). For example, a base station may configure a UE with a common search space, on a POell or on a primary secondary cell (PSOell), in an active downlink BWP.
[0109] For an uplink BWP in a set of configured uplink BWPs, a BS may configure a UE with one or more resource sets for one or more PUCOH transmissions. A UE may receive downlink receptions (e.g., PDCOH or PDSCH) in a downlink BWP according to a configured numerology (e.g., subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix duration) for the downlink BWP. The UE may transmit uplink transmissions (e.g., PUCOH or PUSCH) in an uplink BWP according to a configured numerology (e.g., subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix length for the uplink BWP).
[0110] One or more BWP indicator fields may be provided in Downlink Control Information (DCI). A value of a BWP indicator field may indicate which BWP in a set of configured BWPs is an active downlink BWP for one or more downlink receptions. The value of the one or more BWP indicator fields may indicate an active uplink BWP for one or more uplink transmissions. [0111] A base station may sem i-statically configure a UE with a default downlink BWP within a set of configured downlink BWPs associated with a PCell. If the base station does not provide the default downlink BWP to the UE, the default downlink BWP may be an initial active downlink BWP. The UE may determine which BWP is the initial active downlink BWP based on a CORESET configuration obtained using the PBCH.
[0112] A base station may configure a UE with a BWP inactivity timer value for a PCell. The UE may start or restart a BWP inactivity timer at any appropriate time. For example, the UE may start or restart the BWP inactivity timer (a) when the UE detects a DOI indicating an active downlink BWP other than a default downlink BWP for a paired spectra operation; or (b) when a UE detects a DOI indicating an active downlink BWP or active uplink BWP other than a default downlink BWP or uplink BWP for an unpaired spectra operation. If the UE does not detect DOI during an interval of time (e.g., 1 ms or 0.5 ms), the UE may run the BWP inactivity timer toward expiration (for example, increment from zero to the BWP inactivity timer value, or decrement from the BWP inactivity timer value to zero). When the BWP inactivity timer expires, the UE may switch from the active downlink BWP to the default downlink BWP.
[0113] In an example, a base station may semi-statically configure a UE with one or more BWPs. A UE may switch an active BWP from a first BWP to a second BWP in response to receiving a DOI indicating the second BWP as an active BWP and/or in response to an expiry of the BWP inactivity timer (e.g., if the second BWP is the default BWP). [0114] Downlink and uplink BWP switching (where BWP switching refers to switching from a currently active BWP to a not currently active BWP) may be performed independently in paired spectra. In unpaired spectra, downlink and uplink BWP switching may be performed simultaneously. Switching between configured BWPs may occur based on RRC signaling, DOI, expiration of a BWP inactivity timer, and/or an initiation of random access.
[0115] FIG. 9 illustrates an example of bandwidth adaptation using three configured BWPs for an NR carrier. A UE configured with the three BWPs may switch from one BWP to another BWP at a switching point. In the example illustrated in FIG. 9, the BWPs include: a BWP 902 with a bandwidth of 40 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; a BWP 904 with a bandwidth of 10 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; and a BWP 906 with a bandwidth of 20 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz. The BWP 902 may be an initial active BWP, and the BWP 904 may be a default BWP. The UE may switch between BWPs at switching points. In the example of FIG. 9, the UE may switch from the BWP 902 to the BWP 904 at a switching point 908. The switching at the switching point 908 may occur for any suitable reason, for example, in response to an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer (indicating switching to the default BWP) and/or in response to receiving a DCI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP. The UE may switch at a switching point 910 from active BWP 904 to BWP 906 in response receiving a DCI indicating BWP 906 as the active BWP. The UE may switch at a switching point 912 from active BWP 906 to BWP 904 in response to an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer and/or in response receiving a DCI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP. The UE may switch at a switching point 914 from active BWP 904 to BWP 902 in response receiving a DCI indicating BWP 902 as the active BWP.
[0116] If a UE is configured for a secondary cell with a default downlink BWP in a set of configured downlink BWPs and a timer value, UE procedures for switching BWPs on a secondary cell may be the same/similar as those on a primary cell. For example, the UE may use the timer value and the default downlink BWP for the secondary cell in the same/similar manner as the UE would use these values for a primary cell.
[0117] To provide for greater data rates, two or more carriers can be aggregated and simultaneously transmitted to/from the same UE using carrier aggregation (GA). The aggregated carriers in GA may be referred to as component carriers (CCs). When GA is used, there are a number of serving cells for the UE, one for a CC. The CCs may have three configurations in the frequency domain.
[0118] FIG. 10A illustrates the three GA configurations with two CCs. In the intraband, contiguous configuration 1002, the two CCs are aggregated in the same frequency band (frequency band A) and are located directly adjacent to each other within the frequency band. In the intraband, non-contiguous configuration 1004, the two CCs are aggregated in the same frequency band (frequency band A) and are separated in the frequency band by a gap. In the interband configuration 1006, the two CCs are located in frequency bands (frequency band A and frequency band B).
[0119] In an example, up to 32 CCs may be aggregated. The aggregated CCs may have the same or different bandwidths, subcarrier spacing, and/or duplexing schemes (TDD or FDD). A serving cell for a UE using CA may have a downlink CC. For FDD, one or more uplink CCs may be optionally configured for a serving cell. The ability to aggregate more downlink carriers than uplink carriers may be useful, for example, when the UE has more data traffic in the downlink than in the uplink.
[0120] When CA is used, one of the aggregated cells for a UE may be referred to as a primary cell (PCell). The PCell may be the serving cell that the UE initially connects to at RRC connection establishment, reestablishment, and/or handover. The PCell may provide the UE with NAS mobility information and the security input. UEs may have different PCells. In the downlink, the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the downlink primary CC (DL PCC). In the uplink, the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the uplink primary CC (UL PCC). The other aggregated cells for the UE may be referred to as secondary cells (SCells). In an example, the SCells may be configured after the PCell is configured for the UE. For example, an SCell may be configured through an RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. In the downlink, the carrier corresponding to an SCell may be referred to as a downlink secondary CC (DL SCC). In the uplink, the carrier corresponding to the SCell may be referred to as the uplink secondary CC (UL SCC).
[0121] Configured SCells for a UE may be activated and deactivated based on, for example, traffic and channel conditions. Deactivation of an SCell may mean that PDCCH and PDSCH reception on the SCell is stopped and PUSCH, SRS, and CQI transmissions on the SCell are stopped. Configured SCells may be activated and deactivated using a MAC CE with respect to FIG. 4B. For example, a MAC CE may use a bitmap (e.g., one bit per SCell) to indicate which SCells (e.g., in a subset of configured SCells) for the UE are activated or deactivated. Configured SCells may be deactivated in response to an expiration of an SCell deactivation timer (e.g., one SCell deactivation timer per SCell). [0122] Downlink control information, such as scheduling assignments and scheduling grants, for a cell may be transmitted on the cell corresponding to the assignments and grants, which is known as self-scheduling. The DCI for the cell may be transmitted on another cell, which is known as cross-carrier scheduling. Uplink control information (e.g., HARQ acknowledgments and channel state feedback, such as CQI, PMI, and/or Rl) for aggregated cells may be transmitted on the PUCCH of the PCell. For a larger number of aggregated downlink CCs, the PUCCH of the PCell may become overloaded. Cells may be divided into multiple PUCCH groups.
[0123] FIG. 10B illustrates an example of how aggregated cells may be configured into one or more PUCCH groups. A PUCCH group 1010 and a PUCCH group 1050 may include one or more downlink CCs, respectively. In the example of FIG. 10B, the PUCCH group 1010 includes three downlink CCs: a PCell 1011, an SCell 1012, and an SCell 1013. The PUCCH group 1050 includes three downlink CCs in the present example: a PCell 1051, an SCell 1052, and an SCell 1053. One or more uplink CCs may be configured as a PCell 1021, an SCell 1022, and an SCell 1023. One or more other uplink CCs may be configured as a primary SCell (PSCell) 1061, an SCell 1062, and an SCell 1063. Uplink control information (UCI) related to the downlink CCs of the PUCCH group 1010, shown as UC1 1031, UC1 1032, and UC1 1033, may be transmitted in the uplink of the PCell 1021. Uplink control information (UCI) related to the downlink CCs of the PUCCH group 1050, shown as UC1 1071, UC1 1072, and UC1 1073, may be transmitted in the uplink of the PSCell 1061. In an example, if the aggregated cells depicted in FIG. 10B were not divided into the PUCCH group 1010 and the PUCCH group 1050, a single uplink PCell to transmit UCI relating to the downlink CCs, and the PCell may become overloaded. By dividing transmissions of UCI between the PCell 1021 and the PSCell 1061, overloading may be prevented.
[0124] A cell, comprising a downlink carrier and optionally an uplink carrier, may be assigned with a physical cell ID and a cell index. The physical cell ID or the cell index may identify a downlink carrier and/or an uplink carrier of the cell, for example, depending on the context in which the physical cell ID is used. A physical cell ID may be determined using a synchronization signal transmitted on a downlink component carrier. A cell index may be determined using RRC messages. In the disclosure, a physical cell ID may be referred to as a carrier ID, and a cell index may be referred to as a carrier index. For example, when the disclosure refers to a first physical cell ID for a first downlink carrier, the disclosure may mean the first physical cell ID is for a cell comprising the first downlink carrier. The same/similar concept may apply to, for example, a carrier activation. When the disclosure indicates that a first carrier is activated, the specification may mean that a cell comprising the first carrier is activated.
[0125] In CA, a multi-carrier nature of a PHY may be exposed to a MAC. In an example, a HARQ entity may operate on a serving cell. A transport block may be generated per assignment/grant per serving cell. A transport block and potential HARQ retransmissions of the transport block may be mapped to a serving cell.
[0126] In the downlink, a base station may transmit (e.g., unicast, multicast, and/or broadcast) one or more Reference Signals (RSs) to a UE (e.g., PSS, SSS, CSI-RS, DMRS, and/or PT-RS, as shown in FIG. 5A). In the uplink, the UE may transmit one or more RSs to the base station (e.g., DMRS, PT-RS, and/or SRS, as shown in FIG. 5B). The PSS and the SSS may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE to synchronize the UE to the base station. The PSS and the SSS may be provided in a synchronization signal (SS) I physical broadcast channel (PBOH) block that includes the PSS, the SSS, and the PBOH. The base station may periodically transmit a burst of SS/PBOH blocks. [0127] FIG. 11A illustrates an example of an SS/PBCH block's structure and location. A burst of SS/PBCH blocks may include one or more SS/PBOH blocks (e.g., 4 SS/PBOH blocks, as shown in FIG. 11A). Bursts may be transmitted periodically (e.g., every 2 frames or 20 ms). A burst may be restricted to a half-frame (e.g., a first half-frame having a duration of 5 ms). It will be understood that FIG. 11A is an example, and that these parameters (number of SS/PBOH blocks per burst, periodicity of bursts, position of burst within the frame) may be configured based on, for example: a carrier frequency of a cell in which the SS/PBOH block is transmitted; a numerology or subcarrier spacing of the cell; a configuration by the network (e.g., using RRC signaling); or any other suitable factor. In an example, the UE may assume a subcarrier spacing for the SS/PBOH block based on the carrier frequency being monitored, unless the radio network configured the UE to assume a different subcarrier spacing.
[0128] The SS/PBOH block may span one or more OFDM symbols in the time domain (e.g., 4 OFDM symbols, as shown in the example of FIG. 11A) and may span one or more subcarriers in the frequency domain (e.g., 240 contiguous subcarriers). The PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH may have a common center frequency. The PSS may be transmitted first and may span, for example, 1 OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers. The SSS may be transmitted after the PSS (e.g., two symbols later) and may span 1 OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers. The PBCH may be transmitted after the PSS (e.g., across the next 3 OFDM symbols) and may span 240 subcarriers.
[0129] The location of the SS/PBCH block in the time and frequency domains may not be known to the UE (e.g., if the UE is searching for the cell). To find and select the cell, the UE may monitor a carrier for the PSS. For example, the UE may monitor a frequency location within the carrier. If the PSS is not found after a certain duration (e.g., 20 ms), the UE may search for the PSS at a different frequency location within the carrier, as indicated by a synchronization raster. If the PSS is found at a location in the time and frequency domains, the UE may determine, based on a known structure of the SS/PBCH block, the locations of the SSS and the PBCH, respectively. The SS/PBCH block may be a celldefining SS block (CD-SSB). In an example, a primary cell may be associated with a CD-SSB. The CD-SSB may be located on a synchronization raster. In an example, a cell selection/search and/or reselection may be based on the CD- SSB.
[0130] The SS/PBCH block may be used by the UE to determine one or more parameters of the cell. For example, the UE may determine a physical cell identifier (PCI) of the cell based on the sequences of the PSS and the SSS, respectively. The UE may determine a location of a frame boundary of the cell based on the location of the SS/PBCH block. For example, the SS/PBCH block may indicate that it has been transmitted in accordance with a transmission pattern, wherein a SS/PBCH block in the transmission pattern is a known distance from the frame boundary.
[0131] The PBCH may use a QPSK modulation and may use forward error correction (FEC). The FEC may use polar coding. One or more symbols spanned by the PBCH may carry one or more DMRSs for demodulation of the PBCH. The PBCH may include an indication of a current system frame number (SFN) of the cell and/or a SS/PBCH block timing index. These parameters may facilitate time synchronization of the UE to the base station. The PBCH may include a master information block (MIB) used to provide the UE with one or more parameters. The MIB may be used by the UE to locate remaining minimum system information (RMSI) associated with the cell. The RMSI may include a System Information Block Type 1 (SIB1 ). The SIB1 may contain information needed by the UE to access the cell. The UE may use one or more parameters of the MIB to monitor PDCOH, which may be used to schedule PDSCH. The PDSCH may include the SIB1. The SIB1 may be decoded using parameters provided in the MIB. The PBOH may indicate an absence of SIB1. Based on the PBOH indicating the absence of SIB1 , the UE may be pointed to a frequency. The UE may search for an SS/PBCH block at the frequency to which the UE is pointed.
[0132] The UE may assume that one or more SS/PBOH blocks transmitted with a same SS/PBOH block index are quasi co-located (QCLed) (e.g. , having the same/similar Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average gain, average delay, and/or spatial Rx parameters). The UE may not assume QCL for SS/PBOH block transmissions having different SS/PBOH block indices.
[0133] SS/PBOH blocks (e.g., those within a half-frame) may be transmitted in spatial directions (e.g., using different beams that span a coverage area of the cell). In an example, a first SS/PBOH block may be transmitted in a first spatial direction using a first beam, and a second SS/PBOH block may be transmitted in a second spatial direction using a second beam.
[0134] In an example, within a frequency span of a carrier, a base station may transmit a plurality of SS/PBOH blocks. In an example, a first PCI of a first SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks may be different from a second PCI of a second SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks. The PCIs of SS/PBCH blocks transmitted in different frequency locations may be different or the same.
[0135] The CSI-RS may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE to acquire channel state information (CSI). The base station may configure the UE with one or more CSI-RSs for channel estimation or any other suitable purpose. The base station may configure a UE with one or more of the same/similar CSI-RSs. The UE may measure the one or more CSI-RSs. The UE may estimate a downlink channel state and/or generate a CSI report based on the measuring of the one or more downlink CSI-RSs. The UE may provide the CSI report to the base station. The base station may use feedback provided by the UE (e.g., the estimated downlink channel state) to perform link adaptation. [0136] The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more CSI-RS resource sets. A CSI-RS resource may be associated with a location in the time and frequency domains and a periodicity. The base station may selectively activate and/or deactivate a CSI-RS resource. The base station may indicate to the UE that a CSI-RS resource in the CSI-RS resource set is activated and/or deactivated.
[0137] The base station may configure the UE to report CSI measurements. The base station may configure the UE to provide CSI reports periodically, aperiodically, or semi-persistently. For periodic CSI reporting, the UE may be configured with a timing and/or periodicity of a plurality of CSI reports. For aperiodic CSI reporting, the base station may request a CSI report. For example, the base station may command the UE to measure a configured CSI-RS resource and provide a CSI report relating to the measurements. For semi-persistent CSI reporting, the base station may configure the UE to transmit periodically, and selectively activate or deactivate the periodic reporting. The base station may configure the UE with a CSI-RS resource set and CSI reports using RRC signaling. [0138] The CSI-RS configuration may comprise one or more parameters indicating, for example, up to 32 antenna ports. The UE may be configured to employ the same OFDM symbols for a downlink CSI-RS and a control resource set (CORESET) when the downlink CSI-RS and CORESET are spatially GCLed and resource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of the physical resource blocks (PRBs) configured for the CORESET. The UE may be configured to employ the same OFDM symbols for downlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocks when the downlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocks are spatially QCLed and resource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of PRBs configured for the SS/PBCH blocks.
[0139] Downlink DMRSs may be transmitted by a base station and used by a UE for channel estimation. For example, the downlink DMRS may be used for coherent demodulation of one or more downlink physical channels (e.g., PDSCH). An NR network may support one or more variable and/or configurable DMRS patterns for data demodulation. At least one downlink DMRS configuration may support a front-loaded DMRS pattern. A front-loaded DMRS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., one or two adjacent OFDM symbols). A base station may semi- statically configure the UE with a number (e.g. a maximum number) of front-loaded DMRS symbols for PDSCH. A DMRS configuration may support one or more DMRS ports. For example, for single user-MIMO, a DMRS configuration may support up to eight orthogonal downlink DMRS ports per UE. For multiuser-MI MO, a DMRS configuration may support up to 4 orthogonal downlink DMRS ports per UE. A radio network may support (e.g., at least for CP-OFDM) a common DMRS structure for downlink and uplink, wherein a DMRS location, a DMRS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence may be the same or different. The base station may transmit a downlink DMRS and a corresponding PDSCH using the same precoding matrix. The UE may use the one or more downlink DMRSs for coherent demodulation/channel estimation of the PDSCH.
[0140] In an example, a transmitter (e.g., a base station) may use a precoder matrices for a part of a transmission bandwidth. For example, the transmitter may use a first precoder matrix for a first bandwidth and a second precoder matrix for a second bandwidth. The first precoder matrix and the second precoder matrix may be different based on the first bandwidth being different from the second bandwidth. The UE may assume that a same precoding matrix is used across a set of PRBs. The set of PRBs may be denoted as a precoding resource block group (PRG).
[0141] A PDSCH may comprise one or more layers. The UE may assume that at least one symbol with DMRS is present on a layer of the one or more layers of the PDSCH. A higher layer may configure up to 3 DMRSs for the PDSCH.
[0142] Downlink PT-RS may be transmitted by a base station and used by a UE for phase-noise compensation. Whether a downlink PT-RS is present or not may depend on an RRC configuration. The presence and/or pattern of the downlink PT-RS may be configured on a UE-specific basis using a combination of RRC signaling and/or an association with one or more parameters employed for other purposes (e.g., modulation and coding scheme (MCS)), which may be indicated by DCI. When configured, a dynamic presence of a downlink PT-RS may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MCS. An NR network may support a plurality of PT-RS densities defined in the time and/or frequency domains. When present, a frequency domain density may be associated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. The UE may assume a same precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port. A number of PT-RS ports may be fewer than a number of DMRS ports in a scheduled resource. Downlink PT-RS may be confined in the scheduled time/frequency duration for the UE. Downlink PT-RS may be transmitted on symbols to facilitate phase tracking at the receiver.
[0143] The UE may transmit an uplink DMRS to a base station for channel estimation. For example, the base station may use the uplink DMRS for coherent demodulation of one or more uplink physical channels. For example, the UE may transmit an uplink DMRS with a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH. The uplink DM-RS may span a range of frequencies that is similar to a range of frequencies associated with the corresponding physical channel. The base station may configure the UE with one or more uplink DMRS configurations. At least one DMRS configuration may support a front- loaded DMRS pattern. The front-loaded DMRS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., one or two adjacent OFDM symbols). One or more uplink DMRSs may be configured to transmit at one or more symbols of a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH. The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with a number (e.g. maximum number) of front-loaded DMRS symbols for the PUSCH and/or the PUCCH, which the UE may use to schedule a single-symbol DMRS and/or a double-symbol DMRS. An NR network may support (e.g., for cyclic prefix orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (CP-OFDM)) a common DMRS structure for downlink and uplink, wherein a DMRS location, a DMRS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence for the DMRS may be the same or different.
[0144] A PUSCH may comprise one or more layers, and the UE may transmit at least one symbol with DMRS present on a layer of the one or more layers of the PUSCH. In an example, a higher layer may configure up to three DMRSs for the PUSCH.
[0145] Uplink PT-RS (which may be used by a base station for phase tracking and/or phase-noise compensation) may or may not be present depending on an RRC configuration of the UE. The presence and/or pattern of uplink PT- RS may be configured on a UE-specific basis by a combination of RRC signaling and/or one or more parameters employed for other purposes (e.g., Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS)), which may be indicated by DCI. When configured, a dynamic presence of uplink PT-RS may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MCS. A radio network may support a plurality of uplink PT-RS densities defined in time/frequency domain. When present, a frequency domain density may be associated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. The UE may assume a same precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port. A number of PT-RS ports may be fewer than a number of DMRS ports in a scheduled resource. For example, uplink PT-RS may be confined in the scheduled time/frequency duration for the UE.
[0146] SRS may be transmitted by a UE to a base station for channel state estimation to support uplink channel dependent scheduling and/or link adaptation. SRS transmitted by the UE may allow a base station to estimate an uplink channel state at one or more frequencies. A scheduler at the base station may employ the estimated uplink channel state to assign one or more resource blocks for an uplink PUSCH transmission from the UE. The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more SRS resource sets. For an SRS resource set, the base station may configure the UE with one or more SRS resources. An SRS resource set applicability may be configured by a higher layer (e.g., RRC) parameter. For example, when a higher layer parameter indicates beam management, an SRS resource in a SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets (e.g., with the same/similar time domain behavior, periodic, aperiodic, and/or the like) may be transmitted at a time instant (e.g., simultaneously). The UE may transmit one or more SRS resources in SRS resource sets. An NR network may support aperiodic, periodic and/or semi-persistent SRS transmissions. The UE may transmit SRS resources based on one or more trigger types, wherein the one or more trigger types may comprise higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC) and/or one or more DOI formats. In an example, at least one DOI format may be employed for the UE to select at least one of one or more configured SRS resource sets. An SRS trigger type 0 may refer to an SRS triggered based on a higher layer signaling. An SRS trigger type 1 may refer to an SRS triggered based on one or more DOI formats. In an example, when PUSCH and SRS are transmitted in a same slot, the UE may be configured to transmit SRS after a transmission of a PUSCH and a corresponding uplink DMRS.
[0147] The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more SRS configuration parameters indicating at least one of following: a SRS resource configuration identifier; a number of SRS ports; time domain behavior of an SRS resource configuration (e.g., an indication of periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS); slot, minislot, and/or subframe level periodicity; offset for a periodic and/or an aperiodic SRS resource; a number of OFDM symbols in an SRS resource; a starting OFDM symbol of an SRS resource; an SRS bandwidth; a frequency hopping bandwidth; a cyclic shift; and/or an SRS sequence ID.
[0148] An antenna port is defined such that the channel over which a symbol on the antenna port is conveyed can be inferred from the channel over which another symbol on the same antenna port is conveyed. If a first symbol and a second symbol are transmitted on the same antenna port, the receiver may infer the channel (e.g., fading gain, multipath delay, and/or the like) for conveying the second symbol on the antenna port, from the channel for conveying the first symbol on the antenna port. A first antenna port and a second antenna port may be referred to as quasi colocated (QCLed) if one or more large-scale properties of the channel over which a first symbol on the first antenna port is conveyed may be inferred from the channel over which a second symbol on a second antenna port is conveyed. The one or more large-scale properties may comprise at least one of: a delay spread; a Doppler spread; a Doppler shift; an average gain; an average delay; and/or spatial Receiving (Rx) parameters.
[0149] Channels that use beamforming require beam management. Beam management may comprise beam measurement, beam selection, and beam indication. A beam may be associated with one or more reference signals. For example, a beam may be identified by one or more beamformed reference signals. The UE may perform downlink beam measurement based on downlink reference signals (e.g., a channel state information reference signal (OS l-RS)) and generate a beam measurement report. The UE may perform the downlink beam measurement procedure after an RRC connection is set up with a base station.
[0150] FIG. 11B illustrates an example of channel state information reference signals (CSI-RSs) that are mapped in the time and frequency domains. A square shown in FIG. 11 B may span a resource block (RB) within a bandwidth of a cell. A base station may transmit one or more RRC messages comprising CSI-RS resource configuration parameters indicating one or more CSI-RSs. One or more of the following parameters may be configured by higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC and/or MAC signaling) for a CSI-RS resource configuration: a CSI-RS resource configuration identity, a number of CSI-RS ports, a CSI-RS configuration (e.g., symbol and resource element (RE) locations in a subframe), a CSI-RS subframe configuration (e.g., subframe location, offset, and periodicity in a radio frame), a CSI-RS power parameter, a CSI-RS sequence parameter, a code division multiplexing (CDM) type parameter, a frequency density, a transmission comb, quasi co-location (QCL) parameters (e.g., QCL-scramblingidentity, crs-portscount, mbsfn- subframeconfiglist, csi-rs-configZPid, qcl-csi-rs-configNZPid , and/or other radio resource parameters.
[0151] The three beams illustrated in FIG. 11 B may be configured for a UE in a UE-specific configuration. Three beams are illustrated in FIG. 11 B (beam #1 , beam #2, and beam #3), more or fewer beams may be configured. Beam #1 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1101 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a first symbol. Beam #2 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1102 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a second symbol. Beam #3 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1103 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a third symbol. By using frequency division multiplexing (FDM), a base station may use other subcarriers in a same RB (for example, those that are not used to transmit CSI-RS 1101) to transmit another CSI-RS associated with a beam for another UE. By using time domain multiplexing (TDM), beams used for the UE may be configured such that beams for the UE use symbols from beams of other UEs.
[0152] CSI-RSs such as those illustrated in FIG. 11 B (e.g., CSI-RS 1101, 1102, 1103) may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE for one or more measurements. For example, the UE may measure a reference signal received power (RSRP) of configured CSI-RS resources. The base station may configure the UE with a reporting configuration and the UE may report the RSRP measurements to a network (for example, via one or more base stations) based on the reporting configuration. In an example, the base station may determine, based on the reported measurement results, one or more transmission configuration indication (TCI) states comprising a number of reference signals. In an example, the base station may indicate one or more TCI states to the UE (e.g., via RRC signaling, a MAC CE, and/or a DCI). The UE may receive a downlink transmission with a receive (Rx) beam determined based on the one or more TCI states. In an example, the UE may or may not have a capability of beam correspondence. If the UE has the capability of beam correspondence, the UE may determine a spatial domain filter of a transmit (Tx) beam based on a spatial domain filter of the corresponding Rx beam. If the UE does not have the capability of beam correspondence, the UE may perform an uplink beam selection procedure to determine the spatial domain filter of the Tx beam. The UE may perform the uplink beam selection procedure based on one or more sounding reference signal (SRS) resources configured to the UE by the base station. The base station may select and indicate uplink beams for the UE based on measurements of the one or more SRS resources transmitted by the UE.
[0153] In a beam management procedure, a UE may assess (e.g., measure) a channel quality of one or more beam pair links, a beam pair link comprising a transmitting beam transmitted by a base station and a receiving beam received by the UE. Based on the assessment, the UE may transmit a beam measurement report indicating one or more beam pair quality parameters comprising, e.g. , one or more beam identifications (e.g. , a beam index, a reference signal index, or the like), RSRP, a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), a channel quality indicator (CQI), and/or a rank indicator (Rl). [0154] FIG. 12A illustrates examples of three downlink beam management procedures: P1, P2, and P3. Procedure P1 may enable a UE measurement on transmit (Tx) beams of a transmission reception point (TRP) (or multiple TRPs), e.g., to support a selection of one or more base station Tx beams and/or UE Rx beams (shown as ovals in the top row and bottom row, respectively, of P1). Beamforming at a TRP may comprise a Tx beam sweep for a set of beams (shown, in the top rows of P1 and P2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Beamforming at a UE may comprise an Rx beam sweep for a set of beams (shown, in the bottom rows of P1 and P3, as ovals rotated in a clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Procedure P2 may be used to enable a UE measurement on Tx beams of a TRP (shown, in the top row of P2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). The UE and/or the base station may perform procedure P2 using a smaller set of beams than is used in procedure P1 , or using narrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. This may be referred to as beam refinement. The UE may perform procedure P3 for Rx beam determination by using the same Tx beam at the base station and sweeping an Rx beam at the UE.
[0155] FIG. 12B illustrates examples of three uplink beam management procedures: U1, U2, and U3. Procedure U1 may be used to enable a base station to perform a measurement on Tx beams of a UE, e.g., to support a selection of one or more UE Tx beams and/or base station Rx beams (shown as ovals in the top row and bottom row, respectively, of U1). Beamforming at the UE may include, e.g., a Tx beam sweep from a set of beams (shown in the bottom rows of U1 and U3 as ovals rotated in a clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Beamforming at the base station may include, e.g., an Rx beam sweep from a set of beams (shown, in the top rows of U1 and U2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Procedure U2 may be used to enable the base station to adjust its Rx beam when the UE uses a fixed Tx beam. The UE and/or the base station may perform procedure U2 using a smaller set of beams than is used in procedure P1, or using narrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. This may be referred to as beam refinement The UE may perform procedure U3 to adjust its Tx beam when the base station uses a fixed Rx beam.
[0156] A UE may initiate a beam failure recovery (BFR) procedure based on detecting a beam failure. The UE may transmit a BFR request (e.g., a preamble, a UCI, an SR, a MAC GE, and/or the like) based on the initiating of the BFR procedure. The UE may detect the beam failure based on a determination that a quality of beam pair link(s) of an associated control channel is unsatisfactory (e.g., having an error rate higher than an error rate threshold, a received signal power lower than a received signal power threshold, an expiration of a timer, and/or the like).
[0157] The UE may measure a quality of a beam pair link using one or more reference signals (RSs) comprising one or more SS/PBOH blocks, one or more CSI-RS resources, and/or one or more demodulation reference signals (DMRSs). A quality of the beam pair link may be based on one or more of a block error rate (BLER), an RSRP value, a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) value, a reference signal received quality (RSRQ) value, and/or a CSI value measured on RS resources. The base station may indicate that an RS resource is quasi co-located (QCLed) with one or more DM-RSs of a channel (e.g. , a control channel, a shared data channel, and/or the like). The RS resource and the one or more DMRSs of the channel may be QCLed when the channel characteristics (e.g., Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, spatial Rx parameter, fading, and/or the like) from a transmission via the RS resource to the UE are similar or the same as the channel characteristics from a transmission via the channel to the UE.
[0158] A network (e.g., a gNB and/or an ng-eNB of a network) and/or the UE may initiate a random access procedure. A UE in an RRC_I DLE state and/or an RRC_I NACTI VE state may initiate the random access procedure to request a connection setup to a network. The UE may initiate the random access procedure from an RRC_CONNECTED state. The UE may initiate the random access procedure to request uplink resources (e.g., for uplink transmission of an SR when there is no PUCOH resource available) and/or acquire uplink timing (e.g., when uplink synchronization status is non-synchronized). The UE may initiate the random access procedure to request one or more system information blocks (SIBs) (e.g., other system information such as SIB2, SIB3, and/or the like). The UE may initiate the random access procedure for a beam failure recovery request. A network may initiate a random access procedure for a handover and/or for establishing time alignment for an SCell addition.
[0159] FIG. 13A illustrates a four-step contention-based random access procedure. Prior to initiation of the procedure, a base station may transmit a configuration message 1310 to the UE. The procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A comprises transmission of four messages: a Msg 1 1311, a Msg 2 1312, a Msg 31313, and a Msg 41314. The Msg 1 1311 may include and/or be referred to as a preamble (or a random access preamble). The Msg 2 1312 may include and/or be referred to as a random access response (RAR).
[0160] The configuration message 1310 may be transmitted, for example, using one or more RRC messages. The one or more RRC messages may indicate one or more random access channel (RACH) parameters to the UE. The one or more RACH parameters may comprise at least one of following: general parameters for one or more random access procedures (e.g., RACH-configGeneral}; cell-specific parameters (e.g., RACH-ConfigCommon); and/or dedicated parameters (e.g., RACH-configDedicated}. The base station may broadcast or multicast the one or more RRC messages to one or more UEs. The one or more RRC messages may be UE-specific (e.g., dedicated RRC messages transmitted to a UE in an RRC_CONNECTED state and/or in an RRCJNACTIVE state). The UE may determine, based on the one or more RACH parameters, a time-frequency resource and/or an uplink transmit power for transmission of the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 31313. Based on the one or more RACH parameters, the UE may determine a reception timing and a downlink channel for receiving the Msg 2 1312 and the Msg 41314.
[0161] The one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310 may indicate one or more Physical RACH (PRACH) occasions available for transmission of the Msg 1 1311. The one or more PRACH occasions may be predefined. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate one or more available sets of one or more PRACH occasions (e.g., prach-Configlndex). The one or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a) one or more PRACH occasions and (b) one or more reference signals. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a) one or more preambles and (b) one or more reference signals. The one or more reference signals may be SS/PBCH blocks and/or CSI-RSs. For example, the one or more RACH parameters may indicate a number of SS/PBCH blocks mapped to a PRACH occasion and/or a number of preambles mapped to a SS/PBCH blocks.
[0162] The one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310 may be used to determine an uplink transmit power of Msg 1 1311 and/or Msg 3 1313. For example, the one or more RACH parameters may indicate a reference power for a preamble transmission (e.g., a received target power and/or an initial power of the preamble transmission). There may be one or more power offsets indicated by the one or more RACH parameters. For example, the one or more RACH parameters may indicate: a power ramping step; a power offset between SSB and CSI-RS; a power offset between transmissions of the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 3 1313; and/or a power offset value between preamble groups. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate one or more thresholds based on which the UE may determine at least one reference signal (e.g., an SSB and/or CSI-RS) and/or an uplink carrier (e.g., a normal uplink (NUL) carrier and/or a supplemental uplink (SUL) carrier).
[0163] The Msg 1 1311 may include one or more preamble transmissions (e.g., a preamble transmission and one or more preamble retransmissions). An RRC message may be used to configure one or more preamble groups (e.g., group A and/or group B). A preamble group may comprise one or more preambles. The UE may determine the preamble group based on a pathloss measurement and/or a size of the Msg 3 1313. The UE may measure an RSRP of one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs) and determine at least one reference signal having an RSRP above an RSRP threshold (e.g., rsrp-ThresholdSSB and/or rsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS). The UE may select at least one preamble associated with the one or more reference signals and/or a selected preamble group, for example, if the association between the one or more preambles and the at least one reference signal is configured by an RRC message.
[0164] The UE may determine the preamble based on the one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310. For example, the UE may determine the preamble based on a pathloss measurement, an RSRP measurement, and/or a size of the Msg 3 1313. As another example, the one or more RACH parameters may indicate: a preamble format; a maximum number of preamble transmissions; and/or one or more thresholds for determining one or more preamble groups (e.g., group A and group B). A base station may use the one or more RACH parameters to configure the UE with an association between one or more preambles and one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs). If the association is configured, the UE may determine the preamble to include in Msg 1 1311 based on the association. The Msg 1 1311 may be transmitted to the base station via one or more PRACH occasions. The UE may use one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs) for selection of the preamble and for determining of the PRACH occasion. One or more RACH parameters (e.g., ra-ssb-OccasionMsklndex and/or ra-OccasionList) may indicate an association between the PRACH occasions and the one or more reference signals. [0165] The UE may perform a preamble retransmission if no response is received following a preamble transmission. The UE may increase an uplink transmit power for the preamble retransmission. The UE may select an initial preamble transmit power based on a pathloss measurement and/or a target received preamble power configured by the network. The UE may determine to retransmit a preamble and may ramp up the uplink transmit power. The UE may receive one or more RACH parameters (e.g., PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMP/NG_STEP) indicating a ramping step for the preamble retransmission. The ramping step may be an amount of incremental increase in uplink transmit power for a retransmission. The UE may ramp up the uplink transmit power if the UE determines a reference signal (e.g., SSB and/or CSI-RS) that is the same as a previous preamble transmission. The UE may count a number of preamble transmissions and/or retransmissions (e.g., PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER). The UE may determine that a random access procedure completed unsuccessfully, for example, if the number of preamble transmissions exceeds a threshold configured by the one or more RACH parameters (e.g., preambleTransMax).
[0166] The Msg 2 1312 received by the UE may include an RAR. In some scenarios, the Msg 21312 may include multiple RARs corresponding to multiple UEs. The Msg 2 1312 may be received after or in response to the transmitting of the Msg 1 1311. The Msg 2 1312 may be scheduled on the DL-SCH and indicated on a PDCCH using a random access RNTI (RA-RNTI). The Msg 21312 may indicate that the Msg 1 1311 was received by the base station. The Msg 2 1312 may include a time-alignment command that may be used by the UE to adjust the UE’s transmission timing, a scheduling grant for transmission of the Msg 3 1313, and/or a Temporary Cell RNTI (TC-RNTI). After transmitting a preamble, the UE may start a time window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the Msg 2 1312. The UE may determine when to start the time window based on a PRACH occasion that the UE uses to transmit the preamble. For example, the UE may start the time window one or more symbols after a last symbol of the preamble (e.g., at a first PDCCH occasion from an end of a preamble transmission). The one or more symbols may be determined based on a numerology. The PDCCH may be in a common search space (e.g., a Typel -PDCCH common search space) configured by an RRC message. The UE may identify the RAR based on a Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI). RNTIs may be used depending on one or more events initiating the random access procedure. The UE may use random access RNTI (RA-RNTI). The RA-RNTI may be associated with PRACH occasions in which the UE transmits a preamble. For example, the UE may determine the RA-RNTI based on: an OFDM symbol index; a slot index; a frequency domain index; and/or a UL carrier indicator of the PRACH occasions. An example of RA-RNTI may be as follows:
RA-RNTI= 1 + s_id + 14 x t_id + 14 x 80 x fjd + 14 x 80 x 8 x ul_carrier_id where s_id may be an index of a first OFDM symbol of the PRACH occasion (e.g., 0 < sjd < 14), t_id may be an index of a first slot of the PRACH occasion in a system frame (e.g., 0 < tjd < 80), fjd may be an index of the PRACH occasion in the frequency domain (e.g., 0 < fjd < 8), and ul_carrier_id may be a UL carrier used for a preamble transmission (e.g., 0 for an NUL carrier, and 1 for an SUL carrier).
[0167] The UE may transmit the Msg 3 1313 in response to a successful reception of the Msg 21312 (e.g., using resources identified in the Msg 21312). The Msg 3 1313 may be used for contention resolution in, for example, the contention-based random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A. In some scenarios, a plurality of UEs may transmit a same preamble to a base station and the base station may provide an RAR that corresponds to a UE. Collisions may occur if the plurality of UEs interpret the RAR as corresponding to themselves. Contention resolution (e.g., using the Msg 3 1313 and the Msg 41314) may be used to increase the likelihood that the UE does not incorrectly use an identity of another the UE. To perform contention resolution, the UE may include a device identifier in the Msg 3 1313 (e.g., a C-RNTI if assigned, a TC-RNTI included in the Msg 2 1312, and/or any other suitable identifier).
[0168] The Msg 41314 may be received after or in response to the transmitting of the Msg 3 1313. If a C-RNTI was included in the Msg 3 1313, the base station will address the UE on the PDCCH using the C-RNTI. If the UE's unique C-RNTI is detected on the PDCCH, the random access procedure is determined to be successfully completed. If a TC-RNTI is included in the Msg 31313 (e.g., if the UE is in an RRC_IDLE state or not otherwise connected to the base station), Msg 41314 will be received using a DL-SCH associated with the TC-RNTI. If a MAC PDU is successfully decoded and a MAC PDU comprises the UE contention resolution identity MAC CE that matches or otherwise corresponds with the CCCH SDU sent (e.g., transmitted) in Msg 3 1313, the UE may determine that the contention resolution is successful and/or the UE may determine that the random access procedure is successfully completed. [0169] The UE may be configured with a supplementary uplink (SUL) carrier and a normal uplink (NUL) carrier. An initial access (e.g., random access procedure) may be supported in an uplink carrier. For example, a base station may configure the UE with two separate RACH configurations: one for an SUL carrier and the other for an NUL carrier. For random access in a cell configured with an SUL carrier, the network may indicate which carrier to use (NUL or SUL). The UE may determine the SUL carrier, for example, if a measured quality of one or more reference signals is lower than a broadcast threshold. Uplink transmissions of the random access procedure (e.g., the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 31313) may remain on the selected carrier. The UE may switch an uplink carrier during the random access procedure (e.g., between the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 3 1313) in one or more cases. For example, the UE may determine and/or switch an uplink carrier for the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 31313 based on a channel clear assessment (e.g., a listen- before-talk).
[0170] FIG. 13B illustrates a two-step contention-free random access procedure. Similar to the four-step contentionbased random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A, a base station may, prior to initiation of the procedure, transmit a configuration message 1320 to the UE. The configuration message 1320 may be analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310. The procedure illustrated in FIG. 13B comprises transmission of two messages: a Msg 1 1321 and a Msg 21322. The Msg 1 1321 and the Msg 21322 may be analogous in some respects to the Msg 1 1311 and a Msg 21312 illustrated in FIG. 13A, respectively. As will be understood from FIGS. 13A and 13B, the contention- free random access procedure may not include messages analogous to the Msg 3 1313 and/or the Msg 41314.
[0171] The contention-free random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13B may be initiated for a beam failure recovery, other SI request, SCell addition, and/or handover. For example, a base station may indicate or assign to the UE the preamble to be used for the Msg 1 1321. The UE may receive, from the base station via PDCCH and/or RRC, an indication of a preamble (e.g., ra-Preamblelndex).
[0172] After transmitting a preamble, the UE may start a time window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the RAR. In the event of a beam failure recovery request, the base station may configure the UE with a separate time window and/or a separate PDCCH in a search space indicated by an RRC message (e.g., recoverySearchSpace/d). The UE may monitor for a PDCCH transmission addressed to a Cell RNTI (C-RNTI) on the search space. In the contention-free random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13B, the UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes after or in response to transmission of Msg 1 1321 and reception of a corresponding Msg 2 1322. The UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes, for example, if a PDCCH transmission is addressed to a C-RNTI. The UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes, for example, if the UE receives an RAR comprising a preamble identifier corresponding to a preamble transmitted by the UE and/or the RAR comprises a MAC sub-PDU with the preamble identifier. The UE may determine the response as an indication of an acknowledgement for an SI request.
[0173] FIG. 13C illustrates another two-step random access procedure. Similar to the random access procedures illustrated in FIGS. 13A and 13B, a base station may, prior to initiation of the procedure, transmit a configuration message 1330 to the UE. The configuration message 1330 may be analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310 and/or the configuration message 1320. The procedure illustrated in FIG. 13C comprises transmission of two messages: a Msg A 1331 and a Msg B 1332.
[0174] Msg A 1331 may be transmitted in an uplink transmission by the UE. Msg A 1331 may comprise one or more transmissions of a preamble 1341 and/or one or more transmissions of a transport block 1342. The transport block 1342 may comprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to the contents of the Msg 3 1313 illustrated in FIG. 13A. The transport block 1342 may comprise UCI (e.g., an SR, a HARQ ACK/NACK, and/or the like). The UE may receive the Msg B 1332 after or in response to transmitting the Msg A 1331. The Msg B 1332 may comprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to the contents of the Msg 2 1312 (e.g., an RAR) illustrated in FIGS. 13A and 13B and/or the Msg 41314 illustrated in FIG. 13A.
[0175] The UE may initiate the two-step random access procedure in FIG. 13C for licensed spectrum and/or unlicensed spectrum. The UE may determine, based on one or more factors, whether to initiate the two-step random access procedure. The one or more factors may be: a radio access technology in use (e.g., LTE, NR, and/or the like); whether the UE has valid TA or not; a cell size; the UE’s RRC state; a type of spectrum (e.g., licensed vs. unlicensed); and/or any other suitable factors.
[0176] The UE may determine, based on two-step RACH parameters included in the configuration message 1330, a radio resource and/or an uplink transmit power for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342 included in the Msg A 1331. The RACH parameters may indicate a modulation and coding schemes (MOS), a time-frequency resource, and/or a power control for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342. A time-frequency resource for transmission of the preamble 1341 (e.g., a PRACH) and a time-frequency resource for transmission of the transport block 1342 (e.g., a PUSCH) may be multiplexed using FDM, TDM, and/or CDM. The RACH parameters may enable the UE to determine a reception timing and a downlink channel for monitoring for and/or receiving Msg B 1332.
[0177] The transport block 1342 may comprise data (e.g., delay-sensitive data), an identifier of the UE, security information, and/or device information (e.g., an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (I MSI)). The base station may transmit the Msg B 1332 as a response to the Msg A 1331. The Msg B 1332 may comprise at least one of following: a preamble identifier; a timing advance command; a power control command; an uplink grant (e.g., a radio resource assignment and/or an MOS); a UE identifier for contention resolution; and/or an RNTI (e.g., a C-RNTI or a TC-RNTI). The UE may determine that the two-step random access procedure is successfully completed if: a preamble identifier in the Msg B 1332 is matched to a preamble transmitted by the UE; and/or the identifier of the UE in Msg B 1332 is matched to the identifier of the UE in the Msg A 1331 (e.g., the transport block 1342).
[0178] A UE and a base station may exchange control signaling. The control signaling may be referred to as L1/L2 control signaling and may originate from the PHY layer (e.g., layer 1) and/or the MAC layer (e.g., layer 2). The control signaling may comprise downlink control signaling transmitted from the base station to the UE and/or uplink control signaling transmitted from the UE to the base station.
[0179] The downlink control signaling may comprise: a downlink scheduling assignment; an uplink scheduling grant indicating uplink radio resources and/or a transport format; a slot format information; a preemption indication; a power control command; and/or any other suitable signaling. The UE may receive the downlink control signaling in a payload transmitted by the base station on a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH). The payload transmitted on the PDCCH may be referred to as downlink control information (DOI). In some scenarios, the PDCCH may be a group common PDCCH (GC-PDCCH) that is common to a group of UEs.
[0180] A base station may attach one or more cyclic redundancy check (CRC) parity bits to a DCI in order to facilitate detection of transmission errors. When the DCI is intended for a UE (or a group of the UEs), the base station may scramble the CRC parity bits with an identifier of the UE (or an identifier of the group of the UEs). Scrambling the CRC parity bits with the identifier may comprise Modulo-2 addition (or an exclusive OR operation) of the identifier value and the CRC parity bits. The identifier may comprise a 16-bit value of a radio network temporary identifier (RNTI).
[0181] DCIs may be used for different purposes. A purpose may be indicated by the type of RNTI used to scramble the CRC parity bits. For example, a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a paging RNTI (P-RNTI) may indicate paging information and/or a system information change notification. The P-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFE” in hexadecimal. A DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a system information RNTI (SI-RNTI) may indicate a broadcast transmission of the system information. The SI-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFF” in hexadecimal. A DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a random access RNTI (RA-RNTI) may indicate a random access response (RAR). A DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a cell RNTI (C-RNTI) may indicate a dynamically scheduled unicast transmission and/or a triggering of PDCCH-ordered random access. A DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a temporary cell RNTI (TC-RNTI) may indicate a contention resolution (e.g., a Msg 3 analogous to the Msg 3 1313 illustrated in FIG. 13A). Other RNTIs configured to the UE by a base station may comprise a Configured Scheduling RNTI (CS-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUCCH RNTI (TPC-PUCCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUSCH RNTI (TPC-PUSCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-SRS RNTI (TPC-SRS-RNTI), an Interruption RNTI (INT-RNTI), a Slot Format Indication RNTI (SFI-RNTI), a Semi-Persistent CSI RNTI (SP-CSI-RNTI), a Modulation and Coding Scheme Cell RNTI (MCS-C-RNTI), and/or the like. [0182] Depending on the purpose and/or content of a DOI, the base station may transmit the DOIs with one or more DOI formats. For example, DOI format 0_0 may be used for scheduling of PUSCH in a cell. DOI format 0_0 may be a fallback DOI format (e.g. , with compact DOI payloads). DOI format 0_1 may be used for scheduling of PUSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DOI payloads than DOI format 0_0). DOI format 1_0 may be used for scheduling of PDSCH in a cell. DOI format 1_0 may be a fallback DOI format (e.g., with compact DOI payloads). DOI format 1_1 may be used for scheduling of PDSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCI payloads than DCI format 1_0). DCI format 2_0 may be used for providing a slot format indication to a group of UEs. DCI format 2_1 may be used for notifying a group of UEs of a physical resource block and/or OFDM symbol where the UE may assume no transmission is intended to the UE. DCI format 2_2 may be used for transmission of a transmit power control (TPC) command for PUCCH or PUSCH. DCI format 2_3 may be used for transmission of a group of TPC commands for SRS transmissions by one or more UEs. DCI format(s) for new functions may be defined in future releases. DCI formats may have different DCI sizes, or may share the same DCI size.
[0183] After scrambling a DCI with a RNTI, the base station may process the DCI with channel coding (e.g., polar coding), rate matching, scrambling and/or QPSK modulation. A base station may map the coded and modulated DCI on resource elements used and/or configured for a PDCCH. Based on a payload size of the DCI and/or a coverage of the base station, the base station may transmit the DCI via a PDCCH occupying a number of contiguous control channel elements (CCEs). The number of the contiguous CCEs (referred to as aggregation level) may be 1 , 2, 4, 8, 16, and/or any other suitable number. A CCE may comprise a number (e.g., 6) of resource-element groups (REGs). A REG may comprise a resource block in an OFDM symbol. The mapping of the coded and modulated DCI on the resource elements may be based on mapping of CCEs and REGs (e.g., CCE-to-REG mapping).
[0184] FIG. 14A illustrates an example of CORESET configurations for a bandwidth part. The base station may transmit a DCI via a PDCCH on one or more control resource sets (CORESETs). A CORESET may comprise a timefrequency resource in which the UE tries to decode a DCI using one or more search spaces. The base station may configure a CORESET in the time-frequency domain. In the example of FIG. 14A, a first CORESET 1401 and a second CORESET 1402 occur at the first symbol in a slot. The first CORESET 1401 overlaps with the second CORESET 1402 in the frequency domain. A third CORESET 1403 occurs at a third symbol in the slot. A fourth CORESET 1404 occurs at the seventh symbol in the slot. CORESETs may have a different number of resource blocks in frequency domain. [0185] FIG. 14B illustrates an example of a CCE-to-REG mapping for DCI transmission on a CORESET and PDCCH processing. The CCE-to-REG mapping may be an interleaved mapping (e.g., for the purpose of providing frequency diversity) or a non-interleaved mapping (e.g., for the purposes of facilitating interference coordination and/or frequency- selective transmission of control channels). The base station may perform different or same CCE-to-REG mapping on different CORESETs. A CORESET may be associated with a CCE-to-REG mapping by RRC configuration. A CORESET may be configured with an antenna port quasi co-location (QCL) parameter. The antenna port QCL parameter may indicate QCL information of a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) for PDCCH reception in the CORESET. [0186] The base station may transmit, to the UE, RRC messages comprising configuration parameters of one or more CORESETs and one or more search space sets. The configuration parameters may indicate an association between a search space set and a CORESET. A search space set may comprise a set of PDCOH candidates formed by COEs at a given aggregation level. The configuration parameters may indicate: a number of PDCOH candidates to be monitored per aggregation level; a PDCOH monitoring periodicity and a PDCOH monitoring pattern; one or more DOI formats to be monitored by the UE; and/or whether a search space set is a common search space set or a UE- specific search space set. A set of COEs in the common search space set may be predefined and known to the UE. A set of COEs in the UE-specific search space set may be configured based on the UE’s identity (e.g., C-RNTI).
[0187] As shown in FIG. 14B, the UE may determine a time-frequency resource for a CORESET based on RRC messages. The UE may determine a CCE-to-REG mapping (e.g., interleaved or non-interleaved, and/or mapping parameters) for the CORESET based on configuration parameters of the CORESET. The UE may determine a number (e.g., at most 10) of search space sets configured on the CORESET based on the RRC messages. The UE may monitor a set of PDCCH candidates according to configuration parameters of a search space set. The UE may monitor a set of PDCCH candidates in one or more CORESETs for detecting one or more DCIs. Monitoring may comprise decoding one or more PDCCH candidates of the set of the PDCCH candidates according to the monitored DCI formats. Monitoring may comprise decoding a DCI content of one or more PDCCH candidates with possible (or configured) PDCCH locations, possible (or configured) PDCCH formats (e.g., number of CCEs, number of PDCCH candidates in common search spaces, and/or number of PDCCH candidates in the UE-specific search spaces) and possible (or configured) DCI formats. The decoding may be referred to as blind decoding. The UE may determine a DCI as valid for the UE, in response to CRC checking (e.g., scrambled bits for CRC parity bits of the DCI matching a RNTI value). The UE may process information contained in the DCI (e.g., a scheduling assignment, an uplink grant, power control, a slot format indication, a downlink preemption, and/or the like).
[0188] The UE may transmit uplink control signaling (e.g., uplink control information (UCI)) to a base station. The uplink control signaling may comprise hybrid automatic repeat request (HARO) acknowledgements for received DL- SCH transport blocks. The UE may transmit the HARO acknowledgements after receiving a DL-SCH transport block. Uplink control signaling may comprise channel state information (CSI) indicating channel quality of a physical downlink channel. The UE may transmit the CSI to the base station. The base station, based on the received CSI, may determine transmission format parameters (e.g., comprising multi-antenna and beamforming schemes) for a downlink transmission. Uplink control signaling may comprise scheduling requests (SR). The UE may transmit an SR indicating that uplink data is available for transmission to the base station. The UE may transmit a UCI (e.g., HARO acknowledgements (HARG-ACK), CSI report, SR, and the like) via a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) or a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH). The UE may transmit the uplink control signaling via a PUCCH using one of several PUCCH formats.
[0189] There may be five PUCCH formats and the UE may determine a PUCCH format based on a size of the UCI (e.g., a number of uplink symbols of UCI transmission and a number of UCI bits). PUCCH format 0 may have a length of one or two OFDM symbols and may include two or fewer bits. The UE may transmit UCI in a PUCOH resource using PUCOH format 0 if the transmission is over one or two symbols and the number of HARQ-ACK information bits with positive or negative SR (HARQ-ACK/SR bits) is one or two. PUCOH format 1 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include two or fewer bits. The UE may use PUCOH format 1 if the transmission is four or more symbols and the number of HARQ-ACK/SR bits is one or two. PUCOH format 2 may occupy one or two OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. The UE may use PUCOH format 2 if the transmission is over one or two symbols and the number of UCI bits is two or more. PUCOH format 3 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. The UE may use PUCOH format 3 if the transmission is four or more symbols, the number of UCI bits is two or more and PUCOH resource does not include an orthogonal cover code. PUCOH format 4 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. The UE may use PUCOH format 4 if the transmission is four or more symbols, the number of UCI bits is two or more and the PUCOH resource includes an orthogonal cover code.
[0190] The base station may transmit configuration parameters to the UE for a plurality of PUCOH resource sets using, for example, an RRC message. The plurality of PUCOH resource sets (e.g., up to four sets) may be configured on an uplink BWP of a cell. A PUCOH resource set may be configured with a PUCOH resource set index, a plurality of PUCOH resources with a PUCOH resource being identified by a PUCOH resource identifier (e.g., pucch-Resourceid), and/or a number (e.g. a maximum number) of UCI information bits the UE may transmit using one of the plurality of PUCOH resources in the PUCCH resource set. When configured with a plurality of PUCCH resource sets, the UE may select one of the plurality of PUCCH resource sets based on a total bit length of the UCI information bits (e.g., HARQ- ACK, SR, and/or CSI). If the total bit length of UCI information bits is two or fewer, the UE may select a first PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “0”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than two and less than or equal to a first configured value, the UE may select a second PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “1”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than the first configured value and less than or equal to a second configured value, the UE may select a third PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “2”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than the second configured value and less than or equal to a third value (e.g., 1406), the UE may select a fourth PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “3”.
[0191] After determining a PUCCH resource set from a plurality of PUCCH resource sets, the UE may determine a PUCCH resource from the PUCCH resource set for UCI (HARQ-ACK, CSI, and/or SR) transmission. The UE may determine the PUCCH resource based on a PUCCH resource indicator in a DCI (e.g., with a DCI format 1_0 or DCI for 1_1) received on a PDCCH. A three-bit PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI may indicate one of eight PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set. Based on the PUCCH resource indicator, the UE may transmit the UCI (HARQ- ACK, CSI and/or SR) using a PUCCH resource indicated by the PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI.
[0192] FIG. 15 illustrates an example of a wireless device 1502 in communication with a base station 1504 in accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure. The wireless device 1502 and base station 1504 may be part of a mobile communication network, such as the mobile communication network 100 illustrated in FIG. 1 A, the mobile communication network 150 illustrated in FIG. 1 B, or any other communication network. Only one wireless device 1502 and one base station 1504 are illustrated in FIG. 15, but it will be understood that a mobile communication network may include more than one UE and/or more than one base station, with the same or similar configuration as those shown in FIG. 15.
[0193] The base station 1504 may connect the wireless device 1502 to a core network (not shown) through radio communications over the air interface (or radio interface) 1506. The communication direction from the base station 1504 to the wireless device 1502 over the air interface 1506 is known as the downlink, and the communication direction from the wireless device 1502 to the base station 1504 over the air interface is known as the uplink. Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplink transmissions using FDD, TDD, and/or some combination of the two duplexing techniques.
[0194] In the downlink, data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 from the base station 1504 may be provided to the processing system 1508 of the base station 1504. The data may be provided to the processing system 1508 by, for example, a core network. In the uplink, data to be sent to the base station 1504 from the wireless device 1502 may be provided to the processing system 1518 of the wireless device 1502. The processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 may implement layer 3 and layer 2 OSI functionality to process the data for transmission. Layer 2 may include an SDAP layer, a PDCP layer, an RLC layer, and a MAC layer, for example, with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A. Layer 3 may include an RRC layer as with respect to FIG. 2B.
[0195] After being processed by processing system 1508, the data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 may be provided to a transmission processing system 1510 of base station 1504. Similarly, after being processed by the processing system 1518, the data to be sent to base station 1504 may be provided to a transmission processing system 1520 of the wireless device 1502. The transmission processing system 1510 and the transmission processing system 1520 may implement layer 1 OSI functionality. Layer 1 may include a PHY layer with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A. For transmit processing, the PHY layer may perform, for example, forward error correction coding of transport channels, interleaving, rate matching, mapping of transport channels to physical channels, modulation of physical channel, multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like. [0196] At the base station 1504, a reception processing system 1512 may receive the uplink transmission from the wireless device 1502. At the wireless device 1502, a reception processing system 1522 may receive the downlink transmission from base station 1504. The reception processing system 1512 and the reception processing system 1522 may implement layer 1 OSI functionality. Layer 1 may include a PHY layer with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A. For receive processing, the PHY layer may perform, for example, error detection, forward error correction decoding, deinterleaving, demapping of transport channels to physical channels, demodulation of physical channels, MIMO or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like.
[0197] As shown in FIG. 15, a wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504 may include multiple antennas. The multiple antennas may be used to perform one or more MIMO or multi-antenna techniques, such as spatial multiplexing (e.g., single-user MIMO or multi-user Ml MO), transmit/receive diversity, and/or beamforming. In other examples, the wireless device 1502 and/or the base station 1504 may have a single antenna.
[0198] The processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 maybe associated with a memory 1514 and a memory 1524, respectively. Memory 1514 and memory 1524 (e.g., one or more non-transitory computer readable mediums) may store computer program instructions or code that may be executed by the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 to carry out one or more of the functionalities discussed in the present application. Although not shown in FIG. 15, the transmission processing system 1510, the transmission processing system 1520, the reception processing system 1512, and/or the reception processing system 1522 may be coupled to a memory (e.g., one or more non-transitory computer readable mediums) storing computer program instructions or code that may be executed to carry out one or more of their respective functionalities.
[0199] The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may comprise one or more controllers and/or one or more processors. The one or more controllers and/or one or more processors may comprise, for example, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), a microcontroller, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) and/or other programmable logic device, discrete gate and/or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, an on-board unit, or any combination thereof. The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may perform at least one of signal coding/processing, data processing, power control, input/output processing, and/or any other functionality that may enable the wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504 to operate in a wireless environment.
[0200] The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may be connected to one or more peripherals 1516 and one or more peripherals 1526, respectively. The one or more peripherals 1516 and the one or more peripherals 1526 may include software and/or hardware that provide features and/or functionalities, for example, a speaker, a microphone, a keypad, a display, a touchpad, a power source, a satellite transceiver, a universal serial bus (USB) port, a hands-free headset, a frequency modulated (FM) radio unit, a media player, an Internet browser, an electronic control unit (e.g., for a motor vehicle), and/or one or more sensors (e.g., an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a temperature sensor, a radar sensor, a lidar sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a light sensor, a camera, and/or the like). The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may receive user input data from and/or provide user output data to the one or more peripherals 1516 and/or the one or more peripherals 1526. The processing system 1518 in the wireless device 1502 may receive power from a power source and/or may be configured to distribute the power to the other components in the wireless device 1502. The power source may comprise one or more sources of power, for example, a battery, a solar cell, a fuel cell, or any combination thereof. The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may be connected to a GPS chipset 1517 and a GPS chipset 1527, respectively. The GPS chipset 1517 and the GPS chipset 1527 may be configured to provide geographic location information of the wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504, respectively.
[0201] FIG. 16A illustrates an example structure for uplink transmission. A baseband signal representing a physical uplink shared channel may perform one or more functions. The one or more functions may comprise at least one of: scrambling; modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers; transform precoding to generate complex-valued symbols; precoding of the complex-valued symbols; mapping of precoded complex-valued symbols to resource elements; generation of complex-valued time-domain Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) or CP- OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/or the like. In an example, when transform precoding is enabled, a SC-FDMA signal for uplink transmission may be generated. In an example, when transform precoding is not enabled, an CP- OFDM signal for uplink transmission may be generated by FIG. 16A. These functions are illustrated as examples and it is anticipated that other mechanisms may be implemented in various embodiments.
[0202] FIG. 16B illustrates an example structure for modulation and up-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency. The baseband signal may be a complex-valued SC-FDMA or CP-OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port and/or a complex-valued Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) baseband signal. Filtering may be employed prior to transmission.
[0203] FIG. 16C illustrates an example structure for downlink transmissions. A baseband signal representing a physical downlink channel may perform one or more functions. The one or more functions may comprise: scrambling of coded bits in a codeword to be transmitted on a physical channel; modulation of scrambled bits to generate complexvalued modulation symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers; precoding of the complex-valued modulation symbols on a layer for transmission on the antenna ports; mapping of complex-valued modulation symbols for an antenna port to resource elements; generation of complex-valued timedomain OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/or the like. These functions are illustrated as examples and it is anticipated that other mechanisms may be implemented in various embodiments.
[0204] FIG. 16D illustrates another example structure for modulation and up-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency. The baseband signal may be a complex-valued OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port. Filtering may be employed prior to transmission.
[0205] A wireless device may receive from a base station one or more messages (e.g. RRC messages) comprising configuration parameters of a plurality of cells (e.g. primary cell, secondary cell). The wireless device may communicate with at least one base station (e.g. two or more base stations in dual-connectivity) via the plurality of cells. The one or more messages (e.g. as a part of the configuration parameters) may comprise parameters of physical, MAC, RLC, PODP, SDAP, RRC layers for configuring the wireless device. For example, the configuration parameters may comprise parameters for configuring physical and MAC layer channels, bearers, etc. For example, the configuration parameters may comprise parameters indicating values of timers for physical, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRC layers, and/or communication channels.
[0206] A timer may begin running once it is started and continue running until it is stopped or until it expires. A timer may be started if it is not running or restarted if it is running. A timer may be associated with a value (e.g. the timer may be started or restarted from a value or may be started from zero and expire once it reaches the value). The duration of a timer may not be updated until the timer is stopped or expires (e.g., due to BWP switching). A timer may be used to measure a time period/window for a process. When the specification refers to an implementation and procedure related to one or more timers, it will be understood that there are multiple ways to implement the one or more timers. For example, it will be understood that one or more of the multiple ways to implement a timer may be used to measure a time period/window for the procedure. For example, a random access response window timer may be used for measuring a window of time for receiving a random access response. In an example, instead of starting and expiry of a random access response window timer, the time difference between two time stamps may be used. When a timer is restarted, a process for measurement of time window may be restarted. Other example implementations may be provided to restart a measurement of a time window.
[0207] A satellite may comprise a spaceborne/airborne vehicle (e.g., satellite, balloon, air ship, high altitude platform station, unmanned/uncrewed aircraft system, space-borne platform, drone, and the like). The spaceborne vehicle may, for example, provide a structure, power, commanding, telemetry, attitude control for the satellite, and possibly an appropriate thermal environment, radiation shielding. The satellite may be referred to, for example, as an NTN base station. The satellite may be referred to, for example, as a (serving) satellite. The satellite may be referred to, for example, as an NTN payload. The satellite may comprise, for example, an NTN payload. The NTN payload, for example, may be a network node embarked on board the satellite. The satellite may, for example, orbit the Earth. [0208] The satellite may be a part of a bent-pipe/transparent payload non-terrestrial network (NTN) communication link/system. The satellite may forward a signal with amplification between a service link and a feeder link, for example, based on the satellite being part of the bent-pipe/transparent payload NTN system. The satellite may forward the signal with frequency change/conversion/shift between a service link and a feeder link, for example, based on the satellite being part of the bent-pipe/transparent payload NTN system. The satellite may operate, for example, as a repeater based on the satellite being part of the bent-pipe/transparent payload NTN system. The satellite may operate, for example, as a relay node based on the satellite being part of the bent-pipe/transparent payload NTN system. The satellite may operate, for example, as a regenerator based on the satellite being part of the bent-pipe/transparent payload NTN system. The service link may connect the satellite and the UE on earth. The feeder link may connect the satellite and an NTN gateway on earth. A terrestrial base station may comprise the NTN gateway. The terrestrial base station may be connected to a core network.
[0209] The satellite may be a part of a regenerative payload NTN communication link/system. The satellite may be equipped with on-board processing. The on-board processing may comprise demodulating and decoding a received signal. The demodulating and decoding procedures may be different for the service link and the feeder link. The onboard processing, for example, may comprise at least two demodulating and at least two decoding procedures. The at least two demodulating procedures may comprise a first demodulating procedure and a second demodulating procedure. The at least two decoding procedures may comprise a first decoding procedure and a second decoding procedure. The satellite, for example, may apply the first demodulating procedure to the signal that the satellite receives on the feeder link. The satellite may apply the second demodulating procedure for the signal that the satellite receives on the service link. The satellite, for example, may apply the first decoding procedure to the signal that the satellite receives on the feeder link. The satellite may apply the second decoding procedure for the signal that the satellite receives on the service link. The on-board processing may comprise regenerating the signal. The regenerating procedure may be different for the service link and the feeder link. The on-board processing, for example, may comprise at least two regenerating procedures. The at least two regenerating procedures may comprise a first regenerating procedure and a second regenerating procedure. The satellite, for example, may apply the first regenerating procedure to the signal that the satellite receives on the feeder link. The satellite may apply the second regenerating procedure to the signal that the satellite receives on the service link.
[0210] A UE may transmit an uplink signal to the satellite (or the NTN base station). The satellite may transmit the uplink signal to a terrestrial base station (or the NTN gateway). If the satellite transmits the uplink signal to the NTN gateway, the NTN gateway may transmit the uplink signal to a terrestrial base station. The terrestrial base station may transmit the uplink signal to the core network. The satellite may transmit the uplink signal to a different satellite, for example, over/via an inter-satellite link.
[0211] The UE may receive a downlink signal from the satellite (or the NTN base station). The satellite may receive the downlink signal from a terrestrial base station (or the NTN gateway). The satellite may receive the downlink signal from a different satellite, for example, over/via the inter-satellite link. The terrestrial base station may receive the downlink signal from the core network.
[0212] A base station/gNB/eNB in NTN may comprise the NTN gateway. The base station/gNB/eNB in NTN may comprise the satellite/NTN base station/NTN payload. The base station/gNB/eNB in NTN may comprise the feeder link. The feeder link may connect the NTN gateway and the satellite. The base station/gNB/eNB in NTN may comprise non- NTN infrastructure that perform(s) gNB/eNB functions. The non-NTN infrastructure may be referred to, for example, as a terrestrial base station/terrestrial g N B/terrestrial eNB. The base station/gNB/eNB (or a portion of the base station/gNB/eNB) in NTN may be referred to, for example, as an NTN service link provisioning system. In an example, the NTN gateway may be referred to as a terrestrial base station/terrestrial gNB/terrestrial eNB.
[0213] FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B illustrate an example of NTN architectures in which a satellite is used as part of a network as per embodiments of the present disclosure.
[0214] FIG. 17A illustrates an example of NTN architecture corresponding to a satellite with on-board transparent payload model as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. The NTN architecture may comprise a UE, a satellite, an NTN gateway, a base station or gNB/eNB, a core network, and/or a data network. The satellite may behave as a remote radio unit (RRU) communicating with the NTN gateway. The satellite may implement frequency conversion and/or radio frequency (RF) amplification in the uplink direction. The satellite may implement frequency conversion and/or radio frequency amplification in the downlink direction. The NTN gateway may connect to a base station. In an example, the base station may be on the ground. A UE may transmit and receive via the satellite (e.g., as a relay or a repeater or a regenerator). The satellite (e.g., an RRU) may correspond to an analog RF repeater that repeats the signal from a service link (e.g., between the satellite and the UE) to a feeder link (e.g., between the NTN gateway and the satellite), and vice-versa. [0215] FIG. 17B illustrates an example NTN architecture corresponding to a satellite with on-board regenerative payload model as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. The NTN architecture may comprise a UE, a satellite, an NTN gateway, a core network, and/or the like. The satellite may regenerate signals received from earth (e.g., from a UE or from an NTN gateway). The satellite may regenerate the signal by decoding and re-encoding the signal. The satellite may regenerate the signal by amplifying the signal. The satellite may regenerate the signal by frequency shifting the signal. The satellite may regenerate the signal by changing the carrier frequency of the signal. In an example, the satellite may behave as a base station.
[0216] In an example, the NTN may comprise an earth fixed cell/beam. An NTN earth fixed cell/beam may be referred to, for example, as an NTN earth centric cell/beam. One or more satellites providing earth fixed cell/beam may cover a same (geographical) areas all/most of/a plurality of the time. The one or more satellites providing the earth fixed cell/beam may be one or more geostationary/geosynchronous satellite orbit (GEO/GSO) satellites. In an example, an NTN earth fixed cell/beam may be provisioned by beam(s) continuously covering same geographical areas all the time. [0217] In an example, the NTN may be/comprise a quasi-earth fixed cell/beam. A quasi-earth fixed cell/beam may be referred to, for example, as a quasi-earth centric cell/beam. One or more satellites in the quasi-earth fixed cell/beam may cover a (geographical) area for a fixed duration time and then cover a different (geographical) area for a next fixed duration of time. In an example, a quasi-earth fixed cell/beam may be provisioned by beam(s) covering one geographic area for a limited period of time and a different geographic area during another period of time. For example, the one or more satellites providing quasi-earth fixed cell/beam may cover a first (geographical) area at a first time. The one or more satellites in the quasi-earth fixed cell/beam may cover the first (geographical) area at a second time. The one or more satellites providing the quasi-earth fixed cell/beam may cover a second (geographical) area at a third time. The one or more satellites providing the quasi-earth fixed cell/beam may use steerable beams (and/or beam steering). The one or more satellites providing the quasi-earth fixed cell/beam may be one or more non-GSO (NGSO) or non-GEO satellites (e.g., one or more low-earth orbit (LEO) satellites, one or more medium earth orbit (MEO) satellites, and the like).
[0218] In an example, the NTN may be/comprise an earth moving cell/beam. The (geographical) area covered by one or more satellites in the earth moving cell/beam may move/slide over the Earth surface. In an example, an earth moving cell/beam may be provisioned by beam(s) whose coverage area slides over the Earth surface. For example, the one or more satellites providing the earth moving cell/beam may cover a first (geographical) area at a first time. The one or more satellites providing the earth moving (cell) system/coverage may cover a second (geographical) area at a second time. The one or more satellites providing the earth moving (cell) system/coverage may not use/generate steerable beams (or beam steering). The one or more satellites providing the earth moving (cell) system/coverage may use/generate, for example, fixed beams. The one or more satellites in the NTN earth moving (cell) system/coverage may use/generate, for example, non-steerable beams. The cell coverage covered by the one or more satellites providing the earth moving cell/beam may change by time. The one or more satellites providing the earth moving cell/beam may be one or more non-GSO (NGSO) or non-GEO (NGEO) satellites (e.g., one or more low-earth orbit (LEO) satellites, one or more medium earth orbit (MEO) satellites, and the like).
[0219] In an example, one or more satellites in an NTN may be one or more NGSO/NGEO satellites. The NTN may be/comprise, for example, an earth fixed cell/beam. The NTN may be/comprise, for example, quasi-earth fixed cell/beam. In another example, one or more satellites in an NTN may be one or more GSO/GEO satellites. The NTN may be/comprise, for example, NTN earth fixed cell/beam.
[0220] FIG. 18 illustrates examples of deployments of various platform types. The platform types may be satellite types. In an example, a satellite may be placed into a Low-Earth Orbit (LEO) at an altitude between 250 km to 1500 km, with orbital periods ranging from 90 to 130 minutes. A mean orbital velocity needed to maintain a stable LEO may be 7.8 km/s and may be reduced with increased orbital altitude. A mean orbital velocity for circular orbit of 200 km may be 7.79 km/s. A mean orbital velocity for circular orbit 1500 km may be 7.12 km/s. From the perspective of a given point on the surface of the earth, the position of the LEO satellite may change. The LEO satellite may provide quasi-earth fixed cell/beam. The LEO satellite may provide earth moving cell/beam.
[0221] In an example, a satellite may be placed into a medium-earth orbit (MEO) at an altitude between 5000 to 20000 km, with orbital periods ranging from 2 hours to 14 hours. The MEO satellite may provide quasi-earth fixed cell/beam. The MEO satellite may provide earth moving cell/beam.
[0222] In an example, a satellite may be placed into a geostationary satellite earth orbit (GEO) at 35,786 km altitude, and directly above the equator. This may equate to an orbital velocity of 3.07 km/s and an orbital period of 1 ,436 minutes, which equates to almost one sidereal day (23.934461223 hours). From the perspective of a given point on the surface of the earth, the position of the GEO may not move. The GEO may provide earth-fixed cell/beam.
[0223] In an example, an NTN may be a network or network segment that uses a space-borne vehicle to embark a transmission equipment relay node or a base station. While a terrestrial network is a network located on the surface of the earth, an NTN may be a network which uses a satellite as an access network, a backhaul interface network, or both. A satellite may generate several beams over a given area.
[0224] In an example, a footprint of a beam of a satellite may be in an elliptical shape (e.g., which may be considered as a cell). The footprint of a beam may be referred to as a spotbeam. The footprint of a beam may be referred to as a beam footprint. The footprint of a beam may move over the Earth’s surface with the satellite movement. The footprint of a beam may be Earth fixed with one or more beam pointing mechanisms used by the satellite to compensate for its motion. The size of a beam footprint may depend on the system design and may range from tens of kilometers to a few thousand kilometers.
[0225] The footprints of one or more beams may be a considered a cell. The footprint of one or more beams may be referred to be a beam. The beam may be associated with one or more aspects of a cell. For example, the beam may be associated with a cell-specific reference signal (CRS), for example, a beam-specific reference signal. In another example, the beam may be associated with a physical cell ID (PCI) or a physical beam ID. The terms cell and beam may be used interchangeably to refer to one or more footprints of at least one beam. [0226] A UE may be in a range (or a coverage area) of a serving/primary cell/beam. One or more cells/beams (e.g., non-serving/neighbor/assisting/candidate cells/beams) may be installed within the range (or the coverage area) of the serving cell/beam.
[0227] In an example, a propagation delay (e.g., between a satellite and the ground or between multiple satellites) may be the amount of time it takes for the head of the signal to travel from a sender to a receiver or vice versa. For uplink, the sender may be a UE and the receiver may be a base station/access network. For downlink, the sender may be a base station/access network and the receiver may be a UE. The propagation delay may vary depending on a distance between the sender and the receiver.
[0228] FIG. 19 illustrates examples of propagation delay corresponding to satellites types of different altitudes and different elevation angle (degrees). The propagation delay in the figure may be one-way latency. In an example, oneway latency may be an amount of time required to propagate through a telecommunication system from a terminal (e.g. UE) to the receiver (e.g., base station, eNB, gNB, RRU of a base station).
[0229] In an example, for the transparent satellite model of GEO case, the round-trip propagation time (RTT) may comprise service link delay (e.g., between the satellite and the UE) and feeder link delay (e.g., between the NTN gateway and the satellite). The RTT may be four times of 138.9 milliseconds (approximately 556 milliseconds).
[0230] In an example, an RTT of the GEO satellite may be more than a few seconds if processing time and congestion are considered. In an example, an RTT of a terrestrial network (e.g., NR, E-UTRA, LTE) may be negligible. The RTT of a terrestrial network may be less than 1 millisecond. In an example, the RTT of a GEO satellite may be hundreds of times longer than the RTT of a terrestrial network.
[0231] In an example, a maximum RTT of a LEO satellite with transparent payload with altitude of 600km may be 25.77 milliseconds. The differential RTT may be 3.12 milliseconds. The differential RTT within a beam of the satellite may be calculated based on the maximum diameter of the beam footprint at nadir. In an example, the differential RTT may imply the difference between communication latency that two UEs (e.g., one UE may be located close to the edge of the cell/beam and the other UE may be located close to the center of the cell/beam) may experience while communicating with an NTN node. In an example, for a LEO satellite with transparent payload with altitude of 1200km, the maximum RTD of may be 41.77 milliseconds. The differential RTT may be 3.18 milliseconds.
[0232] FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B illustrate examples of service link with maximum propagation delay of the cell/beam. In an example, an NTN may comprise at least one of: a transparent satellite, feeder link, ground/terrestrial gNB/eNB, a cell/beam, and service links of two wireless users.
[0233] In an example, as shown in FIG. 20A and/or FIG. 20B, a first UE (e.g., UE1) may be located closer to the cell/beam center than a second UE (e.g., UE2). In an example, the first UE (e.g., UE1) may not be at/close to the cell/beam center but may be otherwise closer to the satellite than the second UE (UE2). The UE1 may have smaller RTT compared to the UE2. For example, the RTT seen by UE1 may be 3.18 milliseconds lower than the RTT seen by UE2 for an NTN with LEO satellite with transparent payload with altitude of 1200km. [0234] In an example, the UE may receive information from the base station in a downlink message (e.g., SIB or RRC message) to estimate a location of the satellite. The UE may use the location of the satellite to estimate/determ ine/calcu late/compu te the propagation delay of the service link. For example, the UE may receive the satellite ephemeris via a downlink message (e.g., SIB or RRC message). For example, the UE may receive the satellite ephemeris via one or more configuration parameters from the base station. The satellite ephemeris may indicate a state vector indicating the coordinates of the satellite. The satellite ephemeris may indicate an orbital velocity of the satellite. In another example, the satellite ephemeris may comprise one or more Kepler orbit elements or orbital elements or Keplerian elements, e.g., semi-major axis, eccentricity, argument of periapsis, longitude of ascending node, inclination, and true anomaly at epoch time of the satellite. The UE may determine/calculate/compute/estimate the location of the satellite based on the satellite ephemeris. For example, the UE may determine/calculate/deduce/compute/estimate the Cartesian coordinates of the satellite at any given time instant using the satellite ephemeris.
[0235] In an example, the satellite ephemeris may be periodically broadcast by the satellite as part of system information (e.g., RRC message or SIB). The system information message/signal/command (e.g., SIB) may comprise an indication indicating the rate at which the calculation of RTT performed by the UE based on the satellite ephemeris should be updated. In an example, the UE may adjust the calculated RTT during a timer period based on the indicated rate. The timer period may indicate a duration between two consecutive receptions of the satellite ephemeris by the UE. [0236] In an example, the satellite ephemeris may not accurately provide the location of the satellite if the periodicity during which the satellite ephemeris is broadcast is relatively long. For example, the location of the satellite determined by the UE may be inaccurate due to an expiry of the satellite ephemeris. The periodicity of the satellite ephemeris broadcast may be set such that the satellite ephemeris may be updated before expiry. The periodicity of the satellite ephemeris broadcast may, for example, depend on altitude of the satellite. For example, the periodicity of the satellite ephemeris broadcast may be larger for a GEO satellite than the periodicity of the satellite ephemeris broadcast for a LEO satellite. The periodicity of the satellite ephemeris broadcast may further depend on velocity of the satellite. For example, a UE on earth may have visibility of at least two satellites. The at least two satellites may be a first satellite and a second satellite. The first satellite may move at/with a first velocity. The second satellite may move at/with a second velocity. The first velocity may be greater/higher than the second velocity. The periodicity of the satellite ephemeris broadcast may be smaller for the first satellite than the periodicity of the satellite ephemeris for the second satellite. The satellite ephemeris broadcast may increase signaling overhead. The satellite ephemeris broadcast may increase the communication latency in an NTN.
[0237] In an example, the satellite ephemeris may not accurately provide the location of the satellite when required. For example, the location of the satellite determined by the UE may be accurate at the time the UE receives the satellite ephemeris but may be inaccurate by the time the UE uses the determined satellite location, for example, for random-access preamble transmission (e.g., MSG1), or random-access MSG3 transmission, or MSG5 transmission. [0238] In an example, the satellite ephemeris may not accurately provide the location of the satellite if the movement of the satellite gradually drifts from the predicted orbital movement at the UE using the satellite ephemeris.
[0239] In an example, the satellite ephemeris data may provide the UE with a correction margin to help the UE compensate for the inaccuracy of the satellite ephemeris data. In an example, the UE may use the correction margin of the satellite ephemeris data to partially account for the drift of the satellite from the orbit of the satellite.
[0240] In an example, a reference location of a cell may be broadcast as a part of RRC message (e.g., RRCReconfiguration message, SIB). The reference location may describe a coordination in a geographic shape. The geographic shape may be ellipsoid point. The ellipsoid point may be a point on the surface of the ellipsoid. The ellipsoid point may comprise at least one of degrees of longitude, degrees of latitude, and sign of latitude (e.g., north, or south). [0241] In an example, the reference location of a cell may be provided via quasi-earth fixed cell. The UE may calculate the distance between the UE and the reference location of a cell. The location of the UE may be based on GNSS positioning information.
[0242] In an example, a reference location of a serving cell may be used for measurement rule in
RRC_I DLE/I NACTIVE state. The UE in RRCJ DLE/INACTIVE state may calculate the distance between the UE and the reference location of the serving cell. For example, the UE may choose not to perform intra-frequency measurements if the distance between UE and the serving cell reference location is shorter than a threshold. In an another example, the UE may choose not to perform inter-frequency measurements if the distance between UE and the serving cell reference location is shorter than a threshold.
[0243] In an example, a reference location of a serving cell and a reference location of a OHO candidate target cell may be used for OHO execution condition. The UE state may calculate the distance between the UE and reference location of the serving cell. The UE may calculate the distance between the UE and reference location of the OHO candidate target cell. For example, the UE may perform OHO to the OHO candidate target cell if the distance between UE and a reference location of the serving cell becomes larger than a first threshold and the distance between UE and a reference location of the OHO candidate cell becomes shorter than a second threshold. The reference location of the serving cell, reference location of the OHO candidate target cell, the first threshold, and the second threshold may be provided in an RRC message (e.g., RRCReconfiguration message, SIB).
[0244] In an example, a Timing Advance (e.g., in NTN 5G NR) may be based on the orthogonal frequency-division multiple access (OFDMA) as the multi-access scheme in the uplink. The transmissions from different wireless devices in a cell/beam may need to be time-aligned at the gNB/eNB and/or the satellite to maintain uplink orthogonality. Time alignment may be achieved by using different timing advance (TA) values at different UEs to compensate for their different propagation delays or RTT. In an example, the transmissions from different UEs in a cell/beam may need to be time-aligned at the gNB/eNB. The TA value may comprise the service link delay and the feeder link delay. In another example, the transmissions from different UE in a cell/beam may need to be time-aligned at the satellite. The TA value may comprise the service link delay. In another example, the transmissions from different UE in a cell/beam may need to be time-aligned at a non-terrestrial point on the feeder link. The TA value may comprise the service link delay and a non-zero fraction of the feeder link delay. In another example, the transmissions from different UE in a cell/beam may need to be time-aligned at a non-terrestrial point on the service link. The TA value may comprise a non-zero fraction of the service link delay.
[0245] In NTNs, the size of the cells/beams may be larger than the size of cells in terrestrial networks. For example, the maximum footprint of GEO NTN cell/beam may be 3500 kilometers and the maximum footprint of LEO NTN cell/beam may be 1000 kilometers. The size of cell of the terrestrial network may be less than a kilometer to a few kilometers. Different UEs in NTN may experience different propagation delays between the satellite and the UE due to the large footprint of the beam/cell. Different UEs in NTN may experience different propagation delays between the NTN gateway and the UE due to the large footprint of the beam/cell. Different UEs in NTN may experience different propagation delays between the gNB/eNB and the UE due to the large footprint of the cell/beam.
[0246] A differential delay between two UEs may indicate the difference between the one way propagation delay of the service link for the two UEs. A maximum differential delay may indicate the difference between the maximum one way delay (i.e., one way propagation delay experienced by a UE that is located at a point farthest away from the satellite) and the minimum one way delay (i.e., one way propagation delay experienced by a UE that is located at a point that is closest to the satellite) of/in the service link. For example, a UE that is at/close to the cell/beam center may be at a point that is closest to the satellite. A UE that is at/close to the cell/beam edge/boundary may be at a point that is farthest away from the satellite. The maximum differential delay for a LEO satellite based NTN may be 3.18 milliseconds. The maximum differential delay for a GEO satellite based NTN may be 10.3 milliseconds. The maximum differential delay in a terrestrial network may be less than one millisecond. The base station may receive randomaccess preambles transmitted by different NTN UEs at/in/on the same RACH occasion at different times based on the differential delay between the UEs.
[0247] In an example, the base station may use an expanded preamble reception window when operating in an NTN to receive random-access preambles transmitted in/on/at the same RACH occasion. For example, the base station may use a preamble reception window that starts from [RACH occasion timing + 2*minimum one way propagation delay] and end at [RACH occasion +2*maximum one way propagation delay]. Using an expanded preamble reception window may increase the time gap between two consecutive supported RACH occasions. For example, the time gap between two consecutive supported RACH occasions may be greater than 2*(maximum differential delay). A limited number of PRACH configurations (e.g., 3 for GEO satellite based NTNs) may support the time gap between two consecutive supported RACH occasions to be greater than 2*(maximum differential delay). Based on the network traffic type, the limited number of PRACH configurations may support a small number of UEs in a given area, i.e., the limited number of PRACH configurations may support a small UE density. For example, the supported UE density may be 51 UEs per square kilometer when each UE accesses the RACH once every 10 minutes for an NTN served by a LEO satellite with a cell/beam coverage area of 26000 square kilometers. In an example, the UEs may pre-compensate random-access preamble transmission based on a TA value to compensate for the long RTT to allow for a smaller preamble reception window at the base station (e.g., 1 ms). This may allow for a larger number of UE density (e.g., 60,000 UEs per square kilometer). In an example, the random-access procedure may be a four-step random access procedure. In an example, the random-access procedure may be a two-step random access procedure.
[0248] FIG. 21A and FIG. 21A illustrate examples of received signal strength when UE is in terrestrial network and NTN.
[0249] FIG. 21A illustrates an example that UE1 locates near cell center and UE2 locates at cell edge in terrestrial network. The received signal strength (e.g., RSRP) decreases when a UE moves from cell center to cell edge. The difference of received signal strength between the UE1 and UE2 may be clear.
[0250] FIG. 21 B illustrates an example that UE1 locates near cell center and UE2 locates at cell edge in NTN. The difference of received signal strength between the UE1 and UE2 may be smaller than the case in terrestrial network, as illustrated in FIG. 21A. In NTN, the high received signal strength may not mean that the UE is at cell center. For example, UE at cell edge may have high received signal strength.
[0251] FIG. 22 illustrates an example of an NTN. The gNB depicted in FIG. 22 may be subdivided into non-NTN infrastructure gNB functions and an NTN Service Link provisioning System. The NTN infrastructure shown in FIG. 22 may be (thought of being) subdivided into an NTN Service Link provisioning System and an NTN Control function. The NTN Service Link provisioning System may comprise one or more NTN payloads and NTN Gateways. The NTN payload may be embarked on a spaceborne (or airborne) vehicle. The NTN payload may provide a structure, power, commanding, telemetry, and /or attitude control for the satellite. The NTN payload may provide an appropriate thermal environment and/or radiation shielding. The NTN Service Link provisioning System may map the NR-Uu radio protocol over radio resources of the NTN infrastructure (e.g., beams, channels, Tx power, and the like). The NTN control function may control the spaceborne (or airborne) vehicle(s). The NTN control function may control one or more radio resources of the NTN infrastructure (e.g., NTN payload(s) and NTN Gateway(s)). The NTN control function may provide control data, e.g., satellite ephemeris, to the non-NTN infrastructure gNB functions of the gNB.
[0252] The NTN may provide non-terrestrial access to the UE by means of an NTN payload and an NTN Gateway, depicting a service link between the NTN payload and the UE, and a feeder link between the NTN Gateway and the NTN payload. The NTN payload may (also) be referred to as a satellite.
[0253] The NTN payload may transparently forward a radio protocol received from the UE (e.g., via the service link) to the NTN Gateway (e.g., via the feeder link) and vice-versa. The following connectivity may be supported by the NTN payload:
- a gNB may serve multiple (e.g., more than one, plurality, and the like) NTN payloads;
- an NTN payload may be served by multiple (e.g., more than one, plurality, and the like) gNBs.
[0254] The NTN payload may change a carrier frequency, before re-transmitting it on the service link, and vice versa (e.g., respectively on the feeder link).
[0255] For NTN, the following may apply in addition to Network Identities:
- a Tracking Area may correspond to a fixed geographical area. Any respective mapping may be configured in a radio access network (RAN);
- a mapped cell identity (ID).
[0256] Non-Geosynchronous orbit (NGSO) may include Low Earth Orbit at altitude approximately between 300 km and 1500 km. NGSO may include Medium Earth Orbit at altitude approximately between 7000 km and 25000 km. [0257] At least three types of service links may be supported:
- earth-fixed (system/service link/cell/cell system): provisioned by beam(s) continuously covering the same geographical areas a plurality of (e.g. , all) the time (e.g. , the case of GSO satellites);
- quasi-Earth-fixed (system/service link/cell/cell system): provisioned by beam(s) covering one geographic area for a limited period and a different geographic area during another period (e.g., a case of NGSO satellites generating steerable beams);
- earth-moving (system/service link/cell/cell system): provisioned by beam(s) whose coverage area slides over the Earth surface (e.g., a case of NGSO satellites generating fixed or non-steerable beams).
[0258] With NGSO satellites, the gNB may provide either quasi-Earth-fixed cell coverage or Earth-moving cell coverage. The gNB operating with GSO satellite may provide Earth fixed cell coverage.
[0259] The UE supporting NTN may be GNSS-capable.
[0260] In case of NGSO NTN, a service link switch may refer to a change of serving satellite.
[0261] In an NTN, the UE may be configured to report a timing advance (TA) of the UE. The UE may be configured to report the TA, for example, during random-access procedure in RRC_I DLE and/or RRC_I NACTI VE state. The UE may be configured to report the TA, for example, during random-access procedure in RRC_CONNECTED state (e.g., using event-triggered reporting; for RRC re-establishment procedure, if an indication is broadcasted by the target cell's SI; for handover, the UE may trigger TA report if the target cell indicates the TA report in a handover command).
[0262] To accommodate the long propagation delay, user plane procedures may be adapted. For example, for downlink, HARQ feedback may be enabled or disabled per HARQ process. For example, for uplink, the UE may be configured with a HARQ mode A or HARQ mode B per HARQ process. For example, a maximum number of HARQ processes may be extended to 32. For example, value ranges of MAC (e.g., sr-ProhibitTimer and configuredGrantTimef), RLC (e.g., t-Reassembly) and PDCP (e.g., discardTimer and t-reordering layer timers may be extended.
[0263] For example, the gNB may ensure proper configuration of HARQ feedback (e.g., enabled or disabled) for HARQ processes used by a semi persistent scheduling (SPS) configuration and of HARQ mode for HARQ processes used by a configured grant (CG) configuration.
[0264] If a logical channel is configured with allowedHARQ-mode, the logical channel may (only) be mapped to a HARQ process with a same HARQ mode.
[0265] To accommodate the long propagation delays, several NR timings involving DL-UL timing interaction may be enhanced by the support of two scheduling offsets: Woffset and /cmac. [0266] Timing relationships modified for NTN using Koffset may be transmission timing of DOI scheduled PUSCH including CSI transmission on PUSCH, transmission timing of random-access response (RAR) grant or fal IbackRAR grant scheduled PUSCH, timing of the first PUSCH transmission opportunity in type-2 configured grant, transmission timing of HARQ-ACK on physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) including HARQ-ACK on PUCCH to message B (MsgB) in 2-step random access, transmission timing of PDCCH ordered physical random access channel (PRACH), timing of the adjustment of uplink transmission timing upon reception of a corresponding timing advance command, transmission timing of aperiodic sounding reference signal (SRS), and/or CSI reference resource timing.
[0267] /cmac may be a scheduling offset supported in NTN for MAC CE timing relationships enhancement. The /cmac may be provided by the network (e.g., via SIB, RRC configuration, and the like) in response to downlink and uplink frame timing not being aligned at the g N B . The /cmac may be needed for UE action and assumption on downlink configuration indicated by a MAC-CE command in PDSCH. The Kmac may be used in beam failure recovery, where after a PRACH transmission in uplink slot n the UE monitors the corresponding PDCCH starting from downlink slot "n + /cmac +4" within a corresponding RAR window.
[0268] In response to a UE being provided with a /cmac, when the UE transmits a PUCCH with HARQ-ACK information in uplink slot n corresponding to a PDSCH carrying a MAC CE command on a downlink configuration, the UE action and assumption on the downlink configuration may be applied starting from the first slot that is after slot n +
Figure imgf000052_0001
the SCS configuration for the PUCCH.
[0269] To accommodate long propagation delays experienced in NTN on both service link and feeder link, the UE may (be able to) perform time pre-compensation for (all) uplink transmissions (e.g., PRACH preamble transmissions, uplink transmissions during the RRC_CONNECTED-state, and the like). To perform the pre-compensation, the UE may be assisted by GNSS (e.g., in/within the UE). To perform the pre-compensation, the UE may be assisted by the network (e.g., gNB). The gNB may periodically broadcast NTN assistance information. The NTN assistance information may comprise serving satellite ephemeris. The NTN assistance information may comprise higher layer Common-TA- related parameters. The higher layer Common-TA-related parameters may be used to calculate the common round-trip delay (RTD) e.g. delay on the feeder link.
[0270] The following formula for TA calculation may be applied by the UE for PRACH preamble transmission and in RRC_CONNECTED state: TTA =
Figure imgf000052_0002
may be a timing advance (or a timing advance value) between downlink and uplink, and AfTAoffset may be a fixed offset used to calculate the timing advance. For example, for msgA transmission on PUSCH, A/T = 0 may be used by the UE.
Figure imgf000052_0003
an may be network-controlled common
Figure imgf000052_0004
include any timing offset considered necessary by the network (e.g. feeder link delay/delay of the feeder link). A/JA an may be derived from higher-layer parameters (e.g., TACommon, TACommonDrift, and TACommonDriftVariation) if configured, otherwise
Figure imgf000052_0005
= 0. A/TA E adj may be self-estimated TA by the UE to pre-compensate for delay of the service link (e.g., service link delay). A/TA E adjmay be computed by the UE based on a position of the UE and serving satellite-ephemeris-related higher-layers parameters if configured, otherwise A/T^E adj = 0. Tc may be a NR basic time unit.
[0271] The UE may (be capable to) use an acquired GNSS position (of the UE) and serving satellite ephemeris information (when provided by the network) to calculate frequency pre-compensation to counter shift instantaneous Doppler shift experienced on the service link. The pre-compensation of the instantaneous Doppler shift experienced on the service link may be performed by the UE. Management of Doppler shift experienced over the feeder link as well as any transponder frequency error whether it is introduced in Downlink or Uplink may be network implementation.
[0272] The network (e.g., gNB) may broadcast multiple Tracking Area Codes per PLMN in an NTN cell. A tracking area code change in the System Information may be under network control, e.g., it may not be exactly synchronized with real-time illumination of beams on ground. The UE may determine a network type (e.g., terrestrial or nonterrestrial) implicitly by the existence of scheduling information of SIB19 in SIB1. Non-NTN capable UEs may be prevented from accessing an NTN cell.
[0273] The satellite ephemeris (or NTN ephemeris) may be divided into serving cell's satellite ephemeris and neighboring cell's satellite ephemeris.
[0274] At least in the quasi-earth fixed cell scenario, the UE may perform time-based and location-based cell selection/reselection. Timing information and location information associated to a (NTN) cell may be provided via system information (e.g., SIB, NTN-specific SIB, and the like). The timing information may refer to a time when a serving cell may stop serving a geographical area. The location information may refer to a reference location of the serving cell or neighboring cells. The location information may be used to assist cell reselection in NTN with, for example, a condition based on the distance between the UE and the reference location of the serving cell and/or neighbor cells. The UE may support mobility between radio access technologies based on different orbit (GSO, NGSO at different altitude, and the like).
[0275] A feeder link switch over may be a procedure where the feeder link is changed from a source NTN Gateway to a target NTN Gateway for a specific NTN payload. The feeder link switch over may be a Transport Network Layer procedure. Both hard and soft feeder link switch over may be applicable to NTN.
[0276] A feeder link switch over may result in transferring an established connection for affected UE between two gNBs. For soft feeder link switch over, an NTN payload may be able to connect to more than one NTN Gateway during a given period, e.g., a temporary overlap may be ensured during a transition between the feeder links. For hard feeder link switch over, an NTN payload may only connect to one NTN Gateway at any given time, e.g., a radio link interruption may occur during a transition between the feeder links.
[0277] An NTN Control function may determine a point in time when a feeder link switch over between two gNBs is performed. A transfer of the affected UEs’ context between the two gNBs at feeder link switch over may be performed by means of either NG based or Xn based handover. The transfer may depend on the gNBs' implementation and configuration information provided to the gNBs by the NTN Control function. [0278] During mobility between NTN and Terrestrial Network, a UE may not be required to connect to both NTN and Terrestrial Network at the same time. The mobility between NTN and Terrestrial Network may be referred to as NTN- Terrestrial Network hand-over. NTN-Terrestrial Network hand-over may refer to mobility in both directions, e.g. , from NTN to Terrestrial Network (hand-in) and from Terrestrial Network to NTN (hand-out).
[0279] A UE may receive a conditional handover (OHO) configuration. The OHO configuration may be a conditional reconfiguration. The OHO configuration may include one or more OHO candidate cells. Each OHO candidate cell may comprise OHO execution condition. The UE may execute OHO to the Oho candidate cell based on the comprised OHO execution condition. For example, UE can execute OHO to a OHO candidate cell if all the configured OHO execution condition(s) of the OHO candidate cell is fulfilled. Up to two OHO execution conditions can be configured for a OHO candidate cell.
[0280] The OHO execution condition for a OHO candidate cell may comprise: a cell quality-based OHO execution condition (event A3, event A4, event A5); and/or atime-based OHO execution condition (e.g., condEvent T1, or event T1); and/or a location-based OHO execution condition (e.g., event D1).
[0281] A cell quality-based OHO execution condition may be based on measurement results of a cell quality (e.g., RSRP, RSRQ, or SI NR).
[0282] In an example, event A3 may be satisfied if measured cell quality of the OHO candidate cell is offset higher than the SpOell (e.g., POell, or SPCell). The event A3 may be condEvent A3.
[0283] In an example, event A4 may be satisfied if measured cell quality of the OHO candidate cell is higher than a threshold. The event A4 may be condEvent A4.
[0284] In an example, event A5 may be satisfied if measured cell quality of the SpOell (e.g., POell, or SPCell) is lower than a first threshold and measured cell quality of the OHO candidate cell is higher than a second threshold. The event A5 may be condEvent A5.
[0285] A time-based OHO execution condition (e.g., event T1, or condEvent T1) may comprise a time period. The time period may comprise a starting time point of the time period and a time duration of the time period. End time point of the time period may be the time duration after the starting time point of the time period. For example, the time period may comprise a starting time point as 9:00 UTO and a time duration as 10 minutes. Then the time period may start at 9:00 UTO and lasts 10 minutes. The time period may be from 9:00 UTO to 9:10 UTO. The time-based OHO execution condition may be satisfied when the time measured at UE is after the starting time point of the time period and before the end time point of the time period.
[0286] A location-based OHO execution condition may comprise a first reference location which is associated to serving cell (e.g., POell, SPCell) and a second reference location which is associated to the CHO candidate cell (e.g., CHO target cell). The location-based CHO execution condition may be satisfied when the distance between the UE and the first reference location is higher than a first threshold and the distance between the UE and the second reference location is lower than a second threshold. [0287] A time-based CHO execution condition or a location-based CHO execution condition may be configured together with a cell quality-based CHO execution condition (e.g., event A3, event A4, or A5). A time-based CHO execution condition and a location-based CHO execution may not be configured together for a CHO candidate cell. [0288] The (NTN) base station/network may configure:
- multiple SMTCs in parallel per carrier and/or for a given set of cells depending on UE capabilities using propagation delay difference, feeder link delay, and/or serving/neighbour satellite cell ephemeris; and/or
- measurement gaps using a same propagation delay difference as computed for SMTC.
[0289] The adjustment of SMTCs may be possible under network control for connected mode and under UE control based on UE location information and ephemeris for idle/inactive modes.
[0290] Upon network request, after AS security in connected mode is established, a UE may report coarse UE location information (e.g., X most Significant Bits of GNSS coordinates of the UE with accuracy around 2km level) to the NG-RAN without receiving any prior explicit user consent. If user consent is available at the UE, the UE may report the coarse UE location information. Else, the UE may respond "no coarse GNSS location available". Periodic location reporting may be configured by gNB to obtain UE location update of mobile UE in RRC_CONNECTED mode/state. [0291] The base station (e.g., gNB) may transmit/broadcast the NTN-specific SIB. The NTN-specific SIB may be, for example, SIB19. The NTN-specific SIB may comprise satellite assistance information. For example, the NTN-specific SIB may comprise ephemeris data. For example, the NTN-specific SIB may comprise common TA parameters. For example, the NTN-specific SIB may comprise common TA parameters. For example, the NTN-specific SIB may comprise k-offset. For example, the NTN-specific SIB may comprise a validity duration for UL synchronization information. For example, the NTN-specific SIB may comprise an epoch time. For example, the NTN-specific SIB may comprise a reference location of a (NTN) cell provided via NTN quasi-Earth fixed system.
[0292] The NTN-specific SIB may comprise a t-service. The t-service may indicate time information on when a (NTN) cell provided via NTN quasi-Earth fixed system is going to stop serving an area the (NTN) cell is currently covering. The t-service may count a number of universal time coordinated (UTC) seconds in 10 ms units since 00:00:00 on Gregorian calendar date 1 January, 1900 (midnight between Sunday, December31, 1899 and Monday, January 1, 1900).
[0293] Upon receiving the NTN-specific SIB, the UE may instruct lower layers to start or restart ntn- UlSyncValidityDuration from the subframe/slot indicated by the epoch time. The UE may attempt to re-acquire the NTN- specific SIB before end of a duration indicated by rrtn-UISyncVa/idityDuration and the epoch time.
[0294] Support for bandwidth limited low complexity (BL) UEs, UEs in enhanced coverage, and/or narrowband Internet-of-Things (NB-loT) UEs over NTN may be applicable. UEs not supporting NTN may be barred from an NTN cell.
[0295] In NTN, BL UEs, UEs in enhanced coverage, and NB-loT wire UEs with GNSS capability may be supported. [0296] To accommodate long propagation delays in NTN, increased timer values and window sizes, or delayed starting times may be supported for the physical layer and/or for higher layers. [0297] UL segmented transmission may be supported for UL transmission with repetitions in NTN. The UE may apply UE pre-compensation per segment of UL transmission of PUSCH/PUCCH/PRACH for eMTC and NPUSCH/NPRACH for NB-loT from one segment to a next segment.
[0298] To accommodate the long propagation delays, several loT timings involving DL-UL timing interaction may be enhanced by the support of two scheduling offsets: ^offset and Kmac- ^offset may be a round-trip time between the UE and an uplink time synchronization reference point (RP). ^offset may correspond to a sum of a service link RTT and a common TA if indicated. Kmac may be a round trip time between the RP and the eNB/gNB.
[0299] DL and UL may frame aligned at the uplink time synchronization RP with an offset given by NTA offset.
[0300] Timing relationships that may be modified for NB-loT using ^offset are summarized as follows: a transmission timing of NPDOCH scheduled NPUSCH format 1 ; a transmission timing of random access response (RAR) grant scheduled NPUSCH format 1 ; a transmission timing of HARQ-ACK on NPUSCH format 2; a transmission timing of NPDCCH ordered NB-loT physical random access channel (NPRACH); a timing of the adjustment of uplink transmission timing upon reception of a corresponding timing advance command.
[0301] Timing relationships that may be modified for eMTC using ^offset are summarized as follows:
- a transmission timing of MPDCCH scheduled PUSCH;
- a transmission timing of random access response (RAR) grant scheduled PUSCH;
- a timing of the first PUSCH transmission opportunity in UL SPS;
- a transmission timing of HARQ-ACK on physical uplink control channel (PUCCH);
- a transmission timing of MPDCCH ordered physical random access channel (PRACH);
- a timing of the adjustment of uplink transmission timing upon reception of a corresponding timing advance command;
- a transmission timing of aperiodic sounding reference signal (SRS);
- a CSI reference resource timing;
- a transmission timing of a preamble retransmission.
[0302] For initial access, information of ^offset maY be carried in system information. Update of the ^offset after initial access may be supported. A UE-specific ^offset maY be provided and updated by network/gNB/eNB/base station with MAC CE.
[0303] mac is a scheduling offset that may be supported in NTN for MAC CE timing relationships enhancement. mac maY be provided by the network if downlink and uplink frame timing are not aligned at eNB. Kmac may be needed for UE action and assumption on downlink configuration indicated by a MAC-CE command in (N)PDSCH. The mac maY als° be used in pre-configured uplink resources, in response to the UE initiating an (N)PUSCH transmission using pre-configured uplink resources ending in subframe n, the UE shall start or restart to monitor the N/MPDCCH from DL subframe n + 4 + Kmac. [0304] For a serving cell, a network/eN B/g N B may broadcast ephemeris information and common TA parameters for the UE to autonomously perform TA pre-compensation. For the serving cell, the network/gNB/eNB may broadcast ephemeris information and common TA parameters for the UE to autonomously perform frequency shift precompensation.
[0305] The UE may acquire a GNSS position of the UE before connecting to an NTN cell to ensure the UE is synchronized. The UE may acquire satellite ephemeris and common TA before connected to the NTN cell to ensure the UE is synchronized. Before performing random-access, the UE may autonomously pre-compensate a TA for the long propagation delay as well as the frequency doppler shift by considering the common TA, position of the UE and a satellite position through the satellite ephemeris.
[0306] In RRC_CONNECTED mode, the UE may continuously update the TA and frequency pre-compensation. The UE may not be expected to perform GNSS acquisition. One or more timers may ensure that the UE does not perform any transmissions due to outdated satellite ephemeris, common TA, or GNSS position. In connected mode, upon outdated satellite ephemeris and common TA, the UE may re-acquire one or more broadcasted parameters. Upon outdated GNSS position the UE may move to RRCJDLE mode.
[0307] The UE may be configured to report TA at initial access or in the RRC_CONEECTED mode. In the RRC_CONEECTED mode, triggered reporting of the TA may be supported.
[0308] The UE may be capable of using an acquired GNSS position of UE and the satellite ephemeris information (when provided by the network/gNB/eNB) to calculate frequency pre-compensation to counter shift an instantaneous Doppler shift experienced on a service link.
[0309] The management of Doppler shift experienced over a feeder link as well as any transponder frequency error whether introduced in DL or UL may be left to network implementation.
[0310] As a satellite moves on a specified orbit, for example, in case of a NGSO satellite, a satellite beams coverage area may move and cover different portions of a geographical area due to an orbital movement of the satellite. As a consequence, a UE located in a concerned geographical area may experience a situation of discontinuous coverage, due to, for example, a sparse satellites constellation deployment.
[0311] To enable the UE to save power during periods of no coverage, the network/gNB/eNB may provide satellite assistance information (e.g. satellite ephemeris parameters, a start-time of upcoming satellite's coverage, end-time of satellite's coverage, and the like) ephemeris parameters to enable the UE to predict when coverage will be provided by upcoming satellites. Predicting out of coverage and in coverage may be up to UE implementation. When out of coverage, the UE may not be required to perform access stratum functions.
[0312] A feeder link switch over may be a procedure where a feeder link is changed from a source NTN Gateway to a target NTN Gateway for a specific NTN payload. The feeder link switch over may be a Transport Network Layer procedure. Both hard and soft feeder link switch over may be applicable to NTN.
[0313] A feeder link switch over may result in transferring an established connection for affected UE between two eNBs/gNBs/base stations. [0314] For soft feeder link switch over, an NTN payload may be able to connect to more than one NTN Gateway during a given period, e.g. , a temporary overlap may be ensured during transition between feeder links. For hard feeder link switch over, an NTN payload may only connect to one NTN Gateway at any given time, e.g., a radio link interruption may occur during a transition between the feeder links.
[0315] An NTN control function may determine a point in time when the feeder link switch over between two eNBs/gNBs/base stations is performed. For BL UEs and UEs in enhanced coverage, transfer of the affected UEs’ contexts between the two eNBs/gNBs/base stations at the feeder link switch over may be performed by means of either S1 based or X2 based handover. The transfer may depend on implementations of the two eNBs/gNBs/base stations and configuration information provided to the two eNBs/gNBs/base stations by the NTN control function.
[0316] UE in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state may perform an idle/inactive measurement procedure. The idle/inactive measurement procedure may refer to a measurement procedure comprising an idle/inactive measurement performed during the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state and/or a transmission of idle/inactive measurement result(s) of the idle/inactive measurement to a base station. For example, the idle/inactive measurement procedure may be referred to as an EMR, an EMR procedure, an RRC idle/inactive measurement, and/or the like. The idle/inactive measurement procedure may specify measurement(s) to be performed and stored by a UE in RRCJDLE and RRC_INACTIVE when the UE has an idle/inactive measurement configuration. The UE may perform the idle/inactive measurement procedure to support fast CA/DC setup after transitioning from RRC idle state or RRC inactive state to RRC connected state.
[0317] For example, in the example embodiments, an idle/inactive measurement configuration may refer to a measurement configuration comprising one or more parameters indicating at least one measurement object (e.g., a carrier configured in a carrier frequency) and a measurement quantity (e.g., report quantity) of the at least one measurement object. In an example, the UE may measure one or more reference signals (e.g., SSB and/or CSI-RS) of the at least one measurement object and/or may determine the measurement quantity (e.g., RSRP value, RSRQ value, and/or RSSI value) measured on the one or more reference signals of the measurement object.
[0318] For example, in the example embodiments, an idle/inactive measurement result may refer to a measurement result and/or a measurement (or report) quantity (e.g., RSRP value, RSRQ value, and/or RSSI value) that the UE determines by measuring a measurement object (e.g., performing an idle/inactive measurement procedure) according the an idle/inactive measurement configuration while the UE in RRC_I DLE and RRC_I NACTIVE. For example, in the example embodiments, an idle/inactive measurement result may refer to a measurement quantity (e.g., RSRP value, RSRQ value, and/or RSSI value) that the UE determines by measuring a measurement object (e.g., performing an idle/inactive measurement procedure) according an idle/inactive measurement configuration.
[0319] The UE may receive, from a base station, a message comprising an idle/inactive measurement configuration. For example, the idle/inactive measurement configuration may be referred to as an EMR configuration, an RRC idle/inactive measurement configuration, and/or the like. For example, the message may be an RRC release message. The UE may transition to the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, e.g., in response to the RRC release message (e.g., comprising a suspendCofig). The UE may perform idle/inactive measurements using the idle/inactive measurement configuration while the UE is in RRC idle state or RRC inactive state. After performing the idle/inactive measurements, the UE may transmit, to a base station, an indication indicating that the idle/inactive measurement results are available at the UE. Then the base station may request the UE to report the idle/inactive measurement results. In response to receiving the request, the UE may transmit the idle/inactive measurement results to the base station. Based on the idle/inactive measurement results, the base station may configure the carrier aggregation or multi-radio access technology dual connectivity (MRDO) to the UE after the UE transitions to the RRC connected state. [0320] The MRDC configuration may include NR-NR dual connectivity (the master node and the secondary node(s) are NR gNBs), E-UTRA— NR dual connectivity (the master node is E-UTRA ng-eNB and the secondary node(s) is(are) NR gNB(s)), and NR— E-UTRA dual connectivity (the master node is NR gNB and the secondary node is(are) E-UTRA ng-eNB(s).
[0321] If the UE receives an RRC release message from the base station, the RRC release message may comprise idle/inactive measurement configuration (e.g., measIdleConfigDedicated). Upon receiving the idle/inactive measurement configuration, the UE may store (e.g., keep) the idle/inactive measurement configuration in the idle/inactive measurement configuration UE variable (e.g., VarMeasIdleConfig).
[0322] The UE variable (e.g., VarMeasIdleConfig) in the example embodiments in the present disclosure may refer to a variable that the UE stores (e.g., keeps and/or maintain) for a (e.g., future) use in the operation. For example, a UE variable may comprise (e.g., stores, keeps, and/or maintain) one or more parameter values (e.g., each parameter value is associated with a respective parameter). For example, the UE may apply and/or use one or more parameter values stored (e.g., kept and/or maintained) in the UE variable for one or more procedures that the UE performs. For example, the UE may discard, release, remove, and/or abandon one or more parameter values from the UE variable that comprises (e.g., stores, keeps, and/or maintain) the one or more parameter values. The UE may not (e.g., may not be able to) recover a parameter value, e.g., once the UE discards (or releases, removes, deletes, and/or abandons) the parameter value from the UE variable. The UE may store (e.g., keep and/or maintain), in the UE variable, one or more parameter values that the UE receives in a message (e.g., RRC message) from a network (e.g., a base station). The network may store (e.g., keeps and/or maintain) the one or more parameter values that are the same as the one that UE stores in the UE variable. The UE and the network may be in sync to maintain the one or more parameter values. In the example embodiments in the present disclosure, storing (e.g., keeping, and/or maintain), in a UE variable, a parameter (e.g., a carrier) may refer to or interchangeable with storing (e.g., keeping, and/or maintain), in a UE variable, a parameter value (e.g., identifier of a carrier) of the parameter (e.g., the carrier). Likewise, for example, discarding (e.g., releasing, removing, deleting, and/or abandoning), from a UE variable, a parameter (e.g., a carrier) may refer to or interchangeable with discarding (e.g., releasing, removing, deleting, and/or abandoning), from a UE variable, a parameter value (e.g., identifier of a carrier) of the parameter (e.g., the carrier).
[0323] The idle/inactive measurement configuration may comprise at least one of: indication(s) of NR carrier(s) to be measured; indication(s) of E-UTRA carrier(s) to be measured; a timer value of idle/inactive measurement duration timer; and indication(s) of Validity area.
When the RRC release message comprises the idle/inactive measurement configuration, the value of the idle/inactive measurement duration timer may be in the idle/inactive measurement configuration as a mandatory parameter. The other parameters, NR carriers to be measured, E-UTRA carriers to be measured, and validity area, may be in the idle/inactive measurement configuration as an optional parameter(s).
[0324] In the disclosure, a validity area may be (e.g., refer to) a configuration and/or an information element (IE) that UE uses to validate measurement configuration(s) (e.g., idle/inactive measurement configuration(s)), e.g., configured for measurements during RRC IDLE and/or RRC INACTIVE. For example, UE may receive, from a base station, a message (e.g., RRC release message) comprising one or more validity areas and/or measurement configuration(s) (e.g., idle/inactive measurement conf igu ration (s)) . The one or more validity areas may be included in the message as a form of a list of validity areas (e.g., Valid ityAreaList) . A (e.g., each) validity area of the one or more validity area may comprise one or more parameters indicating a carrier frequency (e.g., parameter name: carrierFreq, parameter value: ARFCN Value) respective to the validity area and/or one or more cells (e.g., a list of validity cells, Valid ityCell List) respective to the validity area. For example, the one or more cells in the validity area may be configured with the carrier frequency in the validity area. The UE may invalidate the measurement configuration(s) in response to a camp-on cell is not included any of validity cell(s) included in all of validity area(s) (e.g., . the UE may release (e.g., abandon, discard, delete, and/or remove) the measurement configuration(s) in response to invalidating the measurement configuration(s). [0325] Upon receiving the RRC release message comprising the timer value of idle/inactive measurement duration timer, the UE may start the idle/inactive measurement duration timer with the timer value. While the idle/inactive measurement duration timer is running, other parameters in the idle/inactive measurement configuration, the NR carriers to be measured, E-UTRA carriers to be measured, and validity area are valid to be used or applied to the idle/inactive measurement procedure. After or in response to an expiry of the idle/inactive measurement duration timer, the UE may release the stored idle/inactive measurement configuration. In the example embodiments of the present disclosure, the idle/inactive measurement duration timer may be interchangeable with T331 timer.
[0326] The UE may update the idle/inactive measurement configuration, e.g., in response to selecting a cell when entering RRC idle state or RRC inactive state and/or in response to determining an update of system information (e.g., SIB4, or SIB11). While the T331 timer is running and the UE did not receive carriers (e.g., comprising at least one of NR carrier(s) and/or E-UTRA carrier(s)) to be measured from the RRC release message, the UE may store the carriers (e.g., comprising at least one of NR carrier(s) and/or E-UTRA carrier(s)) indicated by system information (e.g., SIB11) as the one to be measured from the system information (e.g., SIB11).
[0327] The UE may store or replace the E-UTRA carriers to be measured within the UE variable, e.g., if the UE receives, from a serving cell, system information (e.g., SIB11) and/or if the system information (e.g., SIB11) comprises idle/inactive measurement configuration (e.g., meas/dleConfigSIB indicating E-UTRA carriers to be measured. The UE may remove, from the UE variable, the E-UTRA carriers to be measured, if any, e.g., if the SIB11 does not include the E-UTRA carriers to be measured.
[0328] The UE may store or replace the NR carriers to be measured within the UE variable, e.g., if the UE receive, from a serving cell, system information (e.g., SIB11) and/or if the SIB11 comprises idle/inactive measurement configuration (e.g., meas/dleConfigSIB) indicating NR carriers to be measured. The UE may remove, from the UE variable, the NR carriers to be measured, if any, e.g., if the SIB11 does not include the NR carriers to be measured. [0329] In an example, UE may delete the SSB measurement configuration and store the SSB measurement configuration from the SIB11 into nrofSS-BlocksToAverage, absThreshSS-BlocksConsolidation, smte, ssb-ToMeasure, deriveSSB-lndexFromCell, and ss-RSSI-Measurement within SSB measurement configuration of the corresponding configuration of the stored carrier, e.g., if there is a stored carrier to be measured that does not contain an SSB measurement configuration (e.g., ssb-MeasConfig) received from the RRC release message, and/or if there is an NR carrier in SIB11 that has the same carrier frequency and subcarrier spacing as the stored carrier.
[0330] In an example, the UE may delete the SSB measurement configuration and stores the SSB measurement configuration from the SIB11 into nrofSS-BlocksToAverage, absThreshSS-BlocksConsolidation, smte, ssb-ToMeasure, deriveSSB-lndexFromCell, and ss-RSSI-Measurement within SSB measurement configuration of the corresponding configuration of the stored carrier, e.g., if there is a stored carrier to be measured that does not contain an SSB measurement configuration (e.g., ssb-MeasConfig) received from the RRC release message, and/or if there is a stored carrier to be measured that does not contain an SSB measurement configuration (e.g., ssb-MeasConfig) received from the RRC release message, and/or if there is an NR carrier in SIB4 that has the same carrier frequency and subcarrier spacing as the stored carrier.
[0331] If the UE enters (e.g., transition) RRC idle state or RRC inactive state in response to receiving the RRC release message, the UE may perform idle/inactive measurements on the NR carriers included in the idle/inactive measurement configuration and E-UTRA carriers included in the idle/inactive measurement configuration, e.g., while the T331 is running.
[0332] UE may perform idle/inactive measurements on the stored E-UTRA carriers to be measured that the UE supports NE-DC between the serving carrier and the E-UTRA carrier to be measured, e.g., if UE receives the SIB1 , broadcast by the serving cell, that comprises E-UTRA measurement indication (e.g., idleModeMeasurementsEUTRA) and/or if the UE has stored E-UTRA carriers to be measured.
[0333] For each stored E-UTRA carrier to be measured that the UE is performing measurements: if the E-UTRA report quantity indication of the carrier (e.g., reporiQuantitiesEUTRA) indicates RSRQ, the UE may determine RSRQ as the sorting quantity. If not indicated, the UE may determine RSRP as the sorting quantity; and if the E-UTRA cell list (e.g., measCellListEUTRA) is included, the UE may determine the cells identified by the cell list to be applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting. If the E-UTRA cell list is not included, the UE may determine up to N (e.g., maxCellMeas/dle) strongest identified cells, according to the sorting quantity based on the E- UTRA report quantity indication, to be applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting. [0334] The UE may derive the idle/inactive measurement results for the measurement quantities indicated by the E- UTRA report quantity indication for all cells applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting.
[0335] The UE may store the derived (or determined) idle/inactive measurement results as indicated by the E-UTRA report quantity within an idle/inactive measurement results UE variable (e.g., VarMeasIdleReport) in decreasing order of the sorting quantity. If E-UTRA quality threshold (e.g., qualityThresholdEUTRA) is configured, the UE may include the measurement results from the cells applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting whose RSRP/RSRQ measurement results are above the value(s) provided in the E-UTRA quality threshold. If the E-UTRA quality threshold is not configured, the UE may include the measurement results from all cells applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting.
[0336] UE may perform idle/inactive measurements on the stored NR carriers to be measured that the UE supports NR-DC between the serving carrier and the NR carrier to be measured, e.g., if UE receives the SIB1 , broadcast by the serving cell, that comprises NR measurement indication (e.g., idleModeMeasurementsNR) and/or if the UE has stored NR carriers to be measured.
[0337] For each stored NR carrier to be measured that the UE is performing measurements: if the NR report quantity indication of the carrier (e.g., reportQuantities) indicates RSRQ, the UE may determine RSRQ as the sorting quantity. If not indicated, the UE may determine RSRP as the sorting quantity; and if the NR cell list (e.g., measCe/IListNR) is included, the UE may determine the cells identified by the cell list to be applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting. If the NR cell list is not included, the UE may determine up to N (e.g., maxCellMeasIdle strongest identified cells, according to the sorting quantity based on the NR report quantity indication, to be applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting.
[0338] The UE may derive the idle/inactive measurement results for the measurement quantities indicated by the NR report quantity indication for all cells applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting.
[0339] The UE may store the derived (or determined) idle/inactive measurement results as indicated by the NR report quantity within the idle/inactive measurement results UE variable (e.g., VarMeasIdleReport) in decreasing order of the sorting quantity. If NR quality threshold (e.g., qualltyThresholdNR) is configured, the UE may include the measurement results from the cells applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting whose RSRP/RSRQ measurement results are above the value(s) provided in the NR quality threshold. If the NR quality threshold is not configured, the UE may include the measurement results from all cells applicable for idle/inactive measurement reporting.
[0340] The UE may derive beam measurements based on SS/PBCH block, e.g., the measurement configuration of the NR carrier to be measured comprises beam measurement configuration (e.g., beamMeasConfigldle), and/or the UE supports beam measurements of the carrier frequency.
[0341] The validity area list (e.g., ValidityAreaList) may comprise one or more validity areas (e.g., Valldi'tyArea). A (e.g., each) validity area of the one or more validity areas may comprise a respective carrier frequency. A (e.g., each) validity area of the one or more validity areas may comprise a respective list of cells (e.g., validityCellList) in the validity area. One or more cells in the list of cells of the validity area may be associated with the carrier frequency of the validity area. A cell in the list of cells may be indicated by an index, identity, or identifier (e.g., physical cell identity) of the cell. The UE may release the stored idle/inactive measurement configuration (e.g., whole or all idle/inactive measurement configurations stored in a UE variable (e.g., VarMeasIdleConfig) and/or received from the RRC release message and/or SIB) if:
UE performs (e.g., intra-RAT(intra-NR)) cell selection or cell reselection while the timer T331 is running; a serving frequency (e.g., a carrier frequency of a camp-on cell and/or a carrier frequency of a cell that the UE selects based on the cell selection procedure or cell reselection procedure) does not match with a carrier frequency in a (e.g., any) validity area of the one or more validity areas; and/or a serving frequency matches with a carrier frequency in at least one validity area of the one or more validity areas, a list of cells (e.g., validityCellList) is included in the at least one validity area, and the physical cell identity of a serving cell (e.g., a camp-on cell, and/or a cell that the UE selects based on the cell selection procedure or cell reselection procedure) does not match with any cell in the list of cells in the at least one validity area.
[0342] A camp-on cell in the disclosure may be (e.g., refer to) a cell that UE monitors system information (e.g., SIB) and/or paging information (e.g., Short Message) during RRC IDLE, RRC INACTIVE and/or RRC CONNECTED. For example, the UE performs a SIB acquisition and/or paging procedure in the camp-on cell during RRC IDLE, RRC INACTIVE and/or RRC CONNECTED. The camp-on cell may be (e.g., refer to) a cell that UE has selected (e.g., determined and/or chosen) after, during, and/or in response to the cell selection procedure (process) and/or cell reselection procedure (e.g., process). For example, UE performs a cell selection procedure and/or a cell reselection procedure to select (e.g., determine) a cell for monitoring system information (e.g., SIB) and/or paging information (e.g., Short Message) during RRC IDLE, RRC INACTIVE and/or RRC CONNECTED. The selected cell from the cell selection procedure and/or the cell reselection procedure may be referred to as a camp-on cell.
[0343] After performing cell selection or cell reselection, the UE may keep the idle/inactive measurement configuration, continue performing the measurements, and keep running the timer T331, e.g., validity area list comprises the serving cell and the timer T331 is running,
[0344] When UE performs RRC connection establishment procedure, RRC setup complete message may comprise an idle/inactive measurement information availability indication (e.g., idleMeasAvailable) if: the SIB1 contains NR measurement indication (e.g., idleModeMeasurementsNR) and the UE has NR idle/inactive measurement information (e.g., measurement results of NR carriers to be measured) in the idle/inactive measurement results UE variable (e.g., VarMeas/dleReport); or the SIB1 contains E-UTRA measurement indication (e.g., IdleModeMeasurementsE-UTRA) and the UE has E- UTRA idle/inactive measurement information (e.g., measurement results of E-UTRA carriers to be measured) in the idle/inactive measurement results UE variable (e.g., VarMeas/dleReport).
[0345] When UE performs RRC connection resume procedure, RRC resume complete message may comprise an idle/inactive measurement information availability indication (e.g., idleMeasAvailable) in response to receiving RRC resume message not comprising an idle/inactive measurement request indication (e.g., IdleModeMeasurementReq), if: the SIB1 contains NR measurement indication (e.g., idleModeMeasurementsNR) and the UE has NR idle/inactive measurement information (e.g., measurement results of NR carriers to be measured) in the idle/inactive measurement results UE variable (e.g., VarMeasIdleReport); or the SIB1 contains E-UTRA measurement indication (e.g., idleModeMeasurementsE-UTRA and the UE has E- UTRA idle/inactive measurement information (e.g., measurement results of E-UTRA carriers to be measured) in the idle/inactive measurement results UE variable (e.g., VarMeasIdleReport).
[0346] When UE performs RRC connection resume procedure, RRC resume complete message may comprise idle/inactive measurement result(s) of the idle/inactive measurement (e.g., measResultldleEUTRA and/or measResultldleNR) in response to receiving RRC resume message comprising the idle/inactive measurement request indication. The UE may discard the idle/inactive measurement result(s) of the idle/inactive measurement in the UE variable upon successful delivery of the RRC resume complete message confirmed by lower layers (e.g., MAC layer). [0347] When UE is in RRC connected state, UE information response message (e.g., UElnformationResponse message) may comprise idle/inactive measurement result(s) of the idle/inactive measurement (e.g., measResultldleEUTRA and/or measResultldleNR) in response to receiving UE information request message (e.g., UElnformationRequest message) comprising the idle/inactive measurement request indication. The UE may discard the idle/inactive measurement result(s) of the idle/inactive measurement in the UE variable upon successful delivery of the UE information response message confirmed by lower layers (e.g., MAC layer).
[0348] FIG. 23 illustrates an example of idle/inactive measurement information report. The UE in RRC connected state may receive RRC release message comprising idle/inactive measurement configuration. The idle/inactive measurement configuration may comprise NR/E-UTRA carriers to be measured, idle/inactive measurement duration timer, and validity area list. The UE may enter RRC idle state if the RRC release message does not comprise suspend configuration (e.g., suspendConfig). During in the RRC idle state, the UE may perform measurements on the carriers to be measured in the idle/inactive measurement configuration. After deriving idle/inactive measurement result(s) of the idle/inactive measurement, the UE may store the idle/inactive measurement results of the carriers to be measured in the UE variable. The UE may perform RRC connection establishment procedure and enter RRC connected state. During the RRC connection establishment procedure, the UE may include an indication, idleMeasAvailable, in the RRCRetupComplete message. The indication indicates that the UE has idle/inactive measurement information to report. While in RRC connected state, the UE may receive, from the base station, UElnformationRequest message comprising a request indication, idleModeMeasurementReq. The request indication may indicate the UE to report the idle/inactive measurement information. In response to receiving the indication, the UE may report the stored idle/inactive measurement information to the base station in the UElnformationResponse message.
[0349] FIG. 24 illustrates an example of idle/inactive measurement information report. The UE in RRC connected state may receive RRC release message comprising idle/inactive measurement configuration. The idle/inactive measurement configuration may comprise NR/E-UTRA carriers to be measured, idle/inactive measurement duration timer, and validity area list. The UE may enter RRC inactive state if the RRC release message comprises suspend configuration (e.g., suspendConfig). During in the RRC inactive state, the UE may perform idle/inactive measurements on the carriers to be measured in the idle/inactive measurement configuration. After deriving idle/inactive measurement result(s) of the idle/inactive measurement, the UE may store the idle/inactive measurement results of the carriers to be measured in the UE variable. The UE may trigger RRC connection resume procedure and transmit RRCResumeRequest message or RRCResumeRequestl message. The UE may receive RRCResume message comprising a request indication, idleModeMeasurementReq. The request indication may indicate the UE to report the idle/inactive measurement information. In response to receiving the request indication, the UE may transmit, to the base station, the RRCResumeComplete message comprising the stored idle/inactive measurement information.
[0350] FIG. 25 illustrates an example of idle/inactive measurement information report. The UE in RRC connected state may receive RRC release message comprising idle/inactive measurement configuration. The idle/inactive measurement configuration may comprise NR/E-UTRA carriers to be measured, idle/inactive measurement duration timer, and validity area list. The UE may enter RRC inactive state if the RRC release message comprises suspend configuration (e.g., suspendConfig). During in the RRC inactive state, the UE may perform measurements on the carriers to be measured in the idle/inactive measurement configuration. After deriving idle/inactive measurement result(s) of the idle/inactive measurement, the UE may store the idle/inactive measurement results of the carriers to be measured in the UE variable. The UE may perform RRC connection resume procedure and enter RRC connected state. During the RRC connection resume procedure, the UE may include an indication, idleMeasAvailable, in the RRCResumeComplete message. The indication indicates that the UE has idle/inactive measurement information to report. While in RRC connected state, the UE may receive, from the base station, UElnformationRequest message comprising a request indication, idleModeMeasurementReq. The request indication may indicate the UE to report the idle/inactive measurement information. In response to receiving the indication, the UE may report the stored idle/inactive measurement information to the base station in the UElnformationResponse message.
[0351] The UE may perform cell selection procedure in response to receiving RRC release message, initiation of the RRC connection re-establishment procedure, or performing the actions upon going to RRC idle state. The cell selection procedure may comprise performing initial cell selection or cell selection by leveraging stored information.
[0352] The UE may perform the initial cell selection if the UE have no prior knowledge of which RF channels are NR frequencies. Performing the initial cell selection may comprise: scanning all RF channels in the NR bands according to its capabilities to find a suitable cell; searching for the strongest cell of each frequency of neighbor frequencies, except for operation with shared spectrum channel access where the UE may search for the next strongest cell(s); and selecting, if a suitable cell is found, the suitable cell.
[0353] The neighbor frequencies may be the frequencies that the SIB4 comprises.
[0354] The cell selection by leveraging stored information may be based on stored information of frequencies and information on cell parameters, which SIB4 comprises, from previously received measurement control information elements or previously detected cell. Once the UE has found a suitable cell, the UE may select it. If no suitable cell is found after performing the cell selection by leveraging stored information, the UE may start the initial cell selection procedure.
[0355] A cell may be suitable cell in response to: being part of either the selected PLMN or the registered PLMN or PLMN of the Equivalent PLMN list, and for that PLMN either; fulfilling the cell selection criteria; being not barred; and being part of at least one TA that is not part of the list of "Forbidden Tracking Areas for Roaming".
[0356] The cell selection criterion is fulfilled when Srxlev > 0 and Squal > 0, wherein:
Srxlev is equal to “Qrxlevmeas - (Qrxlevmin + Qrxlevminoffset )- Pcompensation - Qoffsettemp”; and
Squal is equal to “Squal =
Figure imgf000066_0001
Qoffsettemp ■
[0357] The cell selection criterion may comprise the parameters indicating: cell selection RX level value (e.g., Srxlev); cell selection quality value (e.g., Squal); measured, by the wireless device, cell RX level value (e.g., Qrxlevmeas); measured, by the wireless device, cell quality value (e.g., Qqualmeas); minimum required RX level in the cell (e.g., Qrxlevmin); minimum required quality level in the cell (e.g., Qqualmin); offset to the signalled minimum required RX level in the cell (e.g., Qrxlevminoffset); offset to the signalled minimum required quality level in the cell (e.g., Qrxlevminoffset); power compensation value (e.g., Pcompensation); maximum TX power level of a wireless device may use when transmitting on the uplink in the cell (e.g., PEMAX1, PEMAX2); and maximum RF output power of the wireless device according to the wireless device power class (e.g., PPowerClass).
[0358] When UE is camping on a cell in RRC idle state or RRC inactive state, the UE may perform neighbor cell measurements on one or more neighbor frequencies. The one or more neighbor frequencies may be determined based on the one or more carrier frequencies that SIB4 comprises. Based on the measurement result(s) of the neighbor cell measurements, the UE may search for a better cell. If the better cell is found, the UE may select the cell. The UE may perform cell reselection to the selected cell. A cell may be the better cell if the cell fulfils cell reselection criteria.
[0359] A neighbor cell on a higher priority NR frequency or inter-RAT (e.g., E-UTRA) frequency than the serving frequency may fulfil the cell reselection criteria if:
Squal value of the cell is higher than a threshold (e.g., Threshx, Higho) for a time interval (e.g., T reselection RAT); or Srxlev value of the cell is higher than a threshold (e.g., Threshx, Highp) for a time interval (e.g., TreselectionRAi) and more than one second has elapsed since the UE camped on the current serving cell.
[0360] A neighbor cell on a lower priority NR frequency or inter-RAT (e.g., E-UTRA) frequency than the serving frequency may fulfil the cell reselection criteria if:
Squal value of the serving cell is lower than a serving cell RSRQ threshold (e.g., Th reshserving, LOWQ) and Squal value of the cell is higher than a neighbor cell RSRQ threshold (e.g., Threshx, LOWQ) for a time interval (e.g., TreselectionRAi); or
Srxlev value of the serving cell is lower than a serving cell RSRP threshold (e.g., Thresh serving, LOWP) and Srxlev value of the cell is higher than a neighbor cell RSRP threshold (e.g., Threshx, LOWP) for a time interval (e.g., TreselectionRAi);
[0361] A neighbor cell on an equal priority NR frequency or on same frequency with serving frequency may fulfil the cell reselection criteria if R value of the cell is higher than R value of the serving cell and more than one second has elapsed since the UE camped on the current serving cell, wherein: the R value of the serving cell may be equals to “Qmeas.s +Qhyst - Qoffsettemp”, wherein Qmeas.s indicates RSRP measurement quantity of the serving cell, Qhyst indicates hysteresis value, and Qoffsettemp indicates temporarily applied offset value to the serving cell; and the R value of the neighbor cell may be equals to “Qmeas.n -Qoffset - Qoffsettemp”, wherein Qmeas.n indicates RSRP measurement quantity of the neighbor cell, Qoffset indicates offset value, and Qoffsettemp indicates temporarily applied offset value to the neighbor cell.
[0362] In existing technologies, when a UE receives RRC release message (e.g., RRCRelease message) comprising an idle/inactive measurement configuration, the UE may perform idle/inactive measurements on the one or more carriers to be measured that the idle/inactive measurement configuration comprises and store the measurement result(s) of the idle/inactive measurement. The idle/inactive measurement result(s) of the idle/inactive measurement may be idle/inactive measurement information. When the UE transmits to the RRC connected state, the UE may transmit the idle/inactive measurement information to the base station. RRCResumeComplete message or UElnformati nResponse message may comprise the report of the idle/inactive measurement information.
[0363] The idle/inactive measurement information may comprise all the idle/inactive measurement results of the one or more carriers that were measured since the UE started the idle/inactive measurement until the UE stopped the idle/inactive measurement. Based on the report of idle/inactive measurement information, the base station may transmit, to the UE, configuration of carrier aggregation or dual connectivity (CA/DC) before the UE transmits measurement report of measurement result(s) of one or more measurement objects.
[0364] The idle/inactive measurement configuration may comprise a validity area list. The validity area list comprises one or more validity areas. Each validity area of one or more validity areas is associated with a respective carrier frequency. The UE may release the idle/inactive measurement configuration in response to the validity area list does not include the serving cell. The validity area list may comprise one or more cells that can be aggregated with at least one of the one or more carriers to be measured using CA/DC. The validity area list may not comprise a cell not supporting CA/DC aggregation with the one or more carriers to be measured.
[0365] In an example, the UE may discard stored idle/inactive measurement configuration, stop the idle/inactive measurement duration timer (e.g., T331), and stop performing the idle/inactive measurement in response to the serving cell being not match with any cells in the validity area.
[0366] In existing technologies, when a UE is located at NTN service area, the NTN cells may appear or disappear to the UE. In (quasi-)earth fixed cell case, the cell coverage area of the NTN cell may be fixed for a time period and then the cell coverage may move to the next area. Then the cell coverage may disappear to the UE. In earth moving cell case, the cell coverage area may change over time. Upon an earth moving cell appears to a UE, the relative position of the UE inside the cell coverage may change over time. After a time elapses, the cell coverage may disappear to the UE.
[0367] A serving satellite of an NTN cell may perform feeder link switch to change its serving NTN gateway. If the source gNB and the target gNB are different, the PCIs belonging to the source gNB may be changed to the PCIs belonging to the target gNB. After performing the feeder link switch, one or more PCIs belonging the source gNB may need to be deleted from the validity area and new PCIs, belonging to the target gNB, replacing the one or more PCIs may need to be added to the validity area.
[0368] However, once the UE receives a validity area list from RRC release message, the validity area list is not changed until being released. So, cell addition or removal of a cell in the validity area list is not supported in existing technologies once the UE stores the validity area list. If the UE receives the validity area list from the source cell and the source satellite of the source cell performs feeder link switch, the new serving gNB may assigned new PCIs to one or more cells in the validity area list. After being assigned new PCIs, the one or more cells may have the same CA/DC capabilities. The UE may need to perform idle/inactive measurement when the UE camps on a cell of the one or more cells. However, upon camping on a cell of the one or more cells, the UE will discard the idle/inactive measurement configuration because the validity area list does not include the updated PCIs.
[0369] FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 illustrates an example scenario that one or more cells are updated (e.g., selected and/or determined) after or in response to performing feeder link switch.
[0370] In FIG. 26, at time point t1 , a UE may be camping on cell A in frequency 1. The cell A may be served by satellite 1. Service link of the UE is connected to satellite 1. Neighbor cells of the UE may be cell B and cell C in frequency 2. The cell B and the cell C may be served by satellite 2. Feeder link of the satellite 1 is connected to NTN gateway 1. Feeder link of the satellite 2 is connected to NTN gateway 1. NTN gateway 1 is connected to g N B 1. The gNB1 may support CA/DC between frequency 1 and frequency 2. The cell A may transmit, to the UE, an idle/inactive measurement configuration comprising a validity area list. The validity area list may comprise: cell A in frequency 1 ; and cell B and cell C in frequency 2. Satellite 1 and satellite 2 are moving to NTN gateway 2. After the time point t1, satellite 1 may perform feeder link switch. [0371] In FIG. 27, at time point t2, the satellite 2 may perform the feeder link switch. After performing the feeder link switch, the feeder link of satellite 2 is connected to NTN gateway 2. The NTN gateway 2 is connected to g N B2. Feeder link of the satellite 1 is connected to NTN gateway 1. NTN gateway 1 is connected to gNB. The UE may be camping on cell A in frequency 1. The gNB2 updates the cells in frequency 2 from cell B and cell 0 to cell E and cell F. The cell E may control/manage same radio resource and capabilities with cell B. The cell B may control/manage same radio resource and capabilities with cell 0. The validity area list at t1 may comprise same cells and frequencies as the validity area list at t1 comprises.
[0372] In the example illustrated in FIG. 27, at time point t2, after the satellite 2 performs the feeder link switch, gNB 1 may allocate the PCI of the cell B to a new NTN cell. gNB1 may allocate, to the new NTN cell, a PCI that is same with PCI of the cell B. The UE may perform cell reselection to the new NTN cell. The validity area list at t2 comprises the cell B in frequency 2, the UE may keep the idle/inactive measurement configuration while camping on the new NTN cell that is different from the cell that the validity area list was indicating. The performing idle/inactive measurement while camping on the new NTN cell may be an unnecessary because the new NTN cell may not support CA/DC aggregation with the frequency 1.
[0373] In the example illustrated in FIG. 27, at time point t2, after the satellite 2 performs the feeder link switch, cell E and cell F may support same CA/DC capabilities with cell B and cell C. So, the UE may need to perform idle/inactive measurements while camping on cell E or cell F. However, the UE may release the idle/inactive measurement configuration upon the UE performs cell reselection to cell E or cell F, because the validity area list does not include the cell E and the cell F at the time point t2.
[0374] FIG. 28 illustrates an example embodiment for updating (e.g., selecting and/or determining) validity cells that are associated with validity time condition or validity location condition. At time point tO, a UE may be camping on cell A. The UE may receive RRCRelease message comprising idle/inactive measurement configuration comprising a validity area list. One or more cells in the validity area list may be associated with one or more validity time condition or validity location condition. The validity area list comprises:
Cell A in frequency 1 which does not comprise validity condition. The cell A may be validity cell and the validity area list may comprise the cell A in frequency 1 ;
Cell B in frequency 2 which is associated with a validity time condition. The associated validity time condition of the cell B comprises a start time point tO and an end time point t2. The cell B may be validity cell if the associated validity time condition is satisfied (e.g., current measured time at UE is later than the time point tO and earlier than the time point t2);
Cell C in frequency 2 which is associated with a validity time condition. The associated validity time condition of the cell C comprises a start time point t3 and an end time point t4. The cell C may be validity cell if the associated validity time condition is satisfied (e.g., current measured time at UE is later than the time point t3 and earlier than the time point t4); and Cell D in frequency 2 which is associated with a validity location condition. The associated validity location condition of the cell D comprises a reference location (x, y, z) and a distance threshold Dthreshold. The cell D may be validity cell if the associated validity location condition is satisfied (e.g., the distance between the UE and the reference location is lower than the distance threshold Dthreshold).
[0375] In the disclosure, a validity cell may be (e.g., refer to) a cell that UE uses to validate measurement configuration(s) (e.g., idle/inactive measurement configuration(s)), e.g., configured for measurements during RRC IDLE and/or RRC INACTIVE. For example, UE may receive, from a base station, a message (e.g., RRC release message) comprising one or more validity cells and/or measurement configuration(s) (e.g., idle/inactive measurement configuration(s)). Each validity cell of the one or more validity cells may be associated with a respective carrier frequency. The UE may invalidate the measurement configuration(s) in response to a camp-on cell is not included any of the one or more validity cells. The UE may release (e.g., abandon, discard, delete, and/or remove) the measurement configuration(s) in response to invalidating the measurement configuration(s).
[0376] In the example illustrated in FIG. 28, at the time point tO, the associated validity time condition of the cell B may be satisfied. The cell B in frequency 2 may become validity cell and may be added to the validity area list.
[0377] At the time point t1 , the associated validity location condition of the cell D may be satisfied (e.g., the distance between the UE and the reference location (x, y, z) of the validity location condition associated with cell D being lower than the distance threshold Dthreshold). The cell D in frequency 2 may become validity cell and may be added to the validity area list.
[0378] At the time point t2, the serving satellite of the UE may perform feeder link switch. At the time point t2, the associated validity time condition of the cell B may be not satisfied. The cell B in frequency 2 may become not validity cell and may be deleted from the validity area list.
[0379] At the time point t3, the associated validity time condition of the cell C may be satisfied. The cell C in frequency 2 may become validity cell and may be added to the validity area list.
[0380] At the time point t4, the associated validity time condition of the cell C may be not satisfied. The cell C in frequency 2 may become not validity cell and may be deleted from the validity area list.
[0381] At the time point t5, the associated validity location condition of the cell D may be not satisfied (e.g., the distance between the UE and the reference location (x, y, z) of the validity location condition associated with cell D being higher than the distance threshold Dthreshold). The cell D in frequency 2 may become not validity cell and may be deleted from the validity area list.
[0382] FIG. 29 illustrates an example embodiment for updating (e.g., selecting and/or determining) validity cells that are associated with validity time condition. At time point tO, a UE may be camping on cell A. The UE may receive RRCRelease message comprising idle/inactive measurement configuration comprising a validity area list. One or more cells in the validity area list may be associated with one or more validity time condition. The validity area list comprises:
Cell A in frequency 1 which does not comprise validity condition. The cell A may be validity cell and the validity area list may comprise the cell A in frequency 1 ; Cell B in frequency 2 which is associated with a validity time condition. The associated validity time condition of the cell B comprises a start time point tO and an end time point t2. The cell B may be validity cell if the associated validity time condition is satisfied (e.g., current measured time at UE is later than the time point tO and earlier than the time point t2);
Cell C in frequency 2 which is associated with a validity time condition. The associated validity time condition of the cell C comprises a start time point t1 and an end time point t3. The cell C may be validity cell if the associated validity time condition is satisfied (e.g., current measured time at UE is later than the time point t1 and earlier than the time point t3), [0383] In the example illustrated in FIG. 29, at the time point tO, the associated validity time condition of the cell B may be satisfied. The cell B in frequency 2 may become validity cell and may be added to the validity area list. [0384] At the time point t1 , the associated validity time condition of the cell C may be satisfied. The cell C in frequency 2 may become validity cell and may be added to the validity area list.
[0385] At the time point t2, the associated validity time condition of the cell B may be not satisfied. The cell B in frequency 2 may become not validity cell and may be deleted from the validity area list.
[0386] At the time point t3, the associated validity time condition of the cell C may be not satisfied. The cell 0 in frequency 2 may become not validity cell and may be deleted from the validity area list.
[0387] The idle/inactive measurement configuration may comprise a validity area list, one or more cells, one or more validity time conditions, and one or more validity location conditions. The validity area list may comprise the one or more cells. Each cell of the one or more cells may be associated with one or more validity time conditions and/or one or more validity location conditions. A cell of the one or more cells may be validity cell if at least one of associated validity time condition or validity location condition of the cell is satisfied. The UE may release the idle/inactive measurement configuration in response to the validity cells not comprising the camp-on cell.
[0388] In an embodiment, the UE may receive a radio resource control (RRC) release message (e.g., RRCRelease) comprising a measurement configuration (e.g., mesaldleConfig). The measurement configuration may comprise one or more first cells and one or more validity conditions. The UE may perform cell selection procedure during an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state. The UE may select a camp-on cell based on the cell selection procedure. The UE may determine that the camp-on cell is not a validity cell, wherein the determination of the validity cell is based on the one or more validity conditions. The UE may release the measurement configuration in response to the camp-on cell being not the validity cell.
[0389] In an embodiment illustrated in FIG. 30, the UE may receive a radio resource control (RRC) release message (e.g., RRCRelease) comprising a measurement configuration (e.g., mesaldleConfig). The measurement configuration may comprise one or more first cells and one or more validity conditions. The UE may update (e.g., select and/or determine) a validity cell based on a cell selection procedure during an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state and the one or more validity conditions. The UE may release the measurement configuration in response to a camp-on cell being not a validity cell. [0390] In an embodiment, the UE may receive a radio resource control (RRC) release message (e.g., RRCRe/ease) comprising a measurement configuration (e.g., mesaldleConfig . The measurement configuration may comprise one or more first cells and one or more validity conditions. The UE may release the measurement configuration in response to the camp-on cell is not a validity cell updated (e.g., determined and/or selected) from the one or more first cells based on the one or more validity conditions.
[0391] In an embodiment illustrated in FIG. 31 , the UE may receive a radio resource control (RRC) release message (e.g., RRCRelease) comprising a measurement configuration (e.g., mesaldleConfig) that may be used in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state. The measurement configuration may comprise one or more validity time conditions, one or more validity location conditions, and one or more first cells to validate the measurement configuration. Each cell of the one or more first cells is associated with a respective validity time condition of the one or more validity time conditions and a respective validity location condition of the one or more validity location conditions. The UE may transition to the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state based on the RRC release message. The UE may perform a cell selection procedure during the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state. Based on the cell selection procedure, the UE may: determine a camp-on cell; update (determine and/or select), among the one or more first cells, one or more validity cells based on one or more validity time conditions; and releasing the measurement configuration in response to the one or more validity cells not comprising the camp-on cell.
[0392] FIG. 32 illustrate an example flow diagram of validity cell determination in the disclosure. At 3201, According to example embodiment(s) (e.g., referring to FIG. 31) in the present disclosure, a wireless device may receive a radio resource control (RRC) release message comprising a measurement configuration used in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state. For example, the measurement configuration (e.g., Measld leConfig) indicates: one or more validity time conditions; one or more validity location conditions; and one or more first cells to validate the measurement configuration. For example, each cell of the one or more first cells is associated with: a respective validity time condition of the one or more validity time conditions; and a respective validity location condition of the one or more validity location conditions. At 3202, the wireless device may transition to the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state based on the RRC release message. At 3203, based on a cell selection procedure during the RRC idle state or RRC inactive state: the wireless device may determine a camp-on cell; update (e.g., determine and/or select), among the one or more first cells, one or more validity cells based on one or more validity time conditions; and release the measurement configuration in response to the one or more validity cells not comprising the camp-on cell.
[0393] FIG. 33 illustrate an example flow diagram of validity cell determination in the disclosure. At 3301, According to example embodiment(s) (e.g., referring to FIG. 30) in the present disclosure, a wireless device may receive a radio resource control (RRC) release message comprising a measurement configuration indicating: one or more first cells; and one or more validity conditions. At 3302, the wireless device may select, based on a cell selection procedure during an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state, a camp-on cell. At 3303, the wireless device may release the measurement configuration in response to a determination that the camp-on cell is not a validity cell. For example, the determination is based on the validity conditions.
[0394] According to example embodiment(s) (e.g., referring to FIG. 30) in the present disclosure, a wireless device may receive a radio resource control (RRC) release message comprising a measurement configuration indicating: one or more first cells; and one or more validity conditions. The wireless device may update (e.g., determine and/or select) a validity cell based on: a cell selection procedure during an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state; and the one or more validity conditions. The wireless device may release the measurement configuration in response to a camp-on cell is not a validity cell.
[0395] According to example embodiment(s) (e.g., referring to FIG. 30) in the present disclosure, a wireless device may receive a radio resource control (RRC) release message comprising a measurement configuration indicating: one or more first cells; and one or more validity conditions; and releasing the measurement configuration in response to a camp-on cell is not a validity cell updated (e.g., determined and/or selected) from the one or more first cells based on the one or more validity conditions.
[0396] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the radio resource control (RRC) release message comprises an RRC connection release message (e.g. RRCRelease message).
[0397] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the measurement configuration comprises an idle/inactive measurement configuration (e.g., idleMeasConfig, MeasIdleConfigDedicated).
[0398] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the cell selection procedure comprises determining, as the camp-on cell, a cell in which the wireless device: receives MIB and/or SIB; or monitors a control channel.
[0399] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may select the cell based on one or more measurements that the wireless device performs while in RRC idle state or RRC inactive state. [0400] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the cell is referred to as a suitable cell or an acceptable cell.
[0401] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may perform, after receiving the RRC release message, a cell reselection procedure during the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state. [0402] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, cell reselection procedure comprises identifying, as the camp-on cell, a cell in which the wireless device: receives MIB and/or SIB; or monitors a control channel.
[0403] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may perform cell reselection procedure is based on one or more measurements that the wireless device performs while in RRC idle state or RRC inactive state. [0404] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the measurement configuration comprises one or more parameters (e.g., carrierFreq EUTRA-r16 with a value of ARFCN-ValueEUTRA) indicating one or more E-UTRA carrier frequencies to be measured during RRC idle state or RRC inactive state.
[0405] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the measurement configuration comprises one or more parameters (e.g., carrierFreq-r16 with a value of ARFCN-ValueNR) indicating one or more NR carrier frequencies to be measured during RRC idle state or RRC inactive state.
[0406] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the measurement configuration comprises a timer value, of a timer (e.g., measl d le Du ration-r 16), indicating a duration for performing measurements while in the RRC idle state or RRC inactive state.
[0407] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the timer is T331.
[0408] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may, in response to receiving the timer value, start the timer based on the timer value.
[0409] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, each cell of the one or more first cells comprises a first cell.
[0410] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the measurement configuration comprises a validity area list (e.g., ValidityAreal_ist-r16).
[0411] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the validity area list comprises one or more validity areas.
[0412] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the one or more validity area comprises a validity area (e.g., ValidityArea-r16), wherein the validity area is associated with a respective frequency. [0413] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, a first validity area of the one or more validity areas indicates one or more cells (e.g., ValidityCellList-r16) in which the wireless device performs measurements at a first frequency respective to the first validity area while in RRC idle state and RRC inactive state. [0414] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, each cell of the one or more first cells is associated with one of the one or more validity areas.
[0415] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the validity area comprises physical cell identity of the first cell.
[0416] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the validity area comprises a subcarrier spacing parameter (e.g., ssbSubcarrierSpacing-r16) indicating subcarrier spacing of SSB of the associated respective frequency of the validity area.
[0417] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the one or more cells comprise a physical cell identity range (e.g., PCI-Range) indicating a single or a range of physical cell identities.
[0418] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the one or more validity conditions comprise one or more validity time conditions. [0419] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the one or more validity time conditions comprise a validity time condition.
[0420] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the validity time condition comprises at least one of: a start time threshold; and an end time threshold.
[0421] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may determine: the validity time condition being satisfied in response to the time measured at UE being later than the start time threshold. For example, the time validity condition comprises the start time threshold and does not comprise the end time threshold; the validity time condition being satisfied in response to the time measured at UE being earlier than the end time threshold. For example, the time validity condition comprises the end time threshold and does not comprise the start time threshold; or the validity time condition being satisfied in response to the time measured at UE being later than the start time threshold and being earlier than the end time threshold. For example, the time validity condition comprises the start time threshold and the end time threshold.
[0422] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the one or more validity conditions comprise one or more validity location conditions.
[0423] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the one or more validity location conditions comprise a validity location condition.
[0424] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the validity location condition comprises at least one of: a reference location; a distance threshold; and a geographical area.
[0425] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the geographical area comprises a polygonal area that comprises one or more: orthogonal coordinates; and polar coordinates.
[0426] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may determine: that the validity location condition being satisfied in response to the distance between the wireless device and the reference location being lower than the distance threshold; determining of the validity location condition being satisfied in response to the distance between the camp-on cell and the reference location being lower than the distance threshold; or determining of the validity location condition being satisfied in response to the UE location being inside or within the geographical area.
[0427] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the first cell is associated with one or more validity time conditions.
[0428] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the first cell is associated with one or more validity location conditions.
[0429] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may determine the first cell being validity cell in response to: at least one of validity time condition associated with the first cell being satisfied; or at least one of validity location condition associated with the first cell being satisfied. [0430] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, a first validity time condition of the one or more validity time conditions is associated one or more second cells, wherein the one or more first cells comprises each cell of the one or more second cells.
[0431] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may determine that the one or more second cells are validity cells in response to the first validity time condition being satisfied.
[0432] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, a first validity location condition of the one or more validity location conditions is associated one or more third cells. For example, the one or more first cells comprises each cell of the one or more third cells.
[0433] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may determine that the one or more third cells are validity cells in response to the first validity time condition being satisfied.
[0434] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may determine each cell of the one or more first cells being validity cell in response to: receiving RRC release message comprising the measurement configuration; or in response to performing the cell selection.
[0435] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may validate the measurement configuration in response to determining each cell of the one or more first cells being validity cell.
[0436] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, validating the measurement configuration comprises releasing the measurement configuration in response to the validity cell not comprising the serving cell.
[0437] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, validating the measurement configuration comprises releasing the measurement configuration in response to the validity cell not comprising the camp-on cell.
[0438] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device transitions: to the RRC inactive state, wherein the RRC release message comprises a suspend configuration (e.g. suspendConfig); or to the RRC idle state, wherein the RRC release message does not comprise the suspend configuration. [0439] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, in response to receiving the measurement configuration, the wireless device stores the one or more E-UTRA carriers to be measured and one or more NR carriers to be measured.
[0440] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may, in response to receiving the measurement configuration, store the one or more E-UTRA carriers to be measured and one or more NR carriers to be measured being broadcast (e.g., SIB11). For example, the RRC release message comprises the measurement configuration comprising neither the one or more E-UTRA carriers to be measured nor one or more NR carriers to be measured.
[0441] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may store the one or more E-UTRA carriers and the one or more NR carriers to be measured being broadcast in response to: selecting a cell when entering RRC idle state or RRC inactive state from RRC connected state or RRC inactive state; or receiving update of system information (e.g., SIB4, or SIB11).
[0442] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the storing the one or more E-UTRA carriers to be measured being broadcast comprises: storing or replacing the one or more E-UTRA carriers to be measured from the system information, wherein the system information comprises one or more E-UTRA carriers to be measured; and removing the one or more E-UTRA carriers to be measured from the system information, wherein the system information does not comprise one or more E-UTRA carriers to be measured and the wireless device does not have stored one or more E-UTRA carriers to be measured.
[0443] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the storing the one or more NR carriers to be measured being broadcast comprises: storing or replacing the one or more NR carriers to be measured from the system information, wherein the system information comprises one or more NR carriers to be measured; and removing the one or more NR carriers to be measured from the system information, wherein the system information does not comprise one or more NR carriers to be measured and the wireless device does not have stored one or more NR carriers to be measured.
[0444] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may perform measurements in a E-UTRA carrier. For example: the one or more E-UTRA carriers comprises the E-UTRA carrier; an E-UTRA broadcast indication (e.g., idleModeMeasurementsEUTRA) indicates to perform measurements on the E- UTRA carriers; and NE-DC between the serving carrier and the E-UTRA carrier is supported, by the wireless device. [0445] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may consider: RSRQ as the sorting quantity, wherein a report quantity indication (e.g., reportQuantitiesEUTRA) indicates RSRQ; and RSRP as the sorting quantity, wherein the report quantity indication (e.g., reportQuantitiesEUTRA) does not indicate RSRQ.
[0446] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may store: the measurements of a list of E-UTRA cells of the E-UTRA carrier. For example, the measurement configuration comprises the list of E-UTRA cells of the E-UTRA carrier; or the measurements of up to a number (e.g., maxCellMeasIdle) of strongest identified cells, according to the sorting quantity. For example, the measurement configuration does not comprise the list of E-UTRA cells of the E-UTRA carrier.
[0447] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may perform measurements in a NR carrier. For example: the one or more NR carriers comprises the NR carrier; an NR broadcast indication (e.g., idleModeMeasurementsNR) indicates to perform measurements on the NR carriers; and carrier aggregation or NR-DC between the serving carrier and the NR carrier is supported, by the wireless device.
[0448] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may consider: RSRQ as the sorting quantity, wherein a report quantity indication (e.g., reportQuantities) indicates RSRQ; and RSRP as the sorting quantity, wherein the report quantity indication (e.g., reportQuantities) does not indicate RSRQ. [0449] Either alone or in combination with any of the above or below features, the wireless device may store: the measurements of a list of NR cells of the NR carrier (e.g, measCellListNR), wherein the measurement configuration comprises the list of NR cells of the NR carrier; or the measurements of up to a number (e.g., maxCell Measldle) of strongest identified cells, according to the sorting quantity, wherein the measurement configuration does not comprise the list of NR cells of the NR carrier.

Claims

CLAIMS A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device, a radio resource control (RRC) release message comprising a measurement configuration used in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state, wherein the measurement configuration indicates: one or more first cells; and for each cell of the one or more first cells, one or more validity conditions to determine whether the measurement configuration is valid, wherein the one or more validity conditions comprise at least one of: one or more validity time conditions; or one or more validity location conditions; transitioning, by the wireless device, to the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state based on the RRC release message; performing, by the wireless device based on a received signal power, a cell selection procedure to select a camp-on cell; determining, by the wireless device during the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state and based on the one or more validity conditions, one or more valid cells of the one or more first cells; and based on the determining: in response to the one or more valid cells comprising the camp-on cell, performing, by the wireless device using the measurement configuration, measurements on one or more frequencies; or in response to the one or more valid cells not comprising the camp-on cell, releasing, by the wireless device, the measurement configuration. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device, a measurement configuration indicating one or more validity conditions for determining cell validity; and releasing the measurement configuration based on a cell, selected by the wireless device, not being valid. The method of claim 2, wherein the measurement configuration further indicates one or more first cells. The method of claim 3, wherein the one or more validity conditions are used for determining whether the measurement configuration is valid based on the cell validity for each cell of the one or more first cells. The method of one or more of claims 2 to 4, wherein the one or more validity conditions comprise at least one of: one or more validity time conditions; or one or more validity location conditions. The method of one or more of claims 2 to 5, wherein the one or more validity conditions comprise at least one of: one or more frequencies; one or more physical cell identities; or one or more ranges of physical cell identities. The method of one or more of claims 2 to 6, wherein the measurement configuration is received via a radio resource control (RRC) release message. The method of claim 7, further comprising transitioning, by the wireless device, to an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state based on the RRC release message. The method of one or more of claims 2 to 8, wherein the measurement configuration is used in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state. The method of one or more of claims 2 to 9, wherein the cell selected by the wireless device is a camp-on cell. The method of one or more of claims 2 to 10, further comprising performing, by the wireless device based on a received signal power, a cell selection procedure to select the cell selected by the wireless device. The method of one or more of claims 2 to 11 , further comprising determining, by the wireless device based on the one or more validity conditions, one or more valid cells. The method of claim 12, wherein the wireless device determines one or more valid cells during an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state. The method of claim 12, wherein wireless device determines one or more valid cells of one or more first cells. The method of claim 12, wherein the one or more valid cells do not comprise the cell selected by the wireless device. The method of claim 12, wherein the one or more valid cells comprise the cell selected by the wireless device. The method of one or more of claims 2 to 16, further comprising performing, by the wireless device, measurements on one or more frequencies based on the cell selected by the wireless device being valid. The method of claim 17, wherein the performing measurements is based on the measurement configuration. The method of one or more of claims 2 to 18, wherein the measurement configuration comprises an idle or inactive measurement configuration. The method of one or more of claims 2 to 19, further comprising sending, by the wireless device, an indication indicating that idle measurement results or inactive measurement results are available. The method of one or more of claims 2 to 20, further comprising: receiving, by the wireless device, a message indicating a request for one or more measurement results; and sending, by the wireless device, the one or more measurement results based on receiving the message indicating a request for the one or more measurement results. A method comprising: sending, by a base station to a wireless device, a measurement configuration indicating one or more validity conditions for determining cell validity. The method of claim 22, wherein the measurement configuration further indicates one or more first cells. The method of claim 23, wherein the one or more validity conditions are used for determining whether the measurement configuration is valid based on the cell validity for each cell of the one or more first cells. The method of one or more of claims 22 to 24, wherein the one or more validity conditions comprise at least one of: one or more validity time conditions; or one or more validity location conditions. The method of one or more of claims 22 to 25, wherein the one or more validity conditions comprise at least one of: one or more frequencies; one or more physical cell identities; or one or more ranges of physical cell identities. The method of one or more of claims 22 to 26, wherein the measurement configuration is received via a radio resource control (RRC) release message. The method of one or more of claims 22 to 27, wherein the measurement configuration is used in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state. The method of one or more of claims 22 to 28, wherein the measurement configuration comprises an idle or inactive measurement configuration. The method of one or more of claims 22 to 29, further comprising receiving, by the base station from the wireless device, an indication indicating that idle measurement results or inactive measurement results associated with the measurement configuration are available. The method of one or more of claims 22 to 30, further comprising: sending, by the base station to the wireless device, a message indicating a request for one or more measurement results; and receiving, by the base station from the wireless device, the one or more measurement results based on receiving the message indicating a request for one or more measurement results. The method of one or more of claims 22 to 31, further comprising configuring, by the base station based on the wireless device transitioning to an RRC connected state, at least one of: carrier aggregation to the wireless device; or multi-radio access technology dual connectivity to the wireless device. An apparatus comprising one or more processors and memory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the apparatus to perform the method of any of claims 2 to 32. A non-transitory computer-readable medium comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of an apparatus, cause the apparatus to perform the method of any one of claims 2 to 32.
PCT/US2023/036667 2022-11-04 2023-11-02 Conditional validity area WO2024097332A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202263422766P 2022-11-04 2022-11-04
US63/422,766 2022-11-04

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024097332A1 true WO2024097332A1 (en) 2024-05-10

Family

ID=89121494

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2023/036667 WO2024097332A1 (en) 2022-11-04 2023-11-02 Conditional validity area

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2024097332A1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022038510A1 (en) * 2020-08-17 2022-02-24 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Using the expected time to be served as cell selection and reselection criterion in a non-terrestrial network
WO2022155177A1 (en) * 2021-01-12 2022-07-21 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. New radio device support for non-terrestrial networks in idle mode and in rrc inactive state

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022038510A1 (en) * 2020-08-17 2022-02-24 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Using the expected time to be served as cell selection and reselection criterion in a non-terrestrial network
WO2022155177A1 (en) * 2021-01-12 2022-07-21 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. New radio device support for non-terrestrial networks in idle mode and in rrc inactive state

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022047391A1 (en) Subsequent data information for small data transmission
CN116458258A (en) Completion indication for small data transmissions
US20230209647A1 (en) Discontinuous Reception in Non-Terrestrial Network
US20230099762A1 (en) Timing Advance Reporting in Non-Terrestrial Networks
US20220377780A1 (en) Scheduling Request in Non-Terrestrial Networks
US20220322459A1 (en) Random access associated with buffer status reporting
US20220322414A1 (en) Scheduling Requests in Non-Terrestrial Networks
US20230254851A1 (en) Timing Alignment for Uplink Transmissions in NTN
WO2023205384A1 (en) Uplink transmission scheduling in non-terrestrial networks
WO2023205408A1 (en) Message-3 retransmission scheduling for random access in non-terrestrial networks
US20230309127A1 (en) Resource Configuration in Non-Terrestrial Networks
WO2024097332A1 (en) Conditional validity area
US20230388952A1 (en) Reporting Timing Advance Information in Non-Terrestrial Networks
US20240121060A1 (en) Timing Advance Acquisition in Non-Terrestrial Networks
US20230189345A1 (en) Contention Resolution in Non-Terrestrial Networks
US20230209386A1 (en) Report Transmissions in Discontinuous Reception for Non-Terrestrial Networks
US20230344557A1 (en) Medium Access Control Application Timing in Non-Terrestrial Networks
US20240155643A1 (en) Control Channel Monitoring in a Wireless Network
US20230043620A1 (en) Two Step Random Access in Non-Terrestrial Networks
US20240049297A1 (en) Random Access in Non-Terrestrial Network
US20240090042A1 (en) Random Access Procedure with Buffer Status Report
US20230045529A1 (en) Switching Between Two-Step and Four-Step Random Access Procedures in Non-Terrestrial Networks
WO2024073126A1 (en) Conditional handover report
US20230039872A1 (en) Uplink Transmission Cancellation in Non-Terrestrial Networks
WO2024072956A1 (en) Uplink control channel repetitions in non-terrestrial networks